JP2020006235A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: determination means for determining whether or not special information satisfies a predetermined condition; assistance means for assisting entry of game balls to a ball entry section; state change means for changing the state of the assistance means between a first state in which entry of game balls to the ball entry section is impossible or difficult and a second state in which entry of game balls to the ball entry section is possible or easy; and control means for controlling the state change means which can execute at least first control mode and second control mode as a control mode having different modes in which the state change means changes the state of the assistance means. The control means includes means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of a game round of informing a player of the result of a determination, on the basis of the result of the determination obtained by determination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 84

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, the structure, control, and the like for the purpose of improving the interest of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, etc. Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as staging (for example, Patent Document 1).

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as detection and deterrence of illegal acts by the player and illegal alteration of the gaming machine.

JP 2011-172988 A

  In the above-mentioned gaming machines, for the purpose of improving the interest of the gaming, reducing the processing load of the gaming machines, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, simplifying the structure, providing more sound gaming, etc., Improvement of technology is desired.

  SUMMARY An advantage of some aspects of the invention is to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and the invention can be implemented as the following embodiments.

[Form]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time execution means for executing the game time, when the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times;
Firing means for firing a game ball;
A ball entry section into which the launched game balls can enter,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of game balls into the entry section,
The first state is a state in which the state of the auxiliary means makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the entry section, and the state allows the game ball to enter the entry section easily or easily. State transition means for transitioning to a second state that is a
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control means is capable of executing at least a first control mode and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. Means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means,
Means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of a game round for notifying the result of the determination based on the result of the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine.

  According to the above embodiment, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and the display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters used for a jackpot lottery etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 1st starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 2nd starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table (power-on duty openness lottery success / failure table) used at the time of performing an electrically-driven accessory opening lottery. It is a time chart explaining the point giving effect (case 1) executed by the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision effect X1 is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision effect X2 is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode that the point provision effect X3 is performed. It is an explanatory view for explaining a timer effect and a button press effect. It is a time chart explaining the point giving effect (case 2) executed by the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a color of a stage. It is explanatory drawing explaining the effect during standby. It is an explanatory view for explaining a point giving effect in which no points are given. It is an explanatory view for explaining a timer effect and a button press effect that are executed in the game times. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows a first judgment process. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot / reach information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation time information acquisition process. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing for through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows a game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation time. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric role support. It is a flow chart which shows electric opening and closing control processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in a sound side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a command correspondence process. It is an explanatory view explaining the composition of a game time setting information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a prize. It is a flow chart which shows production information setting processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining a jackpot effect scenario table. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production scenario table for reach. It is an explanatory view explaining a production scenario corresponding to temporary fluctuation time T = t4 of a big hit production scenario table as an example. It is explanatory drawing explaining the jackpot / reach point provision scenario table. It is explanatory drawing explaining the jackpot / reach point grant scenario. It is explanatory drawing explaining the non-reach effect scenario table. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production scenario corresponding to provisional fluctuation time T = t24 of the production scenario table for non-reach as an example. It is an explanatory view explaining a point grant scenario table for non-reach. It is an explanatory view explaining each point grant scenario for non-reach. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is an image figure of an effect pattern generated based on an effect scenario and a point giving scenario set in a game round to be processed. It is an explanatory view for explaining an effect pattern table for point giving effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a production pattern for point giving effect recorded in the effect pattern table for point giving effect. It is a flowchart which shows a point provision effect execution process. It is a flowchart which shows a point accumulation process. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing at the time of point filling. It is a flowchart which shows a button press production process. It is a flowchart which shows a point reset process. It is a flowchart which shows a stage display control process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is explanatory drawing explaining the production scenario of the continuous production last game time and the point provision scenario in the modification 8 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating Modification Example 9 of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a point giving effect in a modification 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating Modification Example 13 of the first embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining an addition history area. It is explanatory drawing explaining an addition history area. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a point giving effect in modification 14 of the first embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the point provision effect of a multiplication mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining a display mode of a pearl image in a case where a mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during execution of one point giving effect. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display mode of accumulated points. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode in which a boundary line of a partial image of a pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed as a display mode of accumulated points. It is an explanatory view showing a situation where the display mode of the accumulation points has been changed. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration in which a plurality of positions (images) having a function of accumulating given points are displayed on a display surface 41a. It is an explanatory view for explaining a point giving effect in which the number of given points is displayed at the start. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a threshold reaching effect. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of a carryover change effect. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a timer time extension effect. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory view showing a design and a display surface which are variably displayed in the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters used for a winning lottery etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 1st starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table for 2nd starting ports. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the success / failure table (power-on duty openness lottery success / failure table) used at the time of performing an electrically-driven accessory opening lottery. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game in a gaming machine. It is a time chart explaining a special bonus process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows a game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the hold | maintenance information shift process for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the determination processing for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation | variation time for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting-port hold information shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the determination processing for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation | variation time for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows a highly reliable high frequency variation time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the highly accurate low frequency variation time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd fluctuation | variation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening / closing scenario setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an opening time setting process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric role support. It is a flowchart which shows an electric-power opening / closing process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a sound light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a state storage process. It is a flowchart which shows a display mode switching process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special times game effect production. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for main display areas. It is a flowchart which shows the special game play effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation time measurement process for special 1. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special twice game effect production. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for main display areas. It is an explanatory view for explaining the process of setting an effect pattern for a small hit at the time of a special bonus. It is a flowchart which shows the special twice game time effect execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation time measurement process for special 2. It is a flowchart showing a special bonus effect setting process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process executed in the MPU of the display control device.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Application to other configurations:
D. Regarding the inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc .:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
The structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facilities of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged on a front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  At an approximate center of the front door frame 14, an open window 18 is formed. Around the window 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illuminated component is configured by light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by lighting or flashing at the time of a jackpot lottery, a jackpot winning, or a reach occurrence performed by the pachinko machine 10. On the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as lent balls lent from a lending machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and the player can operate the lever 23 to switch between the closed state and the open state of the outlet 22. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, game balls fall from the discharge port 22, and the game balls are discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the periphery of the upper plate 20 as operation receiving means. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the staging operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the game ball firing mechanism from firing the game ball by pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25 And a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the variable resistor by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in a front view, a game ball firing button 26 for operation by a player is provided. The game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, so that the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board at a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing intensity as when the rotation amount of the operation handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when a game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board in a front view and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called “right-hand”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby launching the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front is adopted, but the configuration in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged in another position is adopted. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (the peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only the right hand.

  FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of an outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and thereafter flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is provided. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a general-purpose unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general winning opening 32 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The first starting port 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a jackpot lottery described later is executed.

  The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port through which game balls can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery described later is executed. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electrical accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electrification opening is won, the electric auditors product 34a shifts to the electrification opening state which is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through and passes through the second area. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot or small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable prize device 36 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the state changes from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, the state transits to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

  An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30. Game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. Each of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

  The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying a first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is fluctuated or stopped based on a jackpot lottery triggered by entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display portion 37a is used as a display mode until a jackpot lottery is performed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, and the segment display performs a display corresponding to the lottery result. , A variable display of the first symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game time in which a jackpot lottery is executed when a game ball enters the first start port 33 is also referred to as a first start port game time.

  The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is displayed fluctuated or stopped based on a jackpot lottery triggered by entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is used as a display mode until a jackpot lottery triggered by entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 causes the segment display to display a display corresponding to the lottery result. , The second symbol is fluctuated or given. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment display to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game time in which a jackpot lottery is executed when a game ball enters the second starting port 34 is also referred to as a second starting port game time.

  Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop symbol is displayed. Also called fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a to the stop display thereof is also referred to as a first variable time, and the second symbol display section 37b displays the first symbol. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also referred to as a second variable time.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first holding display section 37c and a second holding display section 37d formed of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

  The first hold display section 37c displays the number of held first startup ports 33 by the color or combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are reserved.

  The second hold display section 37d displays the number of held second start-up ports 34 by the color or combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

  The general-purpose unit 38 includes a light-emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The general-purpose unit 38 displays a light-on display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display as a display mode of the light-emitting display device when an electric accessory opening lottery triggered by passing through the through gate 35 is performed. When the motor-operated accessory opening lottery ends, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display section 39 is configured by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. The round game means opening and closing until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of displaying the lottery result and the lottery result.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT.

  When the first symbol display section 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. I do. In addition, when the second symbol display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the entering of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the symbol with the variable display or the predetermined display. Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to performing a variable display or a predetermined display of a symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, and when a jackpot is won. The effect display and the like in the opening / closing execution mode to be shifted are also performed. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a which are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing a liquid crystal symbol that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. The liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41, and corresponds to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. It is a design. In the case where a game cycle triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 is being executed, a liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a is displayed on the display surface. When the game time is displayed on the second symbol display section 37b and displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b, the liquid crystal corresponding to the second symbol is displayed. The design for use is displayed on the display surface 41a.

  As shown in FIG. 3A, symbols 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 as symbols for the liquid crystal. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design which added the design of the character etc. to each design which shows number 1-8 as a design displayed by change.

  FIG. 3B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 3A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has a periodicity from top to bottom or from bottom to bottom. A variable display scrolling upward is performed. As shown in FIG. 3B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L. Specifically, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, a variable display in which the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display is terminated and the stop display is performed, and when the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is a jackpot winning, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L. In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described mode, and the number of symbol columns, the number of active lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, the symbol of each symbol column. Various modes can be adopted as the mode of variable display of symbols, such as the number.

  Here, the game times refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b to the end of the variable display to the stop display, to the end of the stop display, This is one unit of processing for notifying a player of a lottery result of a jackpot lottery for special information acquired based on winning of either the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the result of one big hit lottery every game time. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the pachinko machine 10 displays the first symbol display portion 37a or the In either one of the two symbol display sections 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 After the symbol row is variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be a display corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one game round is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is constituted by a fluctuating time which is a time from when the fluctuating display is started until a predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is a time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 3B, a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of held games based on winning in the first starting port 33 is displayed. In the second reserved display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of reserved games based on winning in the second starting port 34 is displayed. The reserved game time is an unexecuted game time, and is a variation for notifying the lottery result of the jackpot lottery with respect to the special information acquired based on the winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. The game times whose display has not been started are referred to. The number of reserved game times that can be reserved based on the winning in the first starting port 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, a hold display corresponding to the four hold game times (hereinafter, also referred to as a first hold game time display) can be displayed in the first hold display area Ds1. Further, the number of pending game times that can be reserved based on the winning in the second starting port 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, a hold display corresponding to the four hold game times (hereinafter, also referred to as a second hold game time display) can be displayed in the second hold display area Ds2.

  Further, a first execution game time display area J1, a second execution game time display area J2, and a stage St are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. The first execution game time display area J1 and the second execution game time display area J2 indicate whether the game time to be executed (the game time being executed) is a game time based on a winning in the first opening 33 or a second time. This indicates whether the game has been played based on winning in the mouth 34. In the first execution game time display area J1, a game time based on winning in the first starting port 33 is displayed, and in the second execution game time display area J2, a game time based on winning in the second starting port 34 is displayed. Is done. Further, when the reserved game time displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 is executed as a game time, the image indicating the reserved game time displayed in the first reserved display area Ds1 is displayed as the first executed game time. Move to display area J1. When the reserved game time displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 is executed as a game time, an image indicating the reserved game time displayed in the second reserved display area Ds2 is displayed in the second executed game time display area. Move to J2. Hereinafter, the display in the first execution game time display area J1 is also referred to as a first execution game time display, and the display in the second execution game time display area J2 is also referred to as a second execution game time display.

  The stage St is used for a point giving effect described later. How to use the point giving effect and the stage St will be described later in detail.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 3B, the display surface 41a has a blinking display and lighting synchronized with the first symbol change display and the stop display displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a of the special figure unit 37. A first synchronous display section Sync1 for displaying, and a second synchronous display for blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special figure unit 37. Section Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is performing the fluctuation display, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 performs the blinking display, and when the first symbol display unit 37a is performing the stop display, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 is performing the stop display. The 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Also, when the second symbol display section 37b is performing the fluctuation display, the second synchronous display section Sync2 performs the blinking display, and when the second symbol display section 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronous display is performed. The unit Sync2 performs lighting display.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a includes a main display area MA, a first execution game time display area J1, a second execution game time display area J2, a stage St, a first synchronization display unit Sync1, and a second execution game time display area Sync1. Although the configuration is such that the synchronous display unit Sync2 is displayed, a configuration in which the display surface 41a does not display a part or all of these displays may be employed.

A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that a part of the function of the MPU 62 may be provided in another element. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 receives the supply of DC stable 24 V power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into necessary operating power by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, and the like, and supplies the necessary power to each device. Supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, there are provided various kinds of entrances and through gates such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. Various detection sensors are connected. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entrance, based on the signals from these detection sensors, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not it has been performed. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit 34b for opening and closing the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. The opening / closing door drive section 48b for opening and closing the opening / closing door 48a and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the open / close door 36b is opened / closed. In addition, as a result of the election for opening the electric accessory, when the election to open the electric combination is won, the MPU 62 controls the driving of the electric accessory driving unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b on the main display portion 45, and displays the round display on the main display portion 45 in the open / close execution mode. The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting opening 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34 is specified. The main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out a prize ball.

  A firing control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board at an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, to the launch control device 80, the game ball launch button 26 is connected. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When transmitting various commands, main controller 60 refers to command information storage area 63f of ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and control of driving of the speaker 46. Is performed, and the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the sound emission control device 90 is connected to the effect operation button 24, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. , The presence or absence of the reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect performed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed in a variable manner. In the present embodiment, the stop time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is stopped and displayed is constant. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game time, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. When sorting the jackpot types, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not to generate reach when a symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is deviated and changed.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, a variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the symbol display device 41. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used in an electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b has a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the time of entry are stored in the hold information storage area. The data is stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra of 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS at the timing of the entry of the ball are stored in the hold information storage area 64b. 2 are stored in chronological order in the reservation area Rb.

  The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to add one by one in the range of 0 to 1199, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering ball. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the game ball is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, is compared with the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined. Is determined. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not a big hit occurs.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb indicates that a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port. Then, the processing moves to the execution area AE of the determination processing execution area 64c in the order obtained. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 that has moved to the execution area AE is compared with the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not a big hit occurs.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 39, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the game ball when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the game ball is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs the judgment process execution area 64c. Is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. . In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the second starting port 34 Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. Is determined. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. Is determined. However, in a case where the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the occurrence of the reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach means that, for some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, some of the symbol combinations corresponding to the jackpot may be stopped. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in that state, and the symbols are changed and displayed in the remaining symbol columns. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment refers to a combination of identical symbols in a predetermined activated line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 3B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed by performing the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, while performing the fluctuation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, The combination of the design in which the reach line is formed is reduced or not displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. In addition, when a reach effect is performed or before a reach display, a determination as to whether or not to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using a reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and determining the variation pattern at the time of the symbol variation starting by the symbol display device 41. When determining the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e is performed. Using the value of the counter C4, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. For example, when C4 = 0,1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in an open state, and when C4 = 2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in a closed state.

  Note that at least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4, and the value of the variation type counter CS is special information according to the present invention. Is equivalent to Also, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

  Next, the hit / fail table will be described. The success / failure table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery. At the time of the jackpot lottery in the low-probability mode, the winning / non-prize table for the low probability mode is referred to, At the time of the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 checks the timing with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. And a win / fail table for matching the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 as different table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine whether or not the first starting port has a low / high probability table, the first starting port has a high / low probability table, and the second starting port has a low / high probability table. Four hit / fail tables for the probability mode (for the probability mode) and for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the first starting port hit / fail table. FIG. 6A shows a hit / fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 6B shows a hit / fail table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 6A, in the hit / fail table for the first starting port (for the low-probability mode), five values from 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot. I have. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the hit / fail table for the first starting port (for the high probability mode), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which becomes a jackpot. Have been. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of range. As described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the second starting port hit / fail table. FIG. 7A shows a hit / fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 7B shows a hit / fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 7A, five values 0 to 4 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for the low probability mode). I have. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out of range. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), in the success / failure table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which becomes the jackpot. Have been. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out of range. As described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

  In the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit table for low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit table for high probability mode. Included in the group. However, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the jackpot lottery results in a higher probability of the jackpot being higher in the high probability mode than in the lower probability mode.

  Although not adopted in the winning / failing table in the present embodiment, a “small hit” may be provided as a result of the big hit lottery.

  The “small hit” is an opportunity to shift to the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing of the variable prize device 36 is executed, but not to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, “out” does not serve as a transition trigger of the opening / closing execution mode, and furthermore, is a success / failure result that does not trigger a transition in the lottery mode and the support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing a difference between the following three modes or modes, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set.
(1) Number of open / close times (number of rounds) of the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening / closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of jackpot lottery after completion of opening / closing execution mode

  As a mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, generation of a ball (winning) of a game ball to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency prize mode, one opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening and closing door 36b reaches 10 pieces. can do. On the other hand, in the low frequency prize mode, it is necessary to set so that one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode continues until 1.6 seconds elapse or the number of balls entering the opening / closing door 36b becomes ten. Can be.

  The opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are determined by the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable prize device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the high-frequency winning mode is higher than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, it is sufficient that the open limit time for one open is longer or the open limit number for one open is set larger in the high frequency win mode than in the low frequency win mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which no winning occurs in the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning modes are not provided as the opening / closing execution mode, and the high-frequency winning mode described above is performed during the opening / closing execution mode. That is, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode is set to be continued until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches ten.

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 8A shows the distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8B shows the distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to at the time of a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to the second starting port. Is referred to at the time of a jackpot lottery based on the entry of a game ball.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the first starting port 33, 8R certain variable big hit and 8R normal big hit are set. ing.

  In the 8R probability change jackpot, the opening / closing control mode of the variable prize device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the opening / closing execution mode is ended. This is a jackpot where the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the opening and closing execution mode is a low probability mode, and the mode after the opening and closing execution mode is ended. This is a jackpot where the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 24” corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and “25 to 39” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

  As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 16R certain variable jackpot and 16R normal jackpot are set as the jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 24” corresponds to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and “25 to 39” corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot. It corresponds to.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot is a case where the jackpot is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33, and There is a difference between a case where a big hit is made based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, and a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When the four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is 16R probable jackpot the highest, 8R probable jackpot the next highest, then 16R normal jackpot, and finally 8R normal jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player in this manner, the monotony of the game is suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and performs the jackpot classification using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Further, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to stop and display the segment display on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Determine the display mode. In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the end of the opening / closing execution mode described above, the firing of the game ball to the game area PA is continued in the same mode. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are configured such that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 being opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in the situation where Can be set.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electrification opening in the electrification opening lottery using the electrification accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electrification opening in the election for opening the electric accessory is set higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In the high frequency support mode, one opening time of the electric accessory 34a is set to be longer when the electrification is released than in the low frequency support mode.

  Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the electric utility release is elected in the high frequency support mode and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, after one open state ends, the next The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from one electric-power-piece opening lottery to the next electric-power-piece opening lottery is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a game ball will enter the second starting port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in establishing the conditions for acquiring special information.

  FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / losing table (a winning / failing table for opening / closing an electrically-powered accessory) used when executing the opening of the electrically-powered accessory.

  FIG. 9 (a) shows an electric accessory opening lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), in the electric accessory opening lottery lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode), two values of 0 and 1 are set as the values of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is electrified opening election. A value has been set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 which is to be removed. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric-power-operated-object opening lottery is executed, the electrification opening is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electrification is released in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

  FIG. 9 (b) shows an electric accessory opening lottery success / failure table (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9B, in the winning / non-winning table for electric-power-operated-object opening lottery (for the high-frequency support mode), 462 pieces of 0 to 461 are set as the values of the electric-operated-object opening counter C4 which is elected to open. A value has been set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 which is out of order. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric-power-operated-object opening lottery is executed, the electrification opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electrification is released in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

  As described above, the probability of occurrence of game balls entering the second starting port 34 in the high-frequency support mode is set higher than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric auditors goods opening lottery success / failure table. .

A3. Overview of processing by gaming machine:
Next, an outline of a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a time chart illustrating a point giving effect (case 1) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. The point giving effect is an effect of giving points at a predetermined timing during the execution of the game round. Then, each time the given points are accumulated for 10 points, a button press effect is executed. The button press effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect operation button 24. Then, when the player presses the staging operation button 24 during the period in which the button pressing effect is being executed, or after the elapse of the period in which the button pressing effect is being executed, the player hits the jackpot in the jackpot lottery relating to the game time. An effect indicating the possibility of winning (expected degree) is executed. In addition, only when the player presses the staging operation button 24 during the period in which the button press staging is being performed, an effect that suggests the possibility (expectation) of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery related to the game time. May be executed. Hereinafter, the point giving effect (case 1) will be specifically described with reference to a time chart.

  FIG. 10 shows, as a time chart, a point-giving effect and a button-pressing effect executed in one game. In the game round shown in FIG. 10, the effect a1 is executed at the same time as the symbol change is started. By executing the effect a1, an image indicating a change in the design for the liquid crystal is displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined character image is displayed. In addition, along with the display of these images, sound output and lamp lighting are also performed. After the start of the fluctuation, as shown, at a predetermined timing, a point giving effect X1 is executed. [+ 4P] shown in the drawing indicates that four points are given in the point giving effect.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the point giving effect X1 is executed. As shown in FIG. 11A, an image corresponding to the effect a1 is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. Thereafter, during the execution of the effect a1, the turtle character passes from the right to the left on the upper portion of the display surface 41a. As shown in FIG. 11B, at the timing when the turtle character is located at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl displaying the number of points to be given is dropped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11C, the image corresponding to the dropped pearl is the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points given at the timing when the image reaches the stage St in the lower center of the display surface 41a. And is accumulated. That is, the number of pearls displayed on the stage St corresponds to the number of accumulated points. At this time, the color of the stage St changes from white to red. The change in the color of the stage St will be described later in detail.

  The number of points awarded in the point awarding effect is notified to the player for the first time when the turtle character passes through the upper center of the display surface 41a and the image of the pearl displaying the number of awarded points is displayed. You. Therefore, during the period from when the point giving effect is started to when the turtle character passes through the upper center of the display surface 41a, it is possible to give the player an expectation of the number of points to be given. As a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of points given is not displayed on the image of the pearl dropped by the turtle character. By doing so, the player expects the number of points from the dropped pearl to reach the stage St until the image of the number of pearls corresponding to the given number of points is displayed. Can be provided. Further, as described later, in the present embodiment, a point giving effect in which no point is given may be executed (see FIG. 18). In this case, the turtle character passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a without dropping pearls, which means giving points. Therefore, when a configuration in which the number of points to be given is not displayed on the image of the pearl dropped by the turtle character as in the present modification is adopted, as a first step, the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a. At this point, it is possible to make the player recognize that the point giving effect is executed, and to give a sense of expectation. Then, as a second stage, when the turtle character drops the pearl, the player can be made to recognize that the executed point giving effect is not a point giving effect in which no points are given, and further the player Expectation can be given. After that, when the pearl dropped by the turtle reaches the stage St and the number of pearl images corresponding to the given number of points is displayed, the player who has recognized the given number of points has a sense of expectation or An elation sensation can be imparted. That is, when the present modified example is adopted, the timing at which the turtle character appears, the timing at which the pearl indicating the addition of points from the turtle character is dropped, and the dropped pearl reaches the stage St and is provided. The expectation can be given to the player step by step at three timings, at which the number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points are displayed.

  The description returns to FIG. FIG. 10 shows the number of points accumulated by executing the point giving effect as “accumulated points”. Since 4 points are accumulated by executing the point giving effect X1 for giving 4 points, <4P> is shown as the accumulated points.

  After the point giving effect X1 is executed, the point giving effect X2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in FIG. 10, three points are given in the point giving effect.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a state in which the point giving effect X2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 12A, in the point giving effect X2, like the point giving effect X1, during the execution of the effect a1, the turtle character passes through the upper part of the display surface 41a from right to left. I do. Then, at the timing when the turtle character is located at the upper center of the display surface 41a, the pearl displaying the number of points to be given is dropped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (c), the image corresponding to the dropped pearl changes to an image of the number of pearls corresponding to the given number of points and is accumulated at the timing when the image reaches the stage St. By executing the point giving effect X2, three points are given, the number of accumulated points becomes seven, and seven pearls corresponding to the number of accumulated points are displayed on the stage St.

  As shown in FIG. 10, after the point giving effect X2 is executed, the point giving effect X3 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in the drawing, five points are given in the point giving effect.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing how the point giving effect X3 is executed. As shown in FIG. 13A, in the point giving effect X3, like the point giving effect X1 and the point giving effect X2, during the execution of the effect a1, the turtle character moves the upper part of the display surface 41a from the right. Pass to the left. Then, at the timing when the turtle character is located at the upper center of the display surface 41a, the pearl displaying the number of points to be given is dropped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 13C, the image on the stage St is composed of one shellfish image and two points indicating two points at the timing when the image corresponding to the dropped pearl reaches the stage St. The image changes to a pearl image. The total number of accumulated points is 12 points, but since the accumulated points are 10 points or more, in the present embodiment, the accumulated points for 10 points are displayed as one shellfish image. In addition, below the image of the shellfish, a timer indicating the time until the button press effect is executed is displayed. The effect in which the shellfish and the timer are displayed is also called a timer effect.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a timer effect and a button press effect. FIG. 14A shows a state in which the timer effect is executed. As shown in the figure, near the stage St, a shell image indicating 10 points of the accumulation points is displayed. The image of the shell shows that the button press effect will be executed later. In addition, below the image of the shellfish, a timer indicating the time until the button press effect is executed is displayed. The timer counts down over time. Of the accumulated points that have become 12 points as a result of the execution of the point giving effect X3, the remaining two points other than the 10 points corresponding to the 10 pearls that have changed into shells have two points on the stage St. Displayed as pearls.

  During the period in which the timer effect is being executed, the effect a1 is executed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. Then, when the remaining time of the timer indicated by the timer effect becomes 0 (zero), a button press effect is executed.

  FIG. 14B shows a state in which a button press effect is executed. The button press effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the effect operation button 24. Specifically, an image in which the shellfish displayed in the timer effect is opened is displayed, and characters “press!” Are displayed.

  Further, in this example, immediately before the button press effect is started, that is, immediately before the remaining time of the timer by the timer effect becomes 0, the liquid crystal symbol that is variably displayed in the main display area MA as the effect a1 is simulated. (Hereinafter, also referred to as a pseudo stop state). Then, when the liquid crystal symbol is in the pseudo stop state, a button press effect is executed, and when the player presses the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing, as shown in FIG. Then, the symbol for the liquid crystal starts to change again.

  In the pseudo stop state, the symbol for the liquid crystal is not completely stopped but slightly fluctuates, and in the internal processing of the pachinko machine 10, the symbol for the liquid crystal is displayed in a fluctuating manner. The pseudo stop state of the liquid crystal symbol is a display state for causing the player to recognize as if the liquid crystal symbol has shifted to the stop display in the effect. In this way, by performing the pseudo stop of the symbol in one game round and the re-start of the change, the player is made to recognize as if the notice effect was continuously performed across the game rounds. In this embodiment, the effect for this is also called a pseudo continuous announcement effect.

  That is, in the present description, the button press effect is used as an opportunity to switch from the pseudo continuous announcement effect to the execution of the effect a2. By using the button press effect in this way, by visually recognizing the pattern for the liquid crystal that has stopped in a pseudo manner, the player who temporarily recognized that the jackpot lottery was missed, during the execution of the button press effect, By pressing the effect operation button 24 by himself, it is possible to make the player feel that the result of the jackpot lottery has been temporarily avoided, and to give the player a sense of relief and expectation.

  Further, when the point giving effect is executed during the execution of the game round, points are given and the points are accumulated. Then, a timer effect is started each time 10 points are accumulated, and a button press effect is executed at a timing when the remaining time of the timer becomes zero. Therefore, every time the point giving effect is executed in the game round, an expectation can be given to the player. Also, when 10 points are accumulated, a button press effect is executed, and when the player presses the button at the timing when the button press effect is executed, the liquid crystal symbol indicating the pseudo stop result is again displayed. Since various effects are performed, such as a changing effect and an effect indicating the degree of expectation of the game, the player can be provided with an expectation and a sense of urgency.

  After the button press effect is executed, the display of the image of the shell corresponding to the timer effect and the button effect disappears, and two pearl images indicating the remaining two accumulation points are displayed. Becomes

  If the gaming round ends without accumulation of 10 or more points even though the point provision effect is executed and the points are accumulated, the accumulation points are reset (accumulation points: 0). There is a case where it is carried over to the next game round. Whether the accumulated points are reset or carried over at the end of the game round is determined by predetermined processing by the pachinko machine 10. This processing will be described later in detail.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute the point giving effect in all game times, but executes the point giving effect in some game times. In particular, the game is executed at a high frequency in a game time that is a reach (a jackpot lottery is “out”) or a game time that is a big hit.

  FIG. 15 is a time chart illustrating a point giving effect (case 2) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In this description, a case will be described in which the accumulated points awarded in the point awarding effect are accumulated across game times.

  As shown in the drawing, in the game time U1, the fluctuation is started and the effect b1 is executed. In the effect b1, an image indicating the change of the liquid crystal design is displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined character image is displayed. Thereafter, at a predetermined timing, a point giving effect Y1 is executed. As shown in the drawing, five points are given in the point giving effect. Therefore, the number of accumulation points is five. Thereafter, the fluctuation of the game times U1 ends. At this time, in the point giving effect (Case 2), at the end of the fluctuation of the game times U1, the accumulated points are carried over to the next game time U2 to be executed without being reset.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the column of “color of stage St” in FIG. 15, in order to indicate to the player whether the accumulation point is carried over or not in the game time, The color of the stage St is controlled as follows.
(1) If no points are accumulated, the stage St is set to white.
(2) When points are accumulated and the accumulated points are carried over, the stage St is set to yellow.
(3) If points are accumulated and the accumulated points are not carried over, the stage St is set to orange.
The color of the stage St is controlled as described in (1) to (3) above.

  As shown in the column of “color of stage St” in FIG. 15, in the case of the point giving effect (case 2), the stage St changes from white to yellow when the points are first accumulated in the game time U1. . Thereafter, also in the game time U2, since the accumulation point is carried over to the game time U3, the color of the stage St is maintained in a yellow state. Then, when the game time U3 is started, the accumulation point is not carried over to the next game time in the game time U3, so that the color of the stage St changes from yellow to orange. After that, in the game time U3, the game ends in a state where the points are accumulated to the end, so that the color of the stage St is maintained in orange while the game time U3 is being executed.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the colors of the stage St. FIG. 16A shows a stage St when points are not accumulated. The color of the stage St is set to white. FIG. 16B shows a stage St when points are accumulated and the accumulated points are carried forward. The color of the stage St is set to yellow. FIG. 16C shows a stage St when points are accumulated and the accumulated points are not carried over. The color of the stage St is set to orange. As described above, it is suggested that the player can recognize whether the accumulated points are carried over or not by using the color of the stage St.

  By suggesting to the player whether or not the accumulation point is carried over, for example, when the color of the stage St is yellow indicating that the accumulation point is carried over, the accumulation point is set in the game round being executed. Even if it does not become 10 points or more, the accumulated points carried over from the game round and the points given in the next game round increase the possibility that the accumulated points will be 10 points or more in the next game round. The player can be guessed and give the player a sense of expectation.

  The description returns to FIG. When the game time U1 ends and the game time U2 starts, an effect b2 is executed. Thereafter, the point giving effect Y2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in the drawing, six points are given in the point giving effect. Therefore, the number of accumulated points is 11 points. At this time, since the accumulated points have become 10 points or more, the image of 10 pearls changes to an image of a shell, but during the execution of the game U2, a timer indicating the time until the button press effect is displayed. Instead, the words "Waiting" are displayed. Hereinafter, the effect in which the character “standby” is displayed is also referred to as a standby effect.

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect during standby. As shown in the figure, when the effect during standby is executed, the character “standby” is displayed below the image of the shell. The stand-by effect indicates that the button press effect is not executed in the game time, and the button press effect corresponding to the accumulated points for the 10 points is executed in the next and subsequent game times. Then, at the point in time when the game shifts to the game in which the button press effect corresponding to the accumulation point for 10 points is executed, the timer effect is executed instead of the standby effect, and the button press corresponding to the accumulation point for 10 points is pressed. The countdown of the time until the effect is executed is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, after the point giving effect Y2 ends, the point giving effect Y3 is executed at a predetermined timing. In the point giving effect, 0 points are given. In other words, no point is given even though the point giving effect is executed. Therefore, the accumulation points remain at 11 points.

  FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point giving effect in which no points are given. FIG. 18 shows the point giving effect Y3 executed in the game time U2.

  When the point giving effect is started, the turtle character appears from the upper right end of the display surface 41a and proceeds toward the center, similarly to the normal point giving effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 18B, even at the timing when the turtle character is located at the upper center of the display surface 41a, the turtle character does nothing and as shown in FIG. 18C. It proceeds to the left as it is and advances to the upper left end of the display surface 41a. By executing the point giving effect [0P] in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Thereafter, the symbol stops, and the game U2 ends. In addition, the accumulation point in the game time U2 is set to be carried over to the next game time (game time U3).

  When the game time U3 is started, the effect b3 is executed, and the timer effect is executed instead of the standby effect executed in the game time U2. In FIG. 15, it is described as timer effect 1 to distinguish it from another timer effect executed later. The timer effect 1 is an effect corresponding to the most recently executed button press effect 1. That is, the time displayed on the timer in the timer effect 1 is the time until the button press effect 1 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the point giving effect Y4 [+ 3P] and the point giving effect Y5 [+ 7P] are executed at a predetermined timing after the game time U3 is started. A total of 10 points are given by the two points giving effects. Therefore, the number of accumulated points is 21 points. As described above, the button press effect is executed once for every 10 accumulated points. Therefore, in the game time U3, the button press effect 2 is executed in addition to the button press effect 1. Therefore, when the point giving effect Y5 is executed and the accumulation points of 21 points are accumulated, the timer effect 2 corresponding to the button pressing effect 2 is executed.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a timer effect and a button press effect executed in the game time U3. FIG. 19A shows a state in which timer effects 1 and 2 are executed. As shown in the figure, the image of the shellfish corresponding to the timer effect 2 and the timer are displayed on the left side of the image of the shellfish corresponding to the timer effect 1 and the timer. As described above, the time corresponding to the button press effect 1 is counted down and displayed on the timer corresponding to the timer effect 1. In the timer corresponding to the timer effect 2, the time until the button press effect 2 is executed is counted down and displayed. Therefore, the time displayed on the timer corresponding to the timer effect 1 is different from the time displayed on the timer corresponding to the timer effect 2. In this way, by displaying a plurality of images corresponding to the timer effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that the button press effect is performed twice, and to further provide a sense of expectation. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15, a button press effect 1 is executed. FIG. 19B shows a state in which the button press effect 1 is executed. When the button press effect 1 is started, the image in which the shellfish displayed in the timer effect 1 is opened is displayed, and the character “press!” Is displayed. The image corresponding to the timer effect 2 is displayed as it is.

  As shown in FIG. 15, after the button press effect 1 ends, the effect b4 is executed. Even during the execution of the effect b4, the timer effect 2 counts down and displays the time until the button press effect 2 is executed. Thereafter, when the time counted down in the timer effect 2 is displayed as 0, the button press effect 2 is executed. FIG. 19C shows a state in which the button press effect 2 is executed. When the button press effect 2 is executed, the image in which the shellfish displayed in the timer effect 2 is opened is displayed, and the character “press!” Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 15, after the button press effect 2 is executed, the effect b5 is executed, and thereafter, the symbol stops and the game time U3 ends. The point giving effect (case 2) has been described above.

  In the present embodiment, the result of the jackpot lottery in the game time is set so that the probability that the button press effect is executed in the game time is higher in the case of the jackpot than in the case where the result of the jackpot is not the jackpot. I have.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by executing the button press effect, when the button press effect is executed, the result of the jackpot lottery becomes “big hit” or “miss (reach occurrence)”. It is possible to make the player guess that the probability is high, and to give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, by executing the point giving effect, the player who recognizes that the button press effect is executed when the accumulated points become 10 points or more, gives the player an expectation every time the point giving effect is executed. Can be granted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there are a case where the accumulation points accumulated in the game round are reset as a trigger of the end of the game round, and a case where the accumulation point is carried over to the next game round without resetting. Since the accumulated points may be reset as an opportunity of the end of the game round, the player is requested to accumulate 10 or more points by the end of the game round, and the player's expectation for the point giving effect is given. The feeling can be further increased. Furthermore, the player who has recognized that the game round has been started and the points have been accumulated by executing the point giving effect is aware of the timing of the end of the game round where the accumulated points may be reset. Then, it is possible to pay attention to a mode of accumulating the accumulated points, that is, a mode of executing the point giving effect.

  In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over to the next game time, even if the accumulated points do not accumulate at least 10 points in the currently executed game time, if the accumulated points are carried over to the next game time, the game time will be transferred to the next game time. Since the points accumulated in are effective, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation that the accumulated points do not accumulate more than 10 points.

A4. Various processes executed in main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, at a period of 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S10101, reading processing of various detection sensors is performed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10102.

  In step S10102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10103.

  In Step S10103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10104. The value of the variation type counter CS is updated in a normal process (FIG. 26) described later.

  In step S10104, a winning process for the starting port is executed in accordance with the winning of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port. The details of the winning process for the starting port in step S10104 will be described later. After executing Step S10104, the process proceeds to Step S10105.

  In step S10105, a prize-for-through process is executed in accordance with a prize for the through gate 35. Details of the winning processing for through in step S10105 will be described later. After executing step S10105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning prize processing>
Next, the winning process for the starting port will be described. The winning opening prize processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 20: S10104).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the starting port. In step S10201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting port 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step S10201 that the game ball has won the first starting port 33 (S10201: YES), the flow proceeds to step S10202, in which the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10203.

  In step S10203, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has won the first starting port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10204.

  In step S10204, a start suspended number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as a first suspended start number RaN), which is a value stored in the suspended number storage area of the first suspended area Ra, is read, and the first suspended start number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first start reserved number RaN indicates the reserved number based on winning in the first start port 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10209.

  If it is determined in step S10201 that the game ball has not won the first starting port 33 (S10201: NO), the process proceeds to step S10205 to determine whether the game ball has won the second starting port. The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

  If it is determined in step S10205 that the game ball has won the second starting port 34 (S10205: YES), the process proceeds to step S10206, in which the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10205 that the game ball has not won the second starting port 34 (S10205: NO), the winning processing for the starting port ends.

  In step S10207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the gaming ball has won the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10208.

  In step S10208, the number of start suspensions RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as a second start suspension number RbN), which is a value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second suspension area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second start reserved number RbN indicates the reserved number based on winning in the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10209.

  In step S10209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of suspension of starting set in step S10204 or step S10208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). In step S10209, if the number N of suspension of starting is not less than the upper limit (S10209: NO), the winning process for the starting port is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S10209, if the number N of pending start is less than the upper limit value (S10209: YES), the process proceeds to step S10210, where 1 is added to the number N of pending start in the corresponding reserved area, and then proceeds to step S10211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10212.

  In step S10212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20), and the variation type counter CS updated in the normal processing (FIG. 26) are It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reserved area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the reserved number obtained by adding 1 in step S10210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20), and Each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S10210. If the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20). Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second reserved area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reserved number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S10210. After executing Step S10212, the process proceeds to Step S10213.

  In step S10213, a first determination process is performed. The first determination process is based on the information (reservation information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS (lottery result), and the jackpot. The determination of the type of the game, the occurrence of the reach, the fluctuation time of the game times, and the like is executed before the hold information is subjected to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the first determination process will be described later. After executing Step S10213, the process proceeds to Step S10214.

  In step S10214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. More specifically, the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process executed based on the information (reservation information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS. ) Is set as a pending command.

  The hold command indicates that a winning in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 has occurred, and a determination result (first determination information) obtained by a first determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the winning. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to confirm before the information is subjected to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process (FIG. 26: step S10703) of the normal process described later.

  Further, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of held symbols in the first held display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. Is transmitted to the display control device 100 to change the display control device 100 in accordance with the command. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first holding display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning in the second starting port 34 is received, the sound emission control device 90 increases the number of the held items displayed in the second held display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. Is transmitted to the display control device 100 to change the display control device 100 in accordance with the command. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  After executing the step S10214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the starting port.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the first determination process will be described. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the winning process for the start-up opening (FIG. 21: S10213).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the first judgment processing. As described above, the pre-determination processing is based on the suspension information, and the suspension information mainly determines the success or failure of the jackpot lottery, determines the type of the jackpot, determines whether or not reach has occurred, and determines the fluctuation time of the game times. This is a process executed before being subjected to the jackpot lottery by the control device 60.

  In step S10301, a jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed. This process is a process of determining the success or failure of the jackpot, determining the type of the jackpot, and determining whether or not a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot / reach information acquisition processing will be described later. After executing Step S10301, the process proceeds to Step S10302.

  In step S10302, a variable time information acquisition process is performed. This process is a process of determining the fluctuation time of the game times. Details of the variable time information acquisition processing will be described later.

  After executing step S10302, the forehead determination process ends.

<Big hit / reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot / reach information acquisition processing will be described. The jackpot / reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 22: S10301) of the first judgment process.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot / reach information acquisition processing. In step S10401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area by the winning in the starting port in the winning port winning process (FIG. 21) is read. After that, the process advances to step S10402 to determine the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current prize is executed as a game time. Specifically, the determination result of the preliminary determination process executed by the winning before the current winning is read out from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability change big hit that occurs before the big hit lottery by the current winning. Thereby, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current prize is executed as the game time is determined.

  In step S10402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current prize is executed as the game time (S10402: YES), the process proceeds to step S10403, and the hit / fail table storage area Reference is made to the low / high probability mode success / failure table stored in 63a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10405, and as a result of referring to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in step S10402, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current prize is executed as the game times (S10402: NO), the process proceeds to step S10404, and As a result of referring to the hit / fail table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10405, and as a result of referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S10405 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S10405: YES), the process proceeds to step S10406, where the value is stored in the storage area due to the winning of the starting port this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read. After that, the process advances to step S10407 to refer to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b. Specifically, in the case where the jackpot type counter C2 targeted for the current distribution is obtained based on winning in the first starting port 33, the first starting port distribution table is referred to. If it is obtained based on the winning in the second starting port 34, the distribution table for the second starting port is referred to. After executing Step S10407, the process proceeds to Step S10408.

  In step S10408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability change jackpot. If it is determined in step S10408 that the jackpot corresponds to the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S10409, and the jackpot information is stored in the previous determination result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the pre-determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10408 that the jackpot does not correspond to the probability change jackpot (S10408: NO), the process proceeds to step S10410, and the normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the pre-determination process ends.

  In step S10405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S10405: NO), the process proceeds to step S10411, where the value is stored in the storage area by winning the starting opening this time. The read value of the reach random number counter C3 is read. After that, the process advances to step S10412 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach.

  If it is determined in step S10413 that the device corresponds to the occurrence of the reach (S10413: YES), the process proceeds to step S10414, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the pre-determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10413 that the device does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach (S10413: NO), the first determination process ends.

<Fluctuating time information acquisition processing>
Next, the variable time information acquisition processing will be described. The fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the first determination process (FIG. 22: S10302).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variable time information acquisition processing. In step S10501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area by winning in the starting opening in the winning processing for the opening (FIG. 21) is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10502.

  In step S10502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery relating to the current game has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big hit is determined based on the lottery result of the big hit lottery determined by the big hit / reach information acquisition processing, and if it is a big hit (S10502: YES), the process proceeds to step S10503.

  In step S10503, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for big hits stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing Step S10503, the process proceeds to Step S10507.

  In step S10507, the obtained fluctuation time information is stored in the first determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. After that, the variable time information acquisition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S10502 that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S10502: NO), the process advances to step S10504 to determine whether a reach occurs. If it is determined in step S10504 that a reach occurs (S10504: YES), the process advances to step S10505.

  In step S10505, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process advances to step S10507 to store the obtained fluctuation time information in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then ends the fluctuation time information acquisition processing.

  If it is determined in step S10504 that no reach occurs in the current game round (step S10504: NO), the process proceeds to step S10506, and the reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is read. By referring to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S10507 to store the obtained fluctuation time information in the pre-determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, and then ends the fluctuation time information acquisition processing.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuating time information stored in the fluctuating time table is set such that the fluctuating time becomes shorter as the values of the first and second starting suspended numbers RaN and RbN are larger. I have. That is, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referred to is determined by the values of the first and second start reservation numbers RaN and RbN when determining the fluctuation time of the game times. Are different. At the time of executing the variable time acquisition process as one of the first determination processes, that is, at the time of acquiring the variable time of the pending game times targeted for the first determination process, the pending game that is the target of the process The number of suspensions at the time when the round is executed as a game round is unknown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is obtained on the assumption that the first start suspended number RaN = 0 (and the second start suspended number RbN = 0). Therefore, the fluctuation time acquired by the fluctuation time acquisition processing is the actual fluctuation time (the fluctuation time acquired in the fluctuation time setting processing described later) when the reserved game time targeted for the preliminary determination processing is executed as the game time. Time). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time acquired in the fluctuation time acquisition processing executed as one of the preceding determination processing is also referred to as “temporary fluctuation time”. In the present embodiment, the value of the temporary fluctuation time is used in the processing performed when executing the point giving effect. The processing using the temporary fluctuation time will be described later.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuating time information stored in the fluctuating time table is set such that the fluctuating time becomes shorter as the values of the first start suspended number RaN and the second started suspended number RbN are larger. However, for example, a configuration may be set such that the larger the value of the total reserved number CRN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is. Further, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of the total reserved number CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of the total reserved number CRN is smaller. When the second number RbN of start-ups is “0”, the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number RaN of first start-ups is larger, and when the number RbN of the second start-ups is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of the second start pending numbers RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. Further, when the second number of suspended start-ups RbN is “0”, the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of first number of suspended start-ups RaN increases, and when the second number of suspended start-ups RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the larger the number of the second start suspended numbers RbN, the longer the fluctuation time becomes, or may be constant without depending on the suspended numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, no reach occurs so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the case where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. A change time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of the reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected at the time of the jackpot winning and the out-of-reach reach may be different. Good. Further, a variation time table for the probability change jackpot, a variation time table for the normal jackpot, a variation time table for the off-reach, and a variation time table for the complete departure may be individually set.

<Prize processing for through>
Next, the winning processing for through will be described. The winning processing for the through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 20: step S10105).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a through-win prize process. In step S10601, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S10601 that the gaming ball has won the through gate 35 (S10601: YES), the process proceeds to step S10602, and whether or not the number SN of retained bonuses is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Is determined. In addition, the bonus item holding number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 which is reserved for performing the electrical accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of held items SN is four. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10601 that the game ball has not won the through gate 35 (S10601: NO), the prize-winning process for the through game ends.

  In step S10602, if it is determined that the number of the reserved items SN is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (S10602: YES), the process proceeds to step S10603, and 1 is added to the reserved items number SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10604.

  In step S10604, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20) is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the electric utility holding area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the prize-winning process for the through is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10602 that the value of the number of retained items SN is not less than the upper limit value (S10602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number of retained items SN is the upper limit value, the motor is operated. Without storing the value of the bonus opening counter C4, the winning processing for through ends.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, main processing of the game is executed.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the normal processing. In step S10701, a startup process is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10702.

  In step S10702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for starting the demonstration moving image for each control device on the sub side when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10703.

  In step S10703, output data such as the startup command set in step S10702 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a prize ball command, and if the prize ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a start-up command, a change command, a type command, and a hold command are set, the commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step S10703, the process proceeds to Step S10704.

  In step S10704, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10705.

  In step S10705, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the flow advances to step S10706. In step S10706, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game number control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of symbol change display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing Step S10706, the process proceeds to Step S10707.

  In step S10707, a game state shift process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10708.

  In step S10708, a power support process for controlling the driving of the power accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the process of supporting the electric combination, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is to be opened. The details of the electronic role support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10709.

  In step S10709, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (strictly, the start of the command output process in step S10703). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. If it is determined in step S10709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S10709: NO), in steps S10710 and S10711, until the next normal processing execution timing is reached. , The update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly executed. Specifically, in step S10710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S10711, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S10709: YES), the process returns to step S10703, and the processes from step S10703 to step S10708 are performed. Execute.

  Since the execution time of each process from step S10703 to step S10708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game round control process>
Next, the game times control processing will be described. The game times control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 26: S10706).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the game number control process. In step S10801, it is determined whether the game is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the opening period flag, the open / close execution mode flag, and the ending period flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period, and is turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the game state transition processing described later, and is turned OFF when the opening / closing execution mode is similarly ended in the game state transition processing. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the open / close execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned off at the end of the ending period.

  If it is determined in step S10801 that any of the opening period flag, the open / close execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S10801: YES), it is determined that the game is in the special game state, and the processing in step S10802 and thereafter is performed. Without executing any of them, the present game round control process ends. That is, in the special game state, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a prize has occurred in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10801 that the game is not in the special game state (S10801: NO), the process proceeds to step S10802.

  In step S10802, it is determined whether the main display unit 45 is performing variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is performing variable display. This determination is made by determining whether the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned on when starting the variable display for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is turned off when the variable display ends.

  If it is determined in step S10802 that the main display unit 45 is not performing the variable display (S10802: NO), the process proceeds to the processing for starting the game from step S10803 to step S10805. In step S10803, it is determined whether or not the total reserved number CRN is “0”. The case where the total reserved number CRN is “0” means that the starting suspended number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, if it is determined in step S10803 that the total number of reserved items CRN is “0” (S10803: YES), the present gaming control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10803 that the total suspended number CRN is not “0” (S10803: NO), the process advances to step S10804.

  In step S10804, a data setting process is performed to set the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of the change, and the process proceeds to step S10805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S10805, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display unit 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the change start process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10806.

  In step S10806, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by one. The number-of-games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games executed in the high-frequency support mode. After executing Step S10806, the game round control process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10802 that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S10802: YES), the processing for game round progress in steps S10807 to S10809 is executed.

  In step S10807, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the current game has elapsed. As described above, the fluctuation time is a time from when the symbol row starts to change until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S10807, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the fluctuation time information is set in a fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 30) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing is started.

  If it is determined in step S10807 that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S10807: NO), the flow advances to step S10808 to execute the processing for fluctuation display. The change display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display unit relating to the current game round. After executing Step S10808, the game times control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S10807 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S10807: YES), the flow advances to step S10809 to execute fluctuation end processing. The change ending process is performed on the result display unit so that the form of the symbol to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the later-described change start process (FIG. 29) is displayed on the result display unit related to the current game round. Display control. After executing Step S10809, the game round control process ends.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 27: S10804).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S10901, it is determined whether or not the reserved area to be subjected to the data setting processing is the first reserved area Ra. Specifically, among the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 5), the hold information stored first (the hold information stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra). Information) is the earliest hold information stored in the second hold area Rb (FIG. 5) in chronological order (stored in the first area of the second hold area Rb). If it is stored in the reserved area earlier than the reserved information), it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the first reserved area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest hold information stored in the second holding area Rb in time series is earlier than the earliest hold information stored in the first holding area Ra in the time series. If the stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, it is determined that the hold area to be processed is the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the processing of step S10901, the hold information can be processed in the order in which the information is stored in the first hold area Ra or the second hold area Rb.

  If it is determined in step S10901 that the reserved area to be processed is the first reserved area Ra (step S10901: YES), data setting processing for the first reserved area in steps S10902 to S10907 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the processing target reserved area is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reserved area is the second reserved area Rb (step S10901: NO) ), The data setting processing for the second reserved area in steps S10908 to S10913 is executed.

  In step S10902, after subtracting 1 from the first start suspended number RaN of the first reserved area Ra, the process proceeds to step S10903, and subtracting 1 from the total suspended number CRN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10904. In step S10904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10905.

  In step S10905, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is performed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. After executing Step S10905, the process proceeds to Step S10906.

  In step S10906, when the second result display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and when it is not ON, the state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying whether the target of the start of the current variable display is the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10907.

  In step S10907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the first reserved area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the first starting port 33. The command at the time of shift including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected command at the time of the shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

  The shift command set in step S10907 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal processing (FIG. 26). The sound emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of held items to the display control device 100 based on the received shift command. I do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

  If it is determined in step S10901 that the reserved area to be processed is not the first reserved area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the reserved area to be processed is the second reserved area Rb (step S10901: NO), Proceed to step S10908.

  In step S10908, 1 is subtracted from the second start suspended number RbN in the second suspended area Rb. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10909. In step S10909, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by one, and the flow advances to step S10910 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10911.

  In step S10911, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is performed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. After executing Step S10911, the process proceeds to Step S10912.

  In step S10912, when the second result display section flag of the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and when it is ON, the state is maintained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10913.

  In step S10913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the reserved area for which the current data is shifted corresponds to the second reserved area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the second starting port 34. The command at the time of shift including the information of the presence is selected, and the selected command at the time of the shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

  The shift command set in step S10913 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal processing (FIG. 26). Based on the received shift command, the sound emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

<Change start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described. The change start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 27: S10805).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. In step S11001, it is determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the MPU 62. In the present embodiment, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability change jackpot. , And then turned OFF when a normal jackpot is won. If it is determined in step S11001 that the mode is the high probability mode (S11001: YES), the process proceeds to step S11002.

  In step S11002, a determination is made with reference to a winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / non-hitting table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. Is determined. After that, it advances to step S11004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11001 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S11001: NO), the process proceeds to step S11003.

  In step S11003, a determination is made with reference to a winning / failing table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot winning in the winning / not-hitting table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. Is determined. After that, it advances to step S11004.

  In step S11004, it is determined whether or not the result of the win / fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S11002 or step S11003 is a big win. In step S11004, if the result of the hit determination is a jackpot (S11004: YES), in steps S11005 to S11012, a process for setting a game result in the case of a jackpot and a stop result are set. Execute the processing of

  In step S11005, it is determined whether the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S11005 that the second result display section flag is not ON (S11005: NO), the process advances to step S11006 to refer to the distribution table for the first startup port (see FIG. 8A). Then, the distribution is determined. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is set to any one of the numerical range of the 16R certain jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R certain jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is determined.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11005 that the second result display section flag is ON (S11005: YES), the process proceeds to step S11007, and the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 8B). Is performed with reference to. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 16R certain jackpot or the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. After executing the processing of step S11006 or step S11007. The process proceeds to step S11008.

  In step S11008, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is a probability-variable jackpot. If it is determined in step S11008 that the game result is a probability change jackpot (S11008: YES), the process proceeds to step S11009.

  In step S11009, a stop result setting process for the probability change big hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability change jackpot is a process in which the stop result is displayed on the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the current game round in which the player wins the probability change jackpot. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is referred to by referring to the stop result table for the probability change jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The obtained address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11009, the process proceeds to Step S11010.

  In step S11010, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S11006 or step S11007 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R certain-variable flag is turned on when it is a 16R certain-change big hit, and the 8R certain-change flag is turned on when it is an 8R certain-variable big hit. After that, it advances to step S11016.

  On the other hand, in step S11008, if it is determined that the type of the jackpot allocated in step S11006 or step S11007 is not the probability variable jackpot (S11008: NO), that is, if the type of the jackpot allocated is the normal jackpot, step S11008 is performed. The process proceeds to S11011.

  In step S11011, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process is a process in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot that has been assigned in step S11006 or step S11007 is referred to by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The obtained address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11011, the process proceeds to Step S11012.

  In step S11012, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S11006 or step S11007 is turned ON. More specifically, the 16R normal jackpot is turned on when the 16R normal jackpot is hit, and the 8R normal flag is turned on when the 8R normal jackpot is hit. After that, it advances to step S11016.

  In step S11004, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S11002 or step S11003 is not a jackpot winning (S11004: NO), the process proceeds to step S11013, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is equal to the value set as occurrence of the reach in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. It is determined whether or not they are in compliance.

  If it is determined in step S11013 that a reach occurs in the game round (S11013: YES), the process proceeds to step S11014.

  In step S11014, a stop result setting process for reach is executed. In the current game round, which is a stop result for reach, in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, a process for setting which stop result is to be displayed and in which state the variable display is ended is set. is there. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11014, the process proceeds to Step S11016.

  If it is determined in step S11013 that no reach occurs in the game round (S11013: NO), the process proceeds to step S11015.

  In step S11015, a stop result setting process for disconnection is executed. The stop result setting process for a disconnection is a process of terminating the variable display in a state where any of the stop results is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round in which the disconnection result is obtained. This is a process for setting whether or not. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained by referring to the stop result table for the off-state in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11015, the process proceeds to Step S11016.

  In step S11016, a variable time setting process is executed. The setting process of the fluctuation time is to set the fluctuation time which is the time required for the current round of the game in the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b based on the presence or absence of the jackpot or the occurrence of the reach. This is the process. Details of the setting process of the fluctuation time will be described later. After executing Step S11016, the process proceeds to Step S11017.

  In step S11017, it is determined whether the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S11017 that the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S11017: NO), the flow advances to step S11018 to set a first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning in the first starting port 33, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S11016.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11017 that the second result display section flag is ON (S11017: YES), the flow advances to step S11019 to set a second variation command. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning in the second starting port 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. And the information of the fluctuation time set in step S11016. After performing Step S11018 or Step S11019, the process proceeds to Step S11020.

  In step S11020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of the jackpot, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence or absence of the reach. In other words, the type command includes, as information of the type of the jackpot, information on the 16R probability variable jackpot, information on the 8R probability variable jackpot, information on the 16R normal jackpot, information on the 8R normal jackpot, or information on whether or not a reach has occurred, and information on the deviation result. Information is included.

  The variation command and the type command set in steps S11018 to S11020 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal processing (FIG. 26). The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined effect is executed. After executing Step S11020, the process proceeds to Step S11021.

  In step S11021, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time among the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b starts the symbol change display. Specifically, when the second result display section flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display section 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second result display section flag is ON, the result display section corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display section 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing Step S11021, the present variation start processing ends.

<Setting process of fluctuation time>
Next, the process of setting the fluctuation time will be described. The fluctuation time setting processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a fluctuation start processing subroutine (FIG. 29: S11016).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the fluctuation time. In step S11101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11102.

  In step S11102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery relating to the current game has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If any of the flags is ON (S11102: YES), the process proceeds to step S11103.

  In step S11103, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for big hits stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After that, the process advances to step S11107 to set the obtained fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time is ended.

  If it is determined in step S11102 that the jackpot lottery relating to the current game round is not a win (S11102: NO), the process proceeds to step S11104, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. If the jackpot lottery related to the current game time has not been won in step S11102, the process (S11104) is executed. Therefore, in step S11104, a reach occurs among the game times not won in the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (S11104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S11105. In specifying the presence or absence of the reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In step S11105, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating reach is constant. After that, the process advances to step S11107 to set the obtained fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time is ended.

  In step S11104, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game round (S11104: NO), the process proceeds to step S11106, and the non-reach variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, a fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. After that, the process advances to step S11107 to set the obtained fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the setting process of the fluctuation time is ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table indicates that the larger the values of the first start suspended number RaN and the second start suspended number RbN, the longer the fluctuation time becomes. It is set to be shorter. That is, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referred to is determined by the values of the first and second start reservation numbers RaN and RbN when determining the fluctuation time of the game times. Are different.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the values of the first start suspension number RaN and the second start suspension number RbN are larger. Alternatively, for example, a configuration may be set such that the larger the value of the total reserved number CRN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is. Also, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of the total reserved number CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total reserved number CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second start suspended number RbN is “0”, the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start suspended number RaN increases, and when the second start suspended number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the second start pending numbers RbN increases. In addition, when the second start suspended number RbN is “0”, the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start suspended number RaN increases, and when the second start suspended number RbN is “1” or more. May be set such that the larger the number of the second startup suspended numbers RbN, the longer the fluctuation time becomes, or may be constant without depending on each suspended number RaN, RbN.

  In addition, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, no reach occurs so that a shorter fluctuation time is selected compared to the case where the number of pending information is the same as in the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable time table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same, and the above relationship may be reversed.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of the reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected at the time of the jackpot winning and the out-of-reach reach may be different. Good. In addition, a variation time table for a probability change jackpot, a variation time table for a normal jackpot, a variation time table for an off-reach, and a variation time table for a complete loss may be individually set.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 26: S10707).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step S11201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the open / close execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and is turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing an ending effect in the special game state.

  If it is determined in step S11201 that the ending period flag is not ON (S11201: NO), the process advances to step S11202 to determine whether the open / close execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on when shifting the game state to the opening / closing execution mode, and is turned off when ending the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S11202 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (S11202: NO), the process advances to step S11203 to determine whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period, and is turned off at the end of the opening period.

  If it is determined in step S11203 that the opening period flag is not ON (S11203: NO), the process proceeds to step S11204, at which the symbol variation display on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b ends. Is determined. If it is determined in step S11204 that the timing does not indicate that the variable display has ended (S11204: NO), the present game state transition process ends.

  If it is determined in step S11204 that the timing at which the variable display has ended is reached (S11204: YES), the process proceeds to step S11205, and the game result of the current game (the result of the jackpot lottery) is shifted to the open / close execution mode. It is determined whether or not they correspond. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R certain change flag, the 8R certain change flag, the 16R normal flag, and the 8R normal flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the flags is ON (S11205: NO), the game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S11205 that the game result of the current game (the result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode (S11205: YES), the process proceeds to step S11206, and the high probability mode is performed. Turn off the flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11207.

  In step S11207, an opening time setting process is performed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time). In the present embodiment, an opening time of the same fixed length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3 for determining the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing Step S11207, the process proceeds to Step S11208.

  In step S11208, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal processing (FIG. 26). The opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S11208, the process advances to step S11209 to turn on the opening period flag. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S11203 that the opening period flag is ON (S11203: YES), the process proceeds to step S11210.

  In step S11210, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S11210 that the opening period has ended (S11210: YES), the process advances to step S11211 to turn off the opening period flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11212.

  In step S11212, a round display start process for notifying the type of the current open / close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. Confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 of the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the output. After executing Step S11212, the process proceeds to Step S11213.

  In step S11213, the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probable change flag, 8R probable change flag, 16R normal flag, and 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. If it is determined in step S11213 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R certainty change flag or the 16R normal flag (S11213: YES), the process proceeds to step S11214, and the process proceeds to the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "16" is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b has been opened.

  On the other hand, in step S11213, when it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R certainty variable flag or the 8R normal flag (S11213: NO), the process proceeds to step S11215, and is provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "8" is set in the obtained first round counter area RC1. After performing Step S11214 or Step S11215, the process proceeds to Step S11216.

  In step S11216, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S11202 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S11202: YES), the flow proceeds to step S11217 to execute a special winning opening opening / closing process. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is driven on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is equal to or greater than "1". The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the special winning opening 36a is being opened, the variable winning driving unit is provided on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 36a or that the opening limit number has won. The driving state of 36c is stopped, and the special winning opening 36a is closed. The details of the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described later. After executing Step S11217, the process proceeds to Step S11218.

  In step S11218, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S11219: NO), the present game state transition processing ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S11218: YES), the process proceeds to step S11219, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing Step S11219, the process proceeds to Step S11220.

  In step S11220, a round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 of the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step S11220, the process proceeds to Step S11221.

  In step S11221, an ending time setting process is performed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an ending period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time). In the present embodiment, the same ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 for determining the ending time. The fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After performing Step S11221, the process proceeds to Step S11222.

  In step S11222, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S10603 in the normal processing (FIG. 26). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing Step S11222, the process proceeds to Step S11223.

  In step S11223, the ending period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S11201 that the ending period flag is ON (S11201: YES), the process proceeds to step S11224.

  In step S11224, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S11223), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step S11224 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (S11224: YES), the process proceeds to step S11225.

  In step S11225, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S11226 to execute a transition process at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing Step S11226, the game state transition processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11224 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not “0” (S11224: NO), the present game state transition processing ends.

<Grand Prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (11217 in FIG. 31) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening and closing process. In step S11301, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S11301 that the special winning opening 36a is not being opened (S11301: NO), the process advances to step S11302 to determine whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined in step S11302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S11030: YES), the main winning opening opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S11030: NO), the process proceeds to step S11303.

  In step S11303, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11303 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S11303: NO), the main winning opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11303 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11304, and the variable winning drive unit opens the special winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11305.

  In step S11305, a setting process for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the set winning modes are all the high-frequency winning modes, "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, "10" is set in a winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 in order to count the number of winning of the game balls to the special winning opening 36a. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by one every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the low frequency prize mode is set in the pachinko machine 10, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the prize counter area PC. May be set. After executing step S11305, the process proceeds to step S11306.

  In step S11306, a release command is set. Thereafter, the main winning opening opening / closing process ends. The release command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been started. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 26: Step S10703). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started on the basis of the received opening command, and also displays the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 on the special winning opening 36a. Is updated to the content corresponding to the start of the release of. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and displays the contents of the effect on the symbol display device 41 and the opening of the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  If it is determined in step S11301 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S11301: YES), the flow advances to step S11307 to determine whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". I do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S11307: NO), the process advances to step S11308.

  In step S11308, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the special winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. If it is determined in step S11308 that no winning has occurred (S11308: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11308 that a winning has occurred (S11308: YES), the flow advances to step S11309 to decrement the value of the winning counter area PC by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11310.

  In step S11310, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. If it is determined in step S11310 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not “0” (S11310: NO), the main winning opening / closing process ends.

  When it is determined in step S11307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S11307: YES), or when it is determined in step S11310 that the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. (S11310: YES), the process proceeds to step S11311 to execute a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 36c is set to a non-driven state in order to close the special winning opening 36a. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11312.

  In step S11312, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by one. After that, the process advances to step S11313 to determine whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. If it is determined in step S11313 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S11313: YES), the main winning opening opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11313 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S11313: NO), “1000” (that is, 2 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S11314, the process advances to step S11315 to set a close command. Thereafter, the special winning opening opening / closing process ends.

  The set closing command is a command including information for causing the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are the sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed. Is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 26: step S10703). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and determines the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 in the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the completion of release. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been completed based on the received closing command, and displays the contents of the effect on the symbol display device 41 and ends the opening of the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition processing (FIG. 31: S11226).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S11401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability change jackpot in the RAM 64 as the jackpot type flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probable change flag or the 8R probable change flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

  If it is determined in step S11401 that the 16R probable change flag or the 8R probable change flag in the RAM 64 is ON (S11401: YES), the process advances to step S11402 to execute flag erasure processing. Specifically, when the 16R certain change flag, the 8R certain change flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing Step S11402, the process proceeds to Step S11403.

  In step S11403, the high-probability mode flag is turned on, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11404, and the high-frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the game state shifts to the gaming state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Note that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next time a jackpot is won. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11405.

  In step S11405, 100 is set to the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high-frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11406.

  In step S11406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win / fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. I do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11401 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S11401: NO), the process advances to step S11407 to execute flag erasure processing. Specifically, when the 16R certain change flag, the 8R certain change flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and when they are not ON, the state is maintained. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11408.

  In step S11408, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S11409, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11410.

  In step S11410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set. Then, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Process for electrical support>
Next, a description will be given of the processing for supporting electric power. The power handling support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 26: S10708).

  FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the process for supporting electric power. In step S11501, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened, and is turned off when the electric accessory 34a is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S11501 that the support flag is not ON (S11501: NO), the process advances to step S11502.

  In step S11502, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a is set to the open state, and is set to OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step S11502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S11502: NO), the process advances to step S11503.

  In step S11503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S11503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11503: NO), the present electric power support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S11503: YES), the process proceeds to step S11504.

  In step S11504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the symbol variation display in the ordinary figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S11504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S11504: YES), the process advances to step S11505 to set the out-of-range display, and then ends the electric power support process. By setting the off display, the change display of the symbol in the ordinary figure unit 38 is terminated in a state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S11504: NO), the process advances to step S11506.

  In step S11506, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0”. If it is determined in step S11506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is “0” (S11506: NO), the present electrical role support processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11506 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0” (S11506: YES), the process proceeds to step S11507.

  In step S11507, it is determined whether the operation is in the open / close execution mode. Thereafter, the flow advances to step S11508 to determine whether the operation is in the high-frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S11507 (S11507: NO), and if the high frequency support mode is in step S11508 (S11508: YES), the process proceeds to step S11509 to perform an electric auditors thing opening lottery. More specifically, the value stored in the electric-power-use holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric-power-goods opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric-power-use object opening lottery is performed. The winner is won (see FIG. 9B). Further, "750" (that is, 1.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the opening of the electric accessory. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11510.

  In step S11510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S11509 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S11510 that the result of the electric auditors product open lottery is a support win (S11510: YES), the flow advances to step S11511 to turn on the support win flag and provide the support win in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11512. On the other hand, in step S11510, if it is determined that the result of the electric auditors product open lottery is not a support winning (S11510: NO), the process proceeds to step S11512 without executing the process of step S11511.

  In step S11512, it is determined whether the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S11512 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode (S11512: YES), the process proceeds to step S11513. On the other hand, in step S11512, when it is determined that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S11512: NO), the power-supply support process ends.

  In step S11513, it is determined whether or not the number-of-games counter area is “0”. In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game number counter is decremented by one each time one game is completed. If it is determined in step S11513 that the number-of-games counter area is not “0” (S11513: NO), the present electrical role support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11513 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the flow advances to step S11514 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11515.

  In step S11515, the low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. I do. After that, the processing for electric role support ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S11515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 26: step S10703). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on the reception of the low-frequency support command, and executes a process corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S11507 that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode (S11507: YES), or if it is determined in step S11518 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S11508: NO), the process proceeds to step S11516 to open the electric accessory. I do. More specifically, the value stored in the electric-power-use holding area 64c is shifted, and when the value of the electric-power-goods opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric-power-goods opening lottery is performed. Wins. Also, "14750" (that is, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the opening of the electric accessory. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11517.

  In step S11517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electrically-powered accessory opening lottery in step S11516 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S11517 that the support has not been won (S11517: NO), the main control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11517 that the support has been won (S11517: YES), the flow advances to step S11518 to turn on the support win flag and set "1" in the second round counter area RC2. Then, the processing for electric power support is ended.

  If it is determined in step S11502 that the support winning flag is ON (S11502: YES), the process advances to step S11519 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. In step S11519, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11519: NO), the picture change display is being performed in the general-purpose unit 38, and therefore, the main electric hand support processing is performed as it is. To end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S11519: YES), the process proceeds to step S11520.

  In step S11520, a hit display is set. Thus, the variation display of the pattern in the ordinary figure unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process advances to step S11521 to turn on the support flag and turn off the support winning flag. Thereafter, the processing for electric power support is completed.

  If it is determined in step S11501 that the supporting flag is ON (S11501: YES), the process advances to step S11522 to execute an electric combination opening / closing control process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a. Thereafter, the processing for electric power support is completed.

<Electronic opening / closing control processing>
Next, the electric-power opening / closing control processing will be described. The electric-power opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric-power support process (S11522 in FIG. 34).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the electric-power opening / closing control process. In step S11601, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S11601: YES), the flow proceeds to step S11602.

  In step S11602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S11602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11602: NO), the electric-power-operated switching control process ends. That is, when the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric combination opening / closing control processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S11602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S11602: YES), the flow advances to step S11603 to perform a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to a closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. “250” is set in the second timer counter area T2, which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a. After executing Step S11603, the process proceeds to Step S11604.

  In step S11604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S11605, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If it is determined in step S11605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S11605: NO), the electric-power-operated opening / closing control processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S11605: YES), the process advances to step S11606 to turn off the support flag. After that, the present electric combination opening / closing control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S11601 that the electric accessory 34a is not being opened (S11601: NO), the process advances to step S11607 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S11607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11607: NO), the electric-power-operated opening / closing control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11507 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11607: YES), the flow advances to step S11608 to execute an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11609.

  In step S11609, it is determined whether the mode is the open / close execution mode. If it is determined that the mode is not the open / close execution mode (S11609: NO), the process proceeds to step S11610 to determine whether the mode is the high frequency support mode. I do.

  If it is determined in step S11610 that the current mode is the high-frequency support mode (S11610: YES), the process advances to step S11611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 seconds) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the present electric combination opening / closing control process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11609 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S11609: YES), or if it is determined in step S11610 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S11610: NO), the process proceeds to step S11612 and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the present electric combination opening / closing control process ends.

A5. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 36 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from main controller 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, the various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG image data for a background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called an “rendering chip” because it is formed as an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to a rendering process. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like, intervenes in reading and writing of data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 in a shared manner. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which JPEG format image data for a background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as a main MPU 62, a main ROM 63, and a main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93, and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as a light MPU 92 and a sound light, respectively. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called a display MPU 102.

A6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound-light-side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S11701, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound-light RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing Step S11701, the process proceeds to Step S11702.

  In step S11702, a command corresponding process is executed. The command corresponding process is a process executed in response to a command received from the main MPU 62. Details of the command corresponding processing will be described later. After executing Step S11702, the process proceeds to Step S11703.

  In step S11703, point giving effect execution processing is executed. The point giving effect execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point giving effect during execution of the game round. The details of the point giving effect execution processing will be described later. After executing Step S11703, the process proceeds to Step S11704.

  In step S11704, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process in step S11702 and the point giving effect execution process in step S4703. After executing Step S11704, the process proceeds to Step S11705.

  In step S11705, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read in the command corresponding process of step S11702. After executing step S11705, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Command processing>
Next, a command corresponding process will be described. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37: S11702).

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. In step S11801, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S11801 that the hold command has been received (S11801: YES), the process advances to step S11802. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11801 that the hold command has not been received (S11801: NO), the process advances to step S11806.

  In step S11802, a winning update process is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pieces of hold information obtained based on winning in the first opening 33, the number of holding information obtained based on winning in the second opening 34, A process for enabling the sound light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of information is executed. Details of the update processing at the time of winning in step S11802 will be described later. In the following, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning in the first opening 33 is also referred to as “first reserved number”, and the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on the winning in the second opening 34 is The total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as a “second reserved number” and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number. After executing Step S11802, the process proceeds to Step S11803.

  In step S11803, a hold display control process is performed. Specifically, the number of pieces of hold information obtained based on the winning in the first starting port 33 specified in step S11802 and the number of pieces of holding information obtained based on the winning in the second starting port 34 , The display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is controlled. After executing Step S11803, the process proceeds to Step S11804.

  In step S11804, the content of the hold command is stored in the game time setting information storage area 94d. That is, the information acquired by the pre-determination process executed by the main MPU 62 is transmitted to the sound-light MPU 92 by the hold command, and the information of the pre-determination process included in the transmitted hold command is stored in the game time setting information storage area. 94d.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the game time setting information storage area 94d. The game time setting information storage area 94d has a first starting port game time setting information storage area and a second starting port game time setting information storage area. FIG. 39 (a) shows a first starting port game time setting information storage area, and FIG. 39 (b) shows a second starting port game time setting information storage area. It should be noted that since the first opening opening game time setting information storage area and the second opening opening game time setting information storage area have the same configuration, the first opening opening game time setting shown in FIG. The information storage area will be described, and description of the second starting port game time setting information storage area shown in FIG. 39B will be omitted.

  As shown in the figure, the first starting port game time setting information storage area is divided into a first determination information area and an effect information area. Further, each piece of information stored in the first starting port game time setting information storage area is stored for each reserved game time. The reserved game times (n = 1 to 4) indicated in the first start port game time setting information storage area are changed from the reserved game times of the first start port (n = 1) to the reserved game times of the first start port (n = 1). The held game times are executed in the order of n = 4).

  In the first determination information area of the first opening opening game time setting information storage area, information obtained by the first determination processing executed by the main-side MPU 62 for each of the first starting opening reserved game times (n) (hereinafter, referred to as “first information”). , Also referred to as first determination information). The first determination information is information acquired by the first determination processing executed by the main MPU 62, and is information transmitted from the main MPU 62 to the sound-side MPU 92 by a hold command. The sound light side MPU 92 stores the information included in the hold command in the first determination information area of the first start-up game time setting information storage area.

  The effect information area of the first start-up game time setting information storage area is a storage area in which information set by effect information setting processing to be described later is stored based on the information stored in the previous determination information area. The effect information area will be described later.

  The presence / absence of a big hit, the type of a big hit, the presence / absence of a reach, and the provisional change time are stored in the first determination information area of the game time setting information storage area for the first starting port for each reserved game time. As described above, the provisional fluctuation time is the reserved game time on the assumption that the first start suspended number RaN = 0 and the second start suspended number RbN = 0 at the time when the reserved game time is executed as the game time. Fluctuating time.

  The first determination information stored in the first determination information area and the effect information stored in the effect information area are linked to each reserved game time itself, and each time a game time is executed, the stored area is adjacent. Is shifted to the storage area of the reserved game times. For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), when the game time is executed once, the preliminary determination information and the effect information stored in the storage area of the reserved game time (n = 2) are changed to the reserved game time ( n = 1), and the pre-determination information and effect information stored in the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 3) are shifted to the storage area of the reserved game times (n = 2), The advance determination information and the effect information stored in the storage area for the game times (n = 4) are shifted to the storage area for the reserved game times (n = 3).

  The description returns to FIG. After executing Step S11804, the process proceeds to Step S11805. In step S11805, effect information setting processing is executed. The effect information setting process is a process of performing various determinations based on the information stored in the game time setting information storage area and setting various items related to the effect performed in each game time. The details of the effect information setting process will be described later. After executing Step S11805, the process proceeds to Step S11806.

  In step S11806, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. If it is determined in step S11806 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S11806: YES), the process advances to step S11807.

  In step S11807, an effect setting process is performed. The effect setting process is a process for setting an effect to be performed in the game round. The effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step S11807, the process proceeds to Step S11808.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11806 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S11806: NO), the process advances to step S11808 without executing step S11807.

  In step S11808, a process for responding to another command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. After executing step S11808, the present command corresponding process ends.

<Update process when winning>
Next, the update processing at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 38: S11802).

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the updating process at the time of winning. In step S11901, it is determined whether or not the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first opening 33. If it is determined in step S11901 that the hold command to be read this time has been transmitted based on the winning in the first starting port 33 (S11901: YES), the process proceeds to step S11902, and the sound light is output. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on winning in the first starting port 33 in the sound-light-side MPU 92. In the update processing of the first pending number counter area, the information of the first pending number counter area is updated to the information of the pending number included in the pending command to be read this time. After executing Step S11902, the process proceeds to Step S11904.

  In step S11901, when it is determined that the hold command to be read this time has not been transmitted based on the winning in the first start port 33 (S11901: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start port. If it is determined that the data has been transmitted based on the winning of the No. 34, the process advances to step S11903 to execute an update process of the second reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light RAM 94. . The second pending number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pending information acquired based on the winning in the second starting port 34 in the sound-light-side MPU 92. In the updating process of the second reserved number counter area, the information of the second reserved number counter area is updated to the information of the reserved number included in the command that has been read this time. After executing step S11903, the process advances to step S11904.

  The reason why the processes in steps S11902 and S11903 are described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio light emission control device 90. Not done. For this reason, when the power is cut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning in the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 displays the hold information. While being stored and held, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of hold information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is employed in which the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area is counted up each time the sound emission control device 90 receives a hold command, the main control device 60 actually stores the hold command. There may be a problem that the number of held pieces of information and the number of held pieces of information recognized by the sound emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holds, and the sound emission control device 90 receives the hold command every time the command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of held items included is set in the first held number counter area or the second held number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience.

  In step S11904, an update process of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light RAM 94 is executed. The total reserved number counter area stores the sum of the number of pending information acquired based on the winning in the first opening 33 and the number of the pending information acquired based on the winning in the second opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved number counter area is represented by the sum of the information of the reserved number measured in the first reserved number counter area and the information of the reserved number measured in the second reserved number counter area. Update to After executing Step S11904, the update processing at the time of the final winning is ended.

<Direction information setting process>
Next, the effect information setting process will be described. The effect information setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 38: S11805).

  As described above, the effect information setting process is a process of performing various determinations based on the information stored in the game time setting information storage area and setting various items related to the effect performed in each game time. Then, the set various items are stored in the effect information area of the game time setting information storage area. For convenience of explanation, first, the effect information area (see FIG. 39) of the game time setting information storage area (the game time setting information storage area for the first starting port, the game time setting information storage area for the second starting port) will be described. I do. Thereafter, the effect information setting process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the effect information area of the game time setting information storage area for the first starting port has a point giving effect flag, a continuous effect final game time flag, and a carry-over game time flag for each reserved game time. , The total number of points to be awarded, the effect scenario No. and the point awarding scenario No.

  The point giving effect flag will be described. The point giving effect flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game time is set to the game time for executing the point giving effect.

  The continuous production final game times flag will be described. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is a point-giving effect in a case where the accumulated points are carried over the game times and the accumulated points are used over a plurality of game times. And the last game time among the game times for executing the continuous effect is also referred to as a continuous effect final game time. The continuous production final game time flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game time is set to the continuous production final game time.

  The carryover game flag will be described. In the present embodiment, the carry forward game time is a game time that is executed earlier than the continuous effect final game time among the game times for executing the continuous effect, that is, a game time in which the accumulated points are carried forward. The carry-around game time flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game time is set to the carry-over game time.

  In the above-described point giving effect flag, continuous effect final game time flag, and carryover game time flag stored in the effect information area, the effect of the game time corresponding to these flags is set in the effect setting process described later. After that, it is turned off (reset) by updating the game time setting information storage area (FIG. 51: S12112).

  More specifically, the continuous game final game time and the carryover game time will be described. For example, in the case of the point giving effect (case 2) in FIG. 15, the accumulated points are a series of three consecutive games of the game time U1 to the game time U3. Since it is used at times, the point giving effect is a continuous effect executed over three game times. The game time U1 and the game time U2 are the game times in which the accumulated points are carried over, and are the game times carried forward. The game time U3 is the last game time of the continuous effect because it is the last game time among the game times for executing the continuous effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game times for executing the continuous effect is referred to as an execution game number Np. In the case of the point giving effect (case 2) in FIG. 15, Np = 3 because a continuous effect is executed using three game times. The number of executed games Np is used in the process (effect information setting process).

  The effect scenario number (hereinafter, also referred to as effect scenario No.) will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect scenario is a variety of effects related to the effect performed in the processing target game time, such as the type of moving image to be executed in the processing target game time, the timing of executing the moving image, the timing of executing the point giving effect, and the like. This is a program in which the above items are set. The sound light side ROM 93 stores a plurality of effect scenarios. The production scenario No. is a code assigned to each production scenario, and is used to identify one production scenario.

  The point giving scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as a point giving scenario number) will be described. In the present embodiment, the point giving scenario is a program in which the number of points to be given in the point giving effect set in each effect scenario is set. The sound light side ROM 93 stores a plurality of point giving scenarios. The point giving scenario No. is a code assigned to each point giving scenario, and is used for specifying one point giving scenario. The effect information area in the game setting information storage area has been described above.

  Next, the effect information setting process will be described. In the effect information setting process, the effect information (point giving effect flag, continuous effect final game time flag, carryover game time flag, total number of provided points) stored in the effect information area corresponding to the pending game time being processed. , Effect scenario No., point giving scenario No.).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect information setting process. The processing executed in the effect information setting processing is roughly composed of three processing groups.

  The processing group from step S12003 to step S12008 is a processing group for setting effect information of the processing target game time when the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game time is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)”. is there.

  The processing group of step S12011 to step S12015 is a case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “out (reach non-occurrence)” and the processing target game times are set as the continuous production final game times. Is a processing group for setting effect information of the processing target game times.

  The processing group from step S12016 to step S12018 is for a case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “out (reach non-occurrence)”, and the processing target game times have continuity with other game times. This is a group of processes for setting the effect information of the processing target game times when a point giving effect is not performed (when a continuous effect is not executed) or when a point giving effect is not executed.

  The details of the effect information setting process will be described below. For the sake of convenience, the process of determining which of the three processing groups to execute (step S12001, step S12002, step S12010) is described first. The processing group from step S12016 to step S12018 will be described, then the processing group from step S12003 to step S12008 will be described, and finally, the processing group from step S12011 to step S12015 will be described.

  In step S12001, reading of information stored in the game time setting information storage area is executed. When the game time to be processed is based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the information recorded in the game time setting information storage area for the first starting port is read, and the game time to be processed is set to the second game time. When the game ball is entered into the starting port 34, the information recorded in the second starting port game time setting information storage area is read. After executing step S12001, the process advances to step S12002.

  In step S12002, the result of the jackpot lottery for the processing target game times is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)” based on the information in the destination determination information area corresponding to the processing target game times in the game time setting information storage area. It is determined whether there is. In step S12002, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game to be processed is neither “big hit” nor “missing (reach occurrence)”, that is, when it is determined that “missing (reach non-occurrence)” (S12002: NO), the process proceeds to step S12010.

  In step S12010, it is determined whether or not the continuous production final game time flag of the reserved game time (preceding reserved game time) immediately before the game time to be processed is ON. By executing the process, the continuous production in which the reserved game time (preceding reserved game time) immediately before the processing target game time is set as the carry-over game time, and the processing target game time is set as the continuous production final game time is performed. It is determined whether or not execution is possible. In the present embodiment, in the case of executing a continuous production in which the game time in which the result of the jackpot lottery is “out (reach non-occurrence)” is set as the continuous production final game time, the number of game times to execute the continuous production ( Since the number of executed games (Np) is set to 2, the preceding game time to be determined as to whether or not the continuous production final game time flag is ON is the preceding reserved game immediately before the processing time to be processed. Only once.

  At the time when the effect information setting process in the processing target game time is executed, if it is set not to execute the point giving effect in the preceding reservation game time immediately before the processing target game time, or the preceding reservation game time Is set to execute the point-giving effect (do not execute the continuous effect) at one time, the continuous effect final game time flag of the preceding reserved game time is set to OFF. Note that, at the time when the effect information setting process in the processing target game time is executed, the preceding pending game time immediately before the processing target game time is not set as the carryover game time in the continuous effect, and the processing target game time is not set. There is no case where the continuous production final game time flag of the preceding reserved game time is set to OFF because the preceding reserved game time immediately before the current time is the carry-over game time. Hereinafter, the reason will be described.

  At the time when the effect information setting processing in the processing target game time is executed, the effect information of the preceding pending game time has already been set, but in the present embodiment, the execution of the effect information setting processing in the processing target game time is performed. Accordingly, the effect information of the preliminarily reserved game times already set may be corrected (re-set). In the present embodiment, after the continuous production final game time is set, the preceding pending game time executed prior to the continuous production final game time is set (re-set) as the carryover game time in accordance with the setting. . Therefore, at the time when the effect information setting process in the processing target game time is executed (that is, at the time when the effect information of the processing target game time has not been set yet), the preceding reserved game time immediately before the processing target game time is It is never set to the carry-over game times in the continuous production. It should be noted that the case where the effect information of the previously set preceding pending game times is corrected (re-set) will be described in detail when describing the processing group of steps S12003 to S12008 and the processing group of steps S12011 to S12015.

  If it is determined in step S12010 that the continuous effect final game time flag of the preceding pending game time immediately before the game time to be processed is ON (S12010: YES), the process proceeds to step S12016. That is, the process proceeds to the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018. As described above, the processing group from step S12016 to step S12018 is a case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “out (reach non-occurrence)”, and the processing times of the other game times in the processing target game times This is a process group for setting the effect information of the processing target game times when executing a point giving effect that does not have continuity (when not performing a continuous effect) or not executing a point giving effect. In this embodiment, at the time of setting the effect of the processing target game times, for the preceding pending game times already set to the continuous effect final game times, the setting of the continuous effect final game times is given priority, and later It is not corrected (re-set) to the carry-over game times in the continuous production. Therefore, in step S12010, when the continuous production final game time flag of the preceding reserved game time immediately before the target game time is ON, the process target game time does not have continuity with the preceding reserved game time. A processing group for setting an effect (the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018) is executed.

  In step S12016, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the point giving effect in the game round to be processed. The point-giving effect in the process is a point-giving effect executed in one processing target game time without continuity with other game times. In the present embodiment, the lottery in the present process is executed using a predetermined random number, and the probability that the lottery result of executing the point giving effect is set to 50%. After executing Step S12016, the process proceeds to Step S12017.

  In step S12017, the result of the lottery in step S12016 is determined, and if it is determined that the lottery result of executing the point giving effect in the game time to be processed (S12017: YES), the process proceeds to step S12018.

  In step S12018, the total of the points to be awarded in the point awarding effect executed in one processing target game time (total awarded points) is determined. In this processing, the total assigned points are determined by a predetermined lottery, and are set so that the total assigned points are between 0 and 9 points. That is, it is set so that the accumulation points for the processing target game times are not accumulated and the button press effect is not executed. This is in order to prevent the player from giving an unnecessary feeling of expectation by executing the button press effect in the game times in which the result of the jackpot lottery is neither “big hit” nor “out (reach occurrence)”. After executing step S12018, the process advances to step S12009.

  On the other hand, in step S12017, the result of the lottery in step S12016 is determined, and when it is determined that the result of the lottery is not to be executed in the game time to be processed (S12017: NO), step S12018 is not executed. The process proceeds to step S12009.

  In step S12009, the effect information area in the game time setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the items determined in steps S12016 to S12018 are recorded in the effect information area of the game time setting information recording area. For example, if it is determined that the point giving effect is to be executed once in the processing target game time, the point giving effect flag is set to ON, the continuous effect final game time flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game time flag is set to OFF. The total assigned points are set to the value of the total assigned points determined in step S12018. The rendering scenario No. and the point giving scenario No. are set to NULL. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern of an effect to be executed in the game time is generated from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario only for the game time in which the continuous effect final game time flag is ON. For an effect to be executed in a game time in which the continuous effect final game time flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read from an effect pattern table prepared in advance and set. The effect pattern table that is set when a point-giving effect is executed in one processing target game time will be described later.

  If it is determined that the point giving effect is not executed in the game time to be processed, the point giving effect flag is set to OFF, the continuous effect final game time flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game time flag is set to OFF. The total award point is NULL without being set. The rendering scenario No. and the point giving scenario No. are NULL without being set.

  In step S12009, after the effect information area in the game time setting information recording area is updated, the effect information setting process ends.

  Next, a processing group of steps S12003 to S12008 will be described. As described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)”, the processing group of step S12003 to step S12008 outputs the processing information of the processing target game times. This is a processing group to be set.

  As described above, in step S12002, the result of the jackpot lottery for the processing target game times is “big hit” or “missing” based on the information in the destination determination information area corresponding to the processing target game times in the game time setting information storage area. (Reach occurrence) is determined. If it is determined in step S12002 that the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)” (S12002: YES), the process proceeds to step S12003.

  In step S12003, the continuous production final game time flag of the preceding pending game time in the game time setting information storage area of the preceding pending game time is read, and the continuous production final game time flag is continuously turned OFF as viewed from the processing target game time. The number of preceding pending game times is specified. In this processing, the number of the preceding pending game times in which the continuous production final game time flag is OFF continuously from the processing target game time is specified, so that the preceding reserved game time before the processing target game time is specified. Is used as a carry-over game time, and it is determined whether or not a continuous effect using the processing object game time as a continuous effect final game time is executable. The effect information of the preceding pending game time before the processing game time has already been set, but in the present embodiment, the continuous production final game time flag is continuously turned off as viewed from the processing game time. The precedent pending game time is determined to be a game time that can be reset as a carryover game time. Hereinafter, the number of preceding pending game times in which the continuous production final game time flag is continuously OFF as viewed from the processing target game times is also referred to as a resettable game number Fn.

  For example, in the case of the first start opening game time setting information storage area shown in FIG. 39A, if the processing game time to be processed is a reservation game time (n = 4), a reservation game time (n = 4) ), The continuous production final game time flag of the reserved game time (n = 3) and the reserved game time (n = 2), which are continuous game times, is continuously OFF, and in this case, a resettable game The number of times Fn = 2. Note that the game time setting information storage area for the first start-up port shown in FIG. 39 (a) shows the case where the reserved game time (n = 4) is the game time to be processed in the effect information setting process. The information of the effect information area of the reserved game times (n = 4) has not been set. That is, the information of the effect information area is set by the effect information setting process.

  Also, if the number of the preceding pending game times in which the continuous production final game time flag is continuously OFF from the processing target game time is 0, the resettable game number Fn = 0 is set. I do.

  After executing step S12003, the process advances to step S12004.

  In step S12004, the number of game times (hereinafter referred to as the execution game number Np) that can be used for the continuous effect is determined based on the resettable game frequency Fn specified in step S12003. In the present embodiment, the number of executed games Np is determined by lottery using random numbers. As described above, the resettable number of games Fn is the number of games that can be used as a carry-over effect. Therefore, the maximum value that can be taken as the number of executed games Np is the final number of consecutive resettable games Fn. It becomes a value obtained by adding 1 as the number of game times. Therefore, in step S12004, the number of execution games Np that is equal to or less than Fn + 1 is determined by a predetermined lottery. The random number used for the lottery may be obtained when a game ball enters the starting port corresponding to the game time to be processed, or may be obtained when the lottery is executed. When the number of reconfigurable games Fn = 0, the number Np of executed games is necessarily one. After executing Step S12004, the process proceeds to Step S12005.

  In step S12005, an effect scenario is determined based on the temporary fluctuation time of the processing target game times. As described above, the effect scenario includes various types of effects related to the effect performed in the processing target game time, such as the type of the moving image to be executed in the processing target game time, the timing of executing the moving image, the timing of executing the point giving effect, and the like. Is a program that has been set. In the present embodiment, an effect scenario is determined with reference to the jackpot effect scenario table or the reach effect scenario table stored in the sound-light side ROM 93. If the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing game to be processed is "big hit", the staging scenario is determined using the jackpot effect scenario table, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is "losing (reach occurrence), the staging scenario for reach. The production scenario is determined using the table.

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a jackpot effect scenario table. As shown in the drawing, in the jackpot effect scenario table, four types of effect scenarios correspond to one change time (temporary change time) that can be set in the processing target game times. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a reach effect scenario table. As with the jackpot effect scenario table, four types of effect scenarios correspond to one change time (temporary change time) that can be set for the processing target game times.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect scenario corresponding to the temporary fluctuation time T = t4 in the jackpot effect scenario table as an example. FIG. 44 (a) shows a jackpot effect scenario (effect scenario Esc (D1) to effect scenario Esc (D4)) corresponding to the temporary fluctuation time T = t4. As shown in the drawing, each of the four types of effect scenarios is set in accordance with the length of the temporary fluctuation time T = t4, and the type of effect to be executed, the point-giving effect, and the button press effect are executed. The timing and the like are different from each other. The “pseudo-run” shown in the figure indicates a pseudo-continuous effect, “Bt” indicates a button-press effect, and “Pe” indicates a point-adding effect.

  In addition, the fluctuation time of the game time varies depending on the number of the reserved game times at the time when the game time corresponding to the effect scenario is executed. In the present embodiment, as the number of reserved game times increases, the fluctuation time of the game times decreases. Therefore, in the present embodiment, each effect scenario is prepared for each number of pending game times.

  FIG. 44 (b) explains that one type of effect scenario (effect scenario Esc (D1)) is prepared for each number of suspended game times (first starting suspended number RaN: 0 to 4). FIG. As shown in the figure, each effect scenario has the same effect animation and the number of executions of the point giving effect, but the effect time is shorter in the effect scenario adapted when the number of pending game times is large. It is set to be.

  In step S12005 (FIG. 41), four types of effect scenarios corresponding to the temporary fluctuation times of the game times to be processed are specified from the jackpot effect scenario table (or the reach effect scenario table), and the four specified effect scenarios are specified. Is determined by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. The process of selecting one of the five effect scenarios shown in FIG. 44B is selected according to the number of pending game times immediately before the game time corresponding to the effect scenario is executed. After executing Step S12005, the process proceeds to Step S12006.

  In step S12006, a point giving scenario corresponding to the number of executed games Np is determined based on the determined effect scenario. The point giving scenario is a program in which the number of points given in the point giving effect set in each effect scenario is set. In this processing, a point giving scenario is determined based on the jackpot / reach point giving scenario table stored in the sound light ROM 93.

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot / reach point giving scenario table. As shown in the figure, two point giving scenarios are set corresponding to each effect scenario and each of the number of executed games Np (1 to 4) determined in step S12004. In this processing, two point providing scenarios are specified based on the determined effect scenario and the number of executed games Np, and one point providing scenario is selected from the two specified point providing scenarios by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. decide. Actually, as shown in FIG. 45, in the jackpot / reach point giving scenario table, two point giving scenarios No. are set corresponding to each execution game number Np. When the point-giving scenario No. is determined, the point-giving scenario corresponding to the point-giving scenario No. is read from the sound-light side ROM 93.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a jackpot / reach point giving scenario. As shown in the figure, in each point giving scenario, the value of the given points suitable for the effect scenario to be executed in the processing target game time is set in the execution order of the point giving effect set in the effect scenario, and the number of executed game times is set. The total number of points to be given in each preceding game round is set corresponding to Np. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the point giving scenario Psc (A2g) is a case where the effect scenario set in the processing target game times is Esc (A2) and the number of execution games Np = 4. Selected. In Psc (A2g), the number of points given in the game round to be processed is set for each point giving effect to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46, the first point-giving effect in the processing game time is 1 point, the second point-giving effect is 2 points, the third point-giving effect is 3 points, the fourth time. In the point giving effect, 1 point is given, and in the fifth point giving effect, 2 points are given.

  In each point giving scenario, the total number of points given in the point giving effects executed in the preceding game times 1 to 3 is set. In FIG. 46, the game time executed immediately before the game time (the game time to be processed) is referred to as a preceding game time 1, and the game time executed immediately before the preceding game time 1 The preceding game time 2 is described, and the game time executed immediately before the preceding game time 2 is described as the preceding game time 3. In the case of the point giving scenario Psc (A2g) of FIG. 46 described above as an example, the total number of points given in the preceding game 1 executed immediately before the processing game to be processed is 5 points, and The total number of awarded points in the preceding game round 2 executed immediately before is 4 points, and the total number of awarded points in the preceding game round 3 executed immediately before the preceding game round 2 is 1 point. The timing of executing the point-giving effect in each of the preceding game times 1 to 3 and the number of points to be given in one point-giving effect are determined by the variation time of each preceding game time and the total awarded points in the effect setting process described later. Determined based on a number. After performing Step S12006, the process proceeds to Step S12007.

  In step S12007, it is determined whether or not the number of executed games Np determined in step S12004 is 2 or more. That is, it is determined whether or not a continuous effect in which the processing time to be processed is set to the final effect time of the continuous production and the preceding game time is set to the carry forward time is performed. More specifically, when a continuous effect in which the preceding game time is set to the carryover game time is executed, it is necessary to reset (correct) the effect information of the previously set preceding game time, By determining whether or not the number of executed games Np is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not resetting is necessary. If it is determined in step S12007 that the number of executed games Np is 2 or more (S12007: YES), the flow proceeds to step S12008.

  In step S12008, the total awarded points of each preceding game time stored in the point awarding scenario set for the game time to be processed are read. That is, the total points given in the point giving effect executed in each preceding game round are read. After executing Step S12008, the process proceeds to Step S12009.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12007 that the number Np of executed games is not equal to or greater than 2 (S12007: NO), the process proceeds to step S12009 without executing step S12008.

  In step S12009, the effect information area in the game time setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the items determined in steps S12003 to S12008 are recorded in the effect information area of the game time setting information recording area. For example, when the preceding pending game time before the processing target game time is used as the carry forward game time, and when it is determined to execute the continuous production using the process target game time as the continuous production final game time, it is used as the carry forward game time. The point giving effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the preceding game time is set to ON, the continuous game final game time flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game time flag is set to ON again. As the total assigned points, the total assigned points in each preceding game round read in step S12008 are reset. The effect scenario No. and the point giving scenario No. are reset as NULL. As described above, in the present embodiment, an effect pattern of an effect executed in the game time is created from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario only for the game time for which the continuous effect final game time flag is ON. For an effect to be executed in a game time in which the continuous effect final game time flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read from an effect pattern table prepared in advance and set. An effect pattern table prepared for an effect to be executed in a game time in which the continuous effect final game time flag is not ON will be described later.

  Then, the point-giving effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the processing target game time used as the continuous effect final game time is set to ON, the continuous effect final game time flag is set to ON, and the carryover game time flag is set to OFF. The total grant point is set to NULL. The total awarded points are parameters used when determining an effect to be executed in a game time in which the continuous effect final game time flag is not ON. In the continuous effect final game time, an effect scenario and points for each point awarded effect are provided. Since the giving scenario is set, it is not necessary to set the total giving points. The effect scenario No. sets an effect scenario No. corresponding to the effect scenario determined in step S12005. As the point providing scenario number, a point providing scenario number corresponding to the point providing scenario determined in step S12006 is set.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)”, the continuous production final game when the game time executes the continuous production If it is not set to the number of times, that is, even if the number of executed games Np = 1, it is considered that a continuous effect of the number of executed games Np = 1 is executed, and the game time is treated as a continuous effect final game time. That is, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)”, the continuous production final game time flag in the production information area corresponding to the game time is always turned on. Is set. By doing in this way, when the game time whose jackpot lottery result is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)” determines the effect information of the game time to be executed after the game time, the carryover game Avoid being reset as times. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the accumulation points in the game times in which the jackpot lottery result is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)” are not carried over to the game times executed later.

  In step S12009, after the effect information area in the game time setting information recording area is updated, the effect information setting process ends.

  Next, a processing group of steps S12011 to S12015 will be described. As described above, the processing group from step S12011 to step S12015 is for the case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “out (reach non-occurrence)”, and the processing target game times are the continuous production final game. This is a processing group for setting the effect information of the processing target game times when the time is set to times.

  As described above, in step S12010, it is determined whether or not the continuous production final game time flag of the reserved game time (preceding reserved game time) immediately before the game time to be processed is ON. If it is determined in step S12010 that the continuous production final game time flag of the preceding pending game time immediately before the game time to be processed is not ON (S12010: NO), the process proceeds to step S12011. In other words, it is determined that the reserved game time (preceding reserved game time) immediately before the target game time to be processed is set to the carry-over game time, and that the continuous production in which the process target game time is set to the continuous game final game time is executable. If so, the process advances to step S12011.

  In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of performing a continuous production in which the game time in which the result of the jackpot lottery is “out (no occurrence of reach)” is set as the continuous production final game time, the continuous production is performed. The number of games to be executed (the number of executed games Np) is set to 2. This is because, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “out (reach non-occurrence)”, by reducing the number of game times in which the continuous effect is executed, unnecessary expectation is not given to the player. In addition, when the number of game times in which the continuous production is executed becomes three or more, the player recognizes that the result of the jackpot lottery of the final consecutive game production is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)”. In this way, it is possible to give the player a pleasure of counting the number of times the continuous effect is executed, and to increase the number of times the continuous effect is executed, thereby amplifying the player's sense of expectation. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of executing a continuous production in which the result of the jackpot lottery is “out of play (non-reach occurrence)” is set as the continuous production final game, Although the configuration in which the number of times (the number of executed games Np) is set to 2 is adopted, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which the number of executed games Np is set to 3 or 4 may be adopted.

  In step S12011, the continuous game in which the reserved game time (preceding reserved game time) immediately before the processing game time is set to the carry-over game time and the processing game time is set to the continuous game final game time, that is, the execution game It is determined whether or not to execute a continuous effect of the number Np = 2. In the present embodiment, the determination is made by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. In the present embodiment, the probability that the lottery result of executing the continuous effect is 20% is set. In other words, the execution of the continuous production (rolling-over of the accumulation points) is executed with a high probability when the result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)”, and the result of the jackpot lottery is “missing (reach non-occurrence). In the case of "))", the setting is made so as to be executed with low probability. By setting in this manner, a strong sense of expectation can be given to the player who has recognized that the accumulated points have been carried over during the execution of the game. After executing step S12011, the process advances to step S12012.

  In step S12012, it is determined whether or not it is determined in step S12011 to execute the continuous effect (Np = 2).

  If it is determined in step S12011 that the continuous effect (Np = 2) is not to be executed (S12012: NO), the process proceeds to step S12016. In other words, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the processing target game times is “out (reach non-occurrence)”, a point giving effect that does not have continuity with other game times in the processing target game times is executed. Since this is the case, the processing by the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018 is executed. Since the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018 has been described above, the description is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12011 that a continuous effect (Np = 2) is to be executed (S12012: YES), the flow proceeds to step S12013.

  In step S12013, an effect scenario is determined based on the temporary fluctuation time of the processing target game times. In the present embodiment, an effect scenario is determined with reference to an effect scenario table for non-reach stored in the sound-light side ROM 93.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-reach effect scenario table. As illustrated, in the non-reach effect scenario table, two effect scenarios correspond to one change time (temporary change time) that can be set for the processing target game times.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating, as an example, an effect scenario corresponding to the temporary fluctuation time T = t24 in the effect scenario table for non-reach. As shown in the drawing, the fluctuating time is set corresponding to T = t24 in each of the effect scenarios, and the type of the effect to be executed, the timing at which the point giving effect is executed, and the like are different from each other. Further, the button press effect is not set in the non-reach effect scenario. That is, the point giving scenario described later is set so that points given by the point giving effect are not accumulated more than 10 points. In other words, the accumulation of 10 or more accumulation points is limited to the case where the jackpot lottery result is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)”. By doing so, a strong sense of expectation can be given to the player when ten or more accumulated points are accumulated.

  Further, similarly to the above-described jackpot effect scenario and the reach effect scenario, the fluctuation time of the game time varies depending on the number of suspended game times at the time when the game time corresponding to the effect scenario is executed. In the present embodiment, as the number of reserved game times increases, the fluctuation time of the game times decreases. Therefore, in the present embodiment, each effect scenario is prepared for each number of pending game times. After executing Step S12013, the process proceeds to Step S12014.

  In step S12014, a point giving scenario is determined based on the determined effect scenario. In this processing, the point giving scenario is determined based on the non-reach point giving scenario table stored in the sound light ROM 93.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-reach point grant scenario table. As shown in the figure, one point giving scenario is set corresponding to each effect scenario. Actually, as shown in FIG. 49, in the non-reach point giving scenario table, one point giving scenario No. is set corresponding to each effect scenario, and the point giving scenario of the point giving scenario to be executed is set. The point providing scenario corresponding to No is read from the sound light side ROM 93.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating each point giving scenario for non-reach. As shown in the figure, in each point giving scenario, the value of the given points suitable for the effect scenario to be executed in the processing game to be processed is set in the execution order of the point giving effect set in the effect scenario, and one point before , The total number of points to be given in the preceding game round executed is set.

  After executing Step S12014, the process proceeds to Step S12015.

  In step S12015, the total awarded points of the preceding game times stored in the point awarding scenario set for the target game times are read. That is, the total points given in the point giving effect executed in the preceding game round are read. After executing step S12015, the process advances to step S12009.

  In step S12009, the effect information area in the game time setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the items determined in steps S12011 to S12015 are recorded in the effect information area of the game time setting information recording area. In other words, the preceding game that is used as the carry-over game time is executed because the preceding pending game time before the process-target game time is used as the carry-over game time and the continuous production is performed using the process-target game time as the continuous effect final game time. The point giving effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the time is turned ON, the continuous effect final game time flag is turned OFF, and the carryover game time flag is reset to ON. As the total assigned points, the total assigned points in the preceding game round read in step S12015 are reset. The effect scenario No. and the point giving scenario No. are reset as NULL. As described above, in the present embodiment, an effect pattern of an effect executed in the game time is created from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario only for the game time for which the continuous effect final game time flag is ON. For an effect to be executed in a game time in which the continuous effect final game time flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read from an effect pattern table prepared in advance and set.

  Then, the point-giving effect flag of the effect information corresponding to the processing target game time used as the continuous effect final game time is set to ON, the continuous effect final game time flag is set to ON, and the carryover game time flag is set to OFF. The total grant point is set to NULL. As described above, the total awarded point is a parameter used when determining an effect to be executed in a game time in which the continuous effect final game time flag is not ON, and in the continuous effect final game time, Since the production scenario and the point giving scenario are set, it is not necessary to set the total given points. The effect scenario No. sets an effect scenario No. corresponding to the effect scenario determined in step S12013. As the point giving scenario number, a point giving scenario number corresponding to the point giving scenario determined in step S12014 is set.

  In step S12009, after the effect information area in the game time setting information recording area is updated, the effect information setting process ends.

<Direction setting process>
Next, the effect setting processing will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 38: S11807).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. In step S12101, based on the game time setting information storage area (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the continuous production final game time flag of the game time to be processed in this process is ON. If it is determined in step S12101 that the continuous production final game time flag of the game time to be processed is ON (S12101: YES), the process proceeds to step S12102.

  In step S12102, based on the game time setting information storage area (FIG. 39), the effect scenario and the point giving scenario set for the game time to be processed are read. At this time, as the effect scenario, an effect scenario corresponding to the number of suspended game times at the time of this processing is read (see FIG. 44 (b)). After executing Step S12102, the process proceeds to Step S12103.

  In step S12103, an effect pattern is generated based on the effect scenario and the point-giving scenario set for the processing target game times.

  FIG. 52 is an image diagram of an effect pattern generated based on the effect scenario and the point-giving scenario set in the processing target game times. In the effect scenario, the timing at which each point-giving effect is executed and the timing at which the button press effect is executed are recorded. In the point giving scenario, the number of points given for each point giving effect set in the effect scenario is recorded. The sound-light-side MPU 92 generates an effect pattern by reading the effect scenario and the point-giving scenario set in the processing target game time, and sets the effect pattern in the processing target game time. As described above, in the present embodiment, only for the game times for which the continuous effect final game time flag is ON, the effect pattern of the effect to be executed in the game times is generated from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. For an effect to be executed in a game time in which the continuous effect final game time flag is not ON, a predetermined effect pattern is read from an effect pattern table prepared in advance and set. After executing Step S12103, the process proceeds to Step S12107.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12101 that the continuous production final game time flag of the game time to be processed is not ON (S12101: NO), the process proceeds to step S12104.

  In step S12104, based on the game time setting information storage area (FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the point giving effect flag of the game time to be processed in this process is ON. If it is determined in step S12104 that the point giving effect flag of the processing target game times is ON (S12104: YES), the process proceeds to step S12105. That is, when the processing target game time is set to the carryover game time in the case where the continuous effect is executed, or when the point providing effect is set to be executed in one of the processing target game times. Then, the process proceeds to step S12105.

  In step S12105, the effect pattern in the processing target game time is determined based on the fluctuation time of the processing target game time and the total number of assigned points. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuating time and the total number of applied points is specified from the point-added effect effect pattern table stored in the sound-light side ROM 93 in advance, and set as an effect pattern in the processing target game time. .

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect pattern table for point giving effect. As shown in the drawing, in the point giving effect presentation pattern table, one effect pattern (point giving effect effect pattern) is stored in association with the variation time of the game times and the total given points.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a point-giving effect rendering effect pattern recorded in the point-giving effect rendering effect pattern table. As shown in the drawing, in the effect pattern recorded in the effect-providing effect pattern table, the number of points to be given in each point-adding effect is set in addition to the timing at which the point-adding effect is executed. In the present embodiment, in the game time in which the continuous production final game time flag is ON, an effect pattern of an effect to be executed in the game time is generated from the effect scenario and the point giving scenario, so that in each point giving effect, The number of points to be awarded is set, but in the game time in which the continuous production final game time flag is not ON, as shown in FIG. Is prepared.

  As described above, when the processing target game time is set to the carryover game time in the case where the continuous effect is executed, or the point providing effect is set to be executed in one of the processing target game times. In this case, the same effect pattern table can be used, so that the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, when set to the carry-over game time in the case where the continuous effect is executed, the accumulation points are carried over to the next game time, and the point-giving effect is set to be executed in one of the processing target game times. If it is, it is necessary to reset the accumulation point at the end of the game round, but the display control when the accumulation point is carried over and the display control when the accumulation point is not carried out are determined by setting the carry-around game time flag in the point accumulation processing described later. Since it is realized by using, the case where it is set to the carryover game time when the continuous effect is executed, and the case where it is set to execute the point giving effect in one of the processing target game times, The same staging pattern can be applied. After executing step S12105 (FIG. 51), the process advances to step S12107.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S12104 that the point giving effect flag of the processing target game time is not ON (S12104: NO), the process proceeds to step S12106. That is, when the game time to be processed is a game time in which the result of the jackpot lottery is “missing (reach has not occurred)” and the point giving effect is not executed, the process proceeds to step S12106.

  In step S12106, an effect pattern is determined based on the fluctuation time of the processing target game times. Specifically, an effect pattern corresponding to the variation time is specified from the effect pattern table for normal effect stored in advance in the sound-light side ROM 93, and set as the effect pattern in the target game time. In the effect pattern table for normal effect, one effect pattern is stored corresponding to each variation time of the game times. After executing step S12016, the process advances to step S12107.

  In step S12107, a process of setting a liquid crystal symbol to be stopped is executed. In the process of setting the symbol for the liquid crystal, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is a 16R certain variable jackpot, an 8R certain variable jackpot, a 16R ordinary large jackpot, or an 8R ordinary large jackpot, the same symbol is displayed on the activated line L. Is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is a 16R probability variable jackpot or an 8R probability variable jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same symbol combination can be selected. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd symbols and the combination of the same even symbols, but instead, the former is more selective than the latter. A configuration having a higher rate may be adopted, and a configuration in which the latter has a higher selectivity than the former may be adopted. In addition, the combination of the symbol “7” is selected only in the case of the 16R probability change big hit. When the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same even symbol combination is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is an outlier, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the change command. If it is determined that the combination corresponds to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is established on the activated line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing Step S12107, the process proceeds to Step S12108.

  In step S12108, a variable display pattern setting process is executed. In the process, the information of the fluctuation time of the current game is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information of the fluctuation time and the combination of the information of the stop symbol specified in step S12107 are combined. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light ROM 93 is referred to. After executing Step S12108, the process proceeds to Step S12109.

  In step S12109, the effect pattern set in the processing of steps S12103, S12105, and S12106, the design for stopping liquid crystal, and the variable display pattern are set as effect commands, and the flow advances to step S12110.

  In step S12110, the set effect command is transmitted to display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect content corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S12111.

  In step S12111, a process of updating the hold information is performed. Specifically, the information of the total reserved number counter area is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing Step S12111, the process proceeds to Step S12112.

  In step S12112, an update process of the game time setting information storage area 94d (FIG. 39) is executed. If the game time to be processed is a game time triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 33, the game time setting information stored in the first starting port game time setting information storage area (first determination) Information and effect information) are shifted to the storage area of the adjacent reserved game times as shown in FIG. If the game time to be processed is a game time triggered by a ball entering the second starting port 34, the game time setting information stored in the game time setting information storage area for the second starting port (first determination) Information and effect information) are shifted to the storage area of the next reserved game time as shown in FIG. After executing step S12110, the effect setting process ends.

<Point giving effect execution process>
Next, the point giving effect execution processing will be described. As described above, the point giving effect execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point giving effect during the execution of the game times. The point giving effect execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37: S11703).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the point giving effect execution processing. In step S12201, a point accumulation process is executed. The point accumulation process is a process of controlling the start of execution of the point giving effect and performing display control for displaying the points given in the point giving effect as a pearl image indicating the accumulated points on the stage St. is there. Details of the point accumulation processing will be described later. After executing Step S12201, the process proceeds to Step S12202.

  In step S12202, a point filling control process is executed. The point filling control process determines, when 10 accumulation points have been accumulated (filled), whether to execute a waiting effect or a timer effect triggered by the filling, and to execute either of them. This is a process of controlling to execute the effect. Details of the point filling control process will be described later. After executing Step S12202, execute Step S12203.

  In step S12203, a button press effect process is executed. The button press effect process is a process for controlling the execution of the button press effect. The details of the button press effect processing will be described later. After executing Step S12203, the process proceeds to Step S12204.

  In step S12204, a point reset process is performed. The point reset process is a process of determining whether to reset or carry over the accumulation points when the game round ends, and controlling the execution of the reset of the accumulation points. Details of the point reset processing will be described later. After executing Step S12204, the process proceeds to Step S12205.

  In step S12205, a stage display control process is performed. The stage display control process is a process for controlling the color of the stage St. The details of the stage display control processing will be described later. After executing Step S12205, the present point giving effect execution process ends.

<Point accumulation processing>
Next, the point accumulation processing will be described. The point accumulation process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution process (FIG. 55: S12201).

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the point accumulation processing. In step S12301, it is determined whether the point provision effect flag is ON. The point giving effect flag is a flag which is turned on when the execution of one point giving effect is started during execution of the game, and turned off when the point giving effect is finished. If it is determined in step S12301 that the point-giving effect flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the point-giving effect has not been started (S12301: NO), the flow proceeds to step S12302.

  In step S12302, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a point-giving effect based on the effect pattern set for the processing game time. If it is determined in step S12302 that it is the timing to start the point giving effect (S12302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1233. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12302 that it is not the timing to start the point giving effect (S12302: NO), the point accumulation process ends.

  In step S12303, the number of points to be given in the point giving effect to be started is read from the effect pattern set in the processing target game times. After executing Step S12303, the process proceeds to Step S12304.

  In step S12304, a moving image display start command for point giving effect corresponding to the number of points to be given is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-adding effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 performs a process of displaying the effect moving image of the point-adding effect corresponding to the number of points to be provided on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S12304, the process proceeds to Step S12305.

  In step S12305, output of sound corresponding to the point-adding effect moving image corresponding to the number of points to be provided is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point-adding effect moving image is started. . After executing Step S12305, the process proceeds to Step S12306.

In step S12306, the point giving effect execution flag is turned ON. After executing step S12306, the present point accumulation process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12301 that the point provision effect flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the point provision effect has been started (S12301: YES), the process proceeds to step S12307.

  In step S12307, it is determined whether it is time to complete the point provision in the started point provision effect. Specifically, in the point giving effect, after the pearl displaying the number of points given is dropped by the turtle character (see FIG. 11), the pearl displaying the number of points given reaches the stage St. It is determined whether or not there is. In step S12307, when it is determined that the timing at which the points have been awarded has not been completed in the started point awarding effect (S12307: NO), the point accumulation process ends. On the other hand, in step S12307, when it is determined that the timing at which the point provision has been completed in the started point provision effect (S12307: YES), the process proceeds to step S12308.

  In step S12308, the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is updated according to the number of assigned points. The accumulation point counter Cpnt is a counter for counting the value of the accumulation point. In step S12308, when a point is given in the point giving effect, a value corresponding to the given number of points is added to the accumulated point counter Cpnt. After executing Step S12308, the process proceeds to Step S12309.

  In step S12309, it is determined whether the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 10 or more. That is, points are provided by the point provision effect, and it is determined whether or not the accumulated points are 10 points or more. If it is determined in step S12309 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is not equal to or more than 10 points (S12309: NO), the process proceeds to step S12310.

  In step S12310, a point accumulation moving image display start command corresponding to the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The point accumulation moving image is a moving image that displays the number of pearl images corresponding to the accumulation points on the stage St. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point accumulation moving image display start command, the display MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display an effect animation for displaying the number of pearl images corresponding to the accumulation point counter Cpnt on the stage St. After executing Step S12310, the process proceeds to Step S12311.

  In step S12311, output of sound corresponding to the point-stored moving image is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point-stored moving image is started. After executing Step S12311, the process proceeds to Step S12312.

  In step S12312, the point giving effect execution flag is turned off. After that, the point accumulation processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12309 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is equal to or more than 10 points (S12309: YES), the process advances to step S12313.

  In step S12313, the value of the filled counter Cw is incremented by one. The filled counter Cw is a counter that is incremented by 1 every time 10 accumulation points are accumulated. After executing Step S12313, the process proceeds to Step S12314.

  In step S12314, the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is decremented by 10. After executing Step S12314, the process proceeds to Step S12315.

  In step S12315, the unprocessed flag is turned ON. The unprocessed flag indicates that, when the accumulated points have been accumulated for 10 points, the processing for determining whether to execute the waiting effect or the timer effect for the accumulated points for the 10 points has not been performed. This flag is set to ON when there is no data, and is set to OFF when the determination process is completed. Note that the process of determining whether to perform the stand-by effect or the timer effect for the 10 accumulated points is executed in a point filling control process described later. After executing Step S12315, the process proceeds to Step S12309 again.

  That is, the processing of steps S12313 to S12315 is repeated until the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt becomes less than 10. Then, the value of the charged counter Cw increases by the number of times that steps S12313 to S12315 are executed. That is, when the accumulated points for 10 points are regarded as one accumulated point group, the number of accumulated point groups included in the accumulated points after the points are given by the point giving effect is counted, and the accumulated point group is counted. Is added as the filled counter Cw (S12313), and the accumulated points corresponding to the number of accumulated point groups added to the filled counter Cw are subtracted from the accumulated point counter Cpnt (S12314).

  After executing the processing of steps S12313 to S12315, the process again proceeds to step S12309, and if it is determined that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is not 10 points or more (S12309: NO), the process proceeds to step S12310. Since the processing after step S12310 has been described above, the description is omitted.

<Point filling control process>
Next, the point filling control process will be described. The point filling control process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution process (FIG. 55: S12202).

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the point filling control process. In step S12401, it is determined whether the unprocessed flag is ON. As described above, the unprocessed flag determines whether to execute the waiting effect or the timer effect for the 10 accumulated points when the accumulated points are accumulated for 10 points. This flag is turned on when the process is not yet performed, and is turned off when the determination process is completed.

  If it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is ON (S12401: YES), the process advances to step S12404. The process of steps S12404 to S12411 is a process of determining whether to execute a stand-by effect or a timer effect for 10 accumulated points, and to control execution of any of the effects. is there. Therefore, when it is determined that the unprocessed flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the accumulated points have been accumulated for 10 points, the processing of steps S12404 to S12411 is executed to accumulate the accumulated points for 10 points. It is determined whether to execute a stand-by effect or a timer effect for the point, and control the execution of any effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is not ON (S12401: NO), the process advances to step S12402.

  In step S 12402, it is determined whether a variation command / type command has been received. That is, it is determined whether it is time to start a new game round. If it is determined in step S 12402 that the change command / type command has been received, that is, if it is determined that it is time to start a new game round (S 12402: YES), the process proceeds to step S 12403.

  In step S12403, it is determined whether or not the filled counter Cw = 0. If it is determined in step S12403 that the charged counter Cw is not 0 (S12403: NO), the process advances to step S12404. That is, when there is one or more accumulation point groups corresponding to the accumulation points for the above-described 10 points, the process proceeds to step S12404.

  Here, when it is determined in step S 12402 that the variation command / type command has been received (S 12402: YES), and when it is determined in step S 12403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S 12403: NO). The reason for proceeding to step S12404 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the trigger for executing either the stand-by effect or the timer effect is the timing at which a new game round is started in addition to the timing at which 10 or more accumulation points are accumulated. When the game time in which the stand-by effect is being executed ends and the next new game time is started, and the new game time is the continuous effect final game time, Instead, a timer effect is executed. Explaining with reference to FIG. 15, the standby effect that has been started to be executed in the game time U2 that is the carryover game time is switched to the timer effect 1 at the timing when the game time U3 that is the final continuous game time is started.

  Therefore, even if it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is not ON (S12401: NO), it is determined that the timing at which a new game round is started by executing step S12402 (S12402: If it is determined that there is at least one accumulation point group (accumulation points for 10 points) by executing step S12403 (S12403: NO), the process proceeds to step S12404, and steps S12404 to S12411 are performed. It is necessary to determine whether to execute the waiting effect or the timer effect for the accumulated points for 10 points by executing the processing of (1). Therefore, when it is determined that the variation command / type command has been received in step S 12402 (S 12402: YES), and when it is determined in step S 12403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S 12403: NO). Then, the process proceeds to step S12404.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S 12402 that the variation command / type command has not been received (S 12402: NO), and when it is determined in step S 12403 that the filled counter Cw = 0 (S 12403: YES) ), The point filling control process ends.

  In step S12404, it is determined whether the carry-over game time flag of the game time to be processed is ON. If it is determined in step S12404 that the carry-over game time flag of the game time to be processed is ON (S12404: YES), the flow proceeds to step S12405.

  In step S12405, a waiting-state effect moving image display start command corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the waiting-state effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the waiting-state effect moving image corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw on the symbol display device 41. For example, when the filled counter Cw = 1, one image (see FIG. 17) indicating the effect during standby is displayed. When the filled counter Cw = 2, two images indicating the effect during standby are displayed. After executing Step S12405, the process proceeds to Step S12406.

  In step S12406, output of sound corresponding to the waiting-state effect moving image is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the standby-state effect moving image is started. After executing Step S12406, the process proceeds to Step S12411.

  In step S12411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. After that, the point filling control process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12404 that the carry-around game time flag of the game time to be processed is not ON (S12404: NO), the process proceeds to step S12407.

  In step S12407, a time until the button effect is executed based on the effect pattern of the game to be processed is acquired. For example, when one button press effect is executed in the processing target game time, the time until the button press effect is executed is obtained, and two button press effects are executed in the process target game time. , The time until the two button press effects are executed is acquired. After executing Step S12407, the process proceeds to Step S12408.

  In step S12408, a timer effect moving image display start command corresponding to the remaining time until each button press effect is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When receiving the timer effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the timer effect moving image corresponding to the remaining time until each button press effect on the symbol display device 41. For example, when one button press effect is executed in the processing target game time, a timer effect moving image is displayed in which the time until the button press effect is executed is counted down and displayed. In the case where the button press effect is executed twice in the game play to be processed, a timer effect animation in which the time required to execute the first button press effect is counted down and displayed is displayed, and the second button press effect is displayed. A timer effect moving image in which the time until the pressing effect is executed is counted down and displayed is displayed (see FIG. 19A). After executing Step S12408, the process proceeds to Step S12409.

  In step S12409, output of sound corresponding to each timer effect moving image is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the timer effect moving image is started. After executing Step S12409, the process proceeds to Step S12410.

  In step S12410, the value of the filled counter Cw is reset to 0. After executing Step S12410, the process proceeds to Step S12411.

  As described above, in step S12411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. After that, the point filling control process ends.

<Button press effect processing>
Next, the button press effect process will be described. The button press effect processing is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution processing (FIG. 55: S12203).

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the button press effect processing. In step S12501, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the button press effect based on the effect pattern set in the processing target game times. If it is determined in step S12501 that it is time to start the button press effect (S12501: YES), the process advances to step S12502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12501 that it is not the timing for starting the button press effect (S12501: NO), the button press effect process ends.

  In step S12502, a moving image display start command for button press effect is transmitted to the display side MPU. When receiving the button press effect moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the button press effect moving image (see FIG. 14B) on the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S12502, the process proceeds to Step S12503.

  In step S12503, the output of the sound corresponding to the button press effect moving image is started, and the control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the button press effect moving image is started. After executing step S12503, the button press effect processing ends.

<Point reset processing>
Next, the point reset processing will be described. The point reset processing is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution processing (S12204 in FIG. 55).

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the point reset processing. In step S12601, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the game, based on the effect pattern set for the game to be processed. If it is determined in step S12601 that it is the game end timing (S12601: YES), the flow advances to step S12602.

  In step S12602, it is determined whether the carry-over game time flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12602 that the carry-around game time flag is not ON (S12602: NO), the flow advances to step S12603.

  In step S12603, the accumulation point counter Cpnt is reset (Cpnt ← 0). In other words, since the game times other than the carry-over game times, which are the game times for carrying over the accumulation points, do not carry over the accumulation points, the accumulation point counter Cpnt corresponding to the accumulation points in the game times is set to 0 at the end of the game times. After executing step S12603, the point reset process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12601 that it is not the game end timing (S12601: NO), and if it is determined in step S12602 that the carry-around game flag is ON (S12602: YES), the accumulation point counter is set. This point reset processing ends without resetting Cpnt.

<Stage display control processing>
Next, the stage display control processing will be described. The stage display control process is a process for controlling the color of the stage St. The stage display control processing is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the point giving effect execution processing (FIG. 55: S12205).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the stage display control processing. In step S12701, it is determined whether the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 0. If it is determined in step S12701 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is 0 (S12701: YES), the process advances to step S12702.

  In step S12702, a stage moving image display start command in which the color of the stage St is set to white is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the stage moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to white on the symbol display device 41. In the present embodiment, when points are not accumulated, the stage St is set to white even if the game time to be processed is a carry-over game time or a continuous production final game time. After executing step S12702, the present stage display control process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12701 that the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is not 0 (S12701: NO), the process advances to step S12703.

  In step S12703, it is determined whether or not the carry-around game time flag of the game time to be processed is ON. If it is determined in step S12703 that the carry-around game time flag of the game time to be processed is ON (S12703: YES), the process proceeds to step S12704.

  In step S12704, a stage moving image display start command in which the color of the stage St is set to yellow is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. When receiving the stage moving image display start command, the display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the stage moving image in which the color of the stage St is set to yellow on the symbol display device 41. As described above, in the present embodiment, the color of the stage St is set to yellow when points are accumulated in the carry forward game times. After executing step S12704, the present stage display control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S12703 that the carry-around game time flag of the game time to be processed is not ON (S12703: NO), the process proceeds to step S12705.

  In step S12705, a stage moving image display start command in which the color of the stage St is set to orange is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. When receiving the moving image display start command for stage, the display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the moving image for stage in which the color of the stage St is set to orange on the symbol display device 41. As described above, in the present embodiment, the color of the stage St is set to orange when the points are accumulated in the final stage of the continuous production game. After executing step S12705, the present stage display control process ends.

<Various processes executed in display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is mainly a main processing that is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off after the power is turned on, and is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control apparatus 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interruption signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command interrupt process is executed with priority. Therefore, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on, and is continuously executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

  In step S12801, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S12802.

  In step S12802, interrupt permission setting is performed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, an infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a command interruption process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S12901, a command storage process is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instruction.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S13001, a command corresponding process is executed. In the command corresponding process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 62), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and display of an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the effect operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is during the period of accepting the press of the effect operation button 24. The control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the reception period of the press of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command corresponding process (S13001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and a process corresponding to all analyzed commands is executed. The reason will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the mode of the announcement effect or the effect of the liquid crystal design and the like set by the sound emission control device 90 is quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41.

  In step S13002, a display setting process is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S13001) or the like. . After that, it advances to step S13003.

  In step S13003, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (S13002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S13004.

  In step S13004, a drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S13003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the immediately preceding V interrupt process on the symbol display device 41 together with a drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S13005 to execute other processing, and then the V interrupt processing ends.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)”, it is set by the staging scenario so that the button press effect is executed. ing. Therefore, by executing the button press effect, the player who recognizes that the result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)” when the button press effect is executed is high. On the other hand, an expectation can be given.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the execution of the button press effect is set in the effect scenario, the point giving effect is executed by the time the button press effect is executed, thereby accumulating 10 points. Points are awarded in such a manner as described above. Therefore, by executing the point giving effect, the player who recognizes that the button press effect is to be executed when the accumulated points become 10 points or more, has an expectation every time the point giving effect is executed. Can be granted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the accumulation points accumulated in the game times may be reset when the game times end, or may be carried over to the next game times without resetting. Since the accumulated points may be reset at the end of the game round, the player is requested to accumulate at least 10 points by the end of the game round, and the player's expectation of the point giving effect The feeling can be further increased. Furthermore, the game round is started, and for the player who has recognized that the points have been accumulated by executing the point giving effect, the player is made aware of the end time of the game round in which the accumulated points may be reset, Attention can be paid to the manner in which the accumulated points are accumulated, that is, the manner of executing the point giving effect.

  In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over to the next game time, even if the accumulated points do not accumulate at least 10 points in the currently executed game time, if the accumulated points are carried over to the next game time, the game time will be transferred to the next game time. Since the points accumulated in are effective, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation that the accumulated points do not accumulate more than 10 points.

  In the present embodiment, the color of the stage St indicates to the player whether or not the accumulated points are carried over. Therefore, even in a game in which the accumulated points do not accumulate more than 10 points, the accumulated points will be 10 in the next game. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of accumulating points or more, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in a player's expectation in a game in which accumulated points do not accumulate more than 10 points.

  In the present embodiment, a button press effect is employed as a process executed when ten or more accumulation points are accumulated. By accumulating 10 or more accumulated points and giving the player a sense of accomplishment, the player can actively participate in the game by further executing the button press effect, thereby making the player pay more attention to the game, and the player's expectation Can be further enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the accumulation point is suggested to the player as a pearl image on the stage St, so that the player can always be made aware of the accumulation point.

  In the present embodiment, since the timer effect is executed, during the period from the time when the timer effect is executed to the time when the button press effect is executed, the button executed continuously after the elapse of the time suggested in the timer effect. An expectation can be given to the press effect. In addition, since the remaining time until the button press effect is counted down by the timer effect, the suggested remaining time decreases, and as the timing at which the button press effect is executed approaches, the expectation of the player may increase. it can.

  Also, even if 10 accumulation points are accumulated, the production in the standby state is started, and the timer production may not be executed immediately after the accumulation of 10 accumulation points. By recognizing whether or not the execution is performed, it is possible to give the player a pleasure of estimating the timing at which the button press effect is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timer effect is executed in the game time in which the button press effect is executed, so that when the timer effect is executed in the game time, the player can be noticed in the game time, and A feeling can be given.

  In the present embodiment, when 10 accumulation points are accumulated and the timer effect is executed in the next and subsequent game rounds, the standby effect is executed prior to the execution of the timer effect. Therefore, even during the period from the time when 10 accumulated points are accumulated to the time when the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is executed by the execution of the waiting effect, and the timer effect is executed in the later game times. Player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, the presence or absence of the execution of the point giving effect in the predetermined game times, the number of points to be given in the point giving effect, the presence or absence of the carry-over of the accumulated points, the presence or absence of the execution of the waiting effect, the presence or absence of the execution of the timer effect, Each processing content in the game time, such as in which game time the button press effect is executed, is determined based on the special information of the game time executed after the game time (hereinafter, also referred to as a later game time). . More specifically, in a case where the result of the jackpot lottery of the subsequent game time is “big hit” or “missing (reach occurrence)”, a continuous effect in which the subsequent game time is set as a continuous effect final game time is executed. In some cases, the game times are set to carry-over game times. That is, the processing content of the game time is determined based on the special information of the later game time. By doing so, whether or not a point giving effect is executed, the number of points to be given in the point giving effect, whether or not the accumulated points are carried over, whether or not a waiting effect is executed, whether or not a timer effect is executed, a button press effect, etc. Can be related to a plurality of game times. By associating the processing content of each game time with the processing content of another game time, for example, when a predetermined process is executed in a game time being executed, the predetermined process and the game time Not only does the player make a guess about the relevance with the progress, but also makes the player guess the relevance between the predetermined process and the progress of the subsequent game round. In other words, no matter how the game progresses in the game round being executed, various possibilities can be left in the progress of the later game round, and the player's expectation can be maintained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of times the button press effect is executed in the continuous effect increases, the effect executed after each button press effect develops (the degree of expectation of winning in the jackpot lottery indicated by the effect). By preparing an effect scenario that is set so as to increase the effect, the player's expectation of the game can be increased each time the player presses the effect operation button 24 in the button press effect. Therefore, even when the continuous production execution period is long, by suppressing the player's concentration by increasing the number of button press productions in accordance with the length of the continuous production execution period, it is possible to further increase the sense of expectation. Can be increased.

A7. Modification of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configuration and processing as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

A7-1. Modification 1
In the first embodiment, a configuration in which a point is always given when a specific effect is performed may be adopted. As an example of realizing the configuration, the configuration can be realized by setting in advance the effect scenario and the point giving scenario.

  Specifically, after a predetermined effect (for example, a normal reach effect), an effect scenario in which a point imparting effect in which the assigned points are not 0 is executed and a case in which a point imparting effect in which the assigned points are 0 are executed are described. And set to point grant scenario. In this case, the case where the point giving effect in which the given points are not 0 is executed and the case where the point giving effect in which the given points are 0 are executed may be set as one effect scenario and the point giving scenario. It may be set to another effect scenario and a point giving scenario. Further, in place of the configuration in which the point-giving effect in which the given points are 0 after the predetermined effect is performed, a configuration in which the point-giving effect is not performed after the predetermined effect may be adopted, or both of them may be adopted. Is also good.

  On the other hand, after the specific effect (for example, super reach effect), the effect scenario and the point giving scenario are set so that the point giving effect in which the given points are not 0 is always executed. As a specific effect, a specific reach effect or a specific cut-in effect may be adopted, or a dedicated effect to suggest that a given point is not 0 may be executed. Good.

  By doing in this way, when a specific effect is executed in the game time, points are always given in the game time, so that the player who wants to give the point performs the specific effect. Can be given, and attention can be paid to the game. Further, when a specific effect is executed, a sense of excitement can be given to a player who wants to give points, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  For example, when the accumulated points are 9 points, and once more points are given, the accumulated points become 10 points or more, and the button press effect is executed, the player is required to execute a specific effect. Can be given a strong sense of expectation. Further, in such a situation, when a specific effect is executed and points are given, a strong sense of accomplishment can be given to the player.

A7-2. Modified example 2:
In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which, when the accumulated points in the game round being executed are carried over to the next game round, points are always given in the game round subsequent to the game round. As an example of realizing the configuration, the configuration can be realized by setting in advance the effect scenario and the point giving scenario.

  Specifically, a point-giving effect in which the number of points to be awarded is not always 0 is set in the effect scenario and the point-giving scenario set in the continuous effect final game time. In addition, in the point giving scenario, the total number of points to be provided is always set to a value other than 0 for the carry-on game times after the first carry-on game time among the carry-on game times in the continuous effect.

  By doing so, it is possible to give a player who wants to give points a sense of expectation that the accumulated points will be carried over after the end of the game round. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even at the end of the game round. In addition, when the accumulated points are carried forward after the end of the game round, it is expected that the player who wants to give points is given points in the game round executed after the game round. It is possible to provide a feeling of excitement as well as a feeling of excitement, and to improve the interest of the game.

  For example, if the player is aware that points will be awarded in the next and subsequent game rounds whenever the accumulated points are carried over, and the game round is likely to end even though the accumulated points are 9 points In some cases, if the accumulated points are carried forward, points will always be given and the button press effect will be executed in the subsequent game round, so giving the player a strong expectation that the accumulated points will be carried forward It is possible to suppress a decrease in the sense of expectation that the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in the game round being executed. Further, in such a situation, when the accumulated points are carried forward, a strong sense of accomplishment can be given to the player.

  In addition, when the accumulated points in the running game time are carried over to the next game time, the points are not necessarily provided in the game time after the running game time, but in the running game time. When a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a blue crayfish character appears) is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which points are always given in a game time after the game time. By doing in this way, it is possible to give a player who has performed a predetermined effect in the game round being executed a sense of expectation for a later game round.

A7-3. Modification 3:
In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which, in a point giving effect performed in a series of game times in which a continuous effect is executed, a limit is set on the number of times the point giving effect in which the given points are 0 is executed. Alternatively, in a point giving effect performed only once in the game, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of point giving effects in which the given points are 0 is limited. As an example of realizing the configuration, the configuration can be realized by setting in advance the effect scenario and the point giving scenario.

  This will be specifically described. As described above, in the point provision scenario, the number of points to be provided is set for each point provision effect executed in the final game round of the continuous production. Therefore, there is a limit on the number of points for which “0” is set as the value of the number of points to be set for each point giving effect. For example, the value “0” is limited to three or less as the number of points to be given.

  In addition, in the effect pattern used for the game time in which the point giving effect is executed only in the carryover game time and the game time, the number of points to be set to “0” is set as the value of the number of points to be set in each point giving effect. Set restrictions.

  In this way, a strong expectation is given to the player who has recognized that the number of executions of the point giving effect in which the given points are 0 has reached the upper limit, that the point giving effect is executed. Can be. This is because, when the number of executions of the point giving effect in which the given points are 0 reaches the upper limit, points are always given when the point giving effect is executed thereafter. Therefore, even when the point giving effect in which the given points are 0 is executed, the player is provided with a sense of expectation that the number of executions of the point giving effect in which the given points are 0 reaches the upper limit. be able to.

  In other words, in the case where the point giving effect is executed, if the given point is not 0, the point is given, so that the player can be given a sense of excitement, and if the given point is 0, Even with this, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation (a feeling of expectation that the number of executions of the point giving effect in which the given points are 0 reaches the upper limit). As a result, the player's sense of expectation is increased regardless of whether a point giving effect in which the given points are not 0 is executed or a point giving effect in which the given points are 0 is executed. Can be.

A7-4. Modification Example 4:
An effect (hereinafter also referred to as an unfilled effect) that is executed when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in a predetermined game time may be configured to be executable in the game time. Further, the unfilled effect may be executed at a predetermined rate when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points.

  Furthermore, when an unfilled effect is executed, the greater the number of accumulation points immediately before the execution of the unfilled effect, the greater the expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game time is “big hit”. May be increased.

  Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is “big hit”, the setting is made such that the effect scenario in which the unfilled effect is executed is easily selected. For example, when selecting an effect scenario by lottery using a random number for lottery and table data for lottery, if the result of the jackpot is "big hit", the lottery table is set so that an unfilled effect is executed. Set the data. Then, the lottery table data is set so that the probability that the effect scenario is selected is low (for example, less than 30%) except when the result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit”. Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit”, the point giving scenario applied to the effect scenario has a relatively large number of accumulated points immediately before the unfilled effect is executed (for example, 8 points or 9 points). ) Is applied. Conversely, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “out (reach occurrence)”, the point giving scenario applied to the effect scenario has relatively few accumulated points immediately before the unfilled effect is executed (for example, A point giving scenario set to be 4 points or 5 points) is applied.

  By doing in this way, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in the predetermined game times and the button press effect is not executed, if the unfilled effect is executed, the more accumulated points, the more the accumulated points. In the predetermined game round, the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery is “big hit” is high, and a sense of expectation can be given to the player. That is, in a case where the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in the predetermined game round and the button press effect is not executed, and when the accumulated points are relatively large, the player is expected to execute the unfilled effect. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the unfilled effect may adopt a configuration in which the effect content differs depending on the amount of the accumulation points before the unfilled effect is executed.

  By doing so, the player can pay attention to the content of the unfilled effect regardless of the amount of the accumulated points, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, an effect that is executed after the unfilled effect is executed (hereinafter, also referred to as an unfilled advanced effect) may be configured to be executable in the game time. Also, when the accumulation point is less than 10 points and the unfilled advanced effect is executed after the unfilled effect is executed, the accumulation point is less than 10 points, compared to the case where the accumulated point is 10 points or more and the button press effect is executed. A configuration in which the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game times is “big hit” may be adopted. For example, when selecting a production scenario by lottery using random numbers and lottery table data, when the result of the jackpot lottery is `` big hit '', the unfilled production and the unfilled advanced production are executed. Set the lottery table data. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery is other than “big hit”, the lottery table data is set so that the probability of selecting the effect scenario is low (for example, less than 5%). Furthermore, when the result of the jackpot lottery is other than “big hit”, the lottery table data is set so that the probability of the effect scenario being selected is lower than the probability of selecting the effect scenario including the button press effect. Thus, the configuration can be realized.

  By doing so, the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game time is “big hit” in the case where the unfilled advanced effect is executed, compared with the case where the button press effect is executed. Is high. Therefore, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in the game times and the button press effect is not executed, if the unfilled effect is executed, then the unfilled advanced effect is executed for the player. It can give a strong sense of expectation about what will be done. Furthermore, when the unfilled development effect is executed, the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game times is "big hit" is higher than when the button press effect is executed, so that the unfilled development effect is performed. Can be given a stronger sense of expectation to a player who has recognized that the game has been executed. In summary, when the accumulated points have reached 10 points or more, the button press effect is executed, so that a sense of expectation can be given to the player, and even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points. Gives the player a sense of expectation that the unfilled effect will be performed, and furthermore, if the unfilled effect is executed, gives the player a strong sense of expectation that the unfilled advanced effect will be executed can do. Therefore, regardless of the situation of the game, a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

A7-5. Modification 5:
In the first embodiment, the first execution game time display shown in the first execution game time display area J1, the first reservation game time display shown in the first reservation display area Ds1, and the second execution game time display area J2 are shown. The second execution game time display and the second reservation game time display shown in the second reservation display area Ds2 are configured to change the display mode of each display (hereinafter, also collectively referred to as game time display). You may. Further, a configuration may be employed in which a timing correlation is provided between the timing of giving the points (that is, the timing of executing the point giving effect) and the timing of changing the display mode of the game times display.

  In this case, the display mode of the game times display may indicate a possibility (expectation) that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery relating to the game times corresponding to each game times display.

  In this way, by performing the change of the display mode of the game times display and the giving of the points with the timing correlated, the expectation of the player can be synergistically increased.

  For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the point giving effect is executed within a predetermined time (for example, within one second) after the display mode of the game time display is changed during execution of the game time. In this case, by recognizing that the display mode of the game times display has changed and increasing the sense of expectation, it is possible to further recognize that the point giving effect has been executed within the predetermined time, thereby further strengthening the game. Expectation and elation can be imparted. Note that if the game time for which the display mode of the game time display is to be changed is a game time being executed, a stronger sense of expectation and a sense of excitement can be given to the player.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the timing of changing the display mode of the game time display and the timing of executing the point giving effect are simultaneously performed during the execution of the game time. In this case, by allowing the player to simultaneously recognize the change in the display mode of the game times display and the execution of the point giving effect, the sense of expectation of the player can be synergistically increased. Note that if the game time for which the display mode of the game time display is to be changed is a game time being executed, a stronger sense of expectation and a sense of excitement can be given to the player.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the game time display is changed within a predetermined time (for example, within one second) after the point giving effect is executed during the execution of the game time. In this case, by recognizing that the player has increased the sense of expectation by recognizing that the point giving effect has been executed, the player is further made aware that the display mode of the game times display has changed within the predetermined time, thereby further strengthening the game. A feeling of expectation and a feeling of elation can be imparted. Note that if the game time for which the display mode of the game time display is to be changed is a game time being executed, a stronger sense of expectation and a sense of excitement can be given to the player.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode after the change of the game times display and the number of points given by the point giving effect have a correlation. By doing so, when the display mode after the change of the game times display is in a mode that meets the player's expectation, that is, a display indicating that the display mode after the change of the game times display has a high degree of expectation In the case of the mode, and when the number of points given by the point giving effect is relatively large, a stronger sense of expectation and superiority can be given to the player.

  Furthermore, the higher the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode after the change in the game play display is, the larger the number of points given by the point giving effect executed with a temporal correlation with the change in the display form of the game play display. A configuration may be adopted. That is, when the display mode after the change of the game times display is the first display mode, the number of points given by the point giving effect executed with a temporal correlation with the change of the display mode is set to the first display mode. When the display mode after the change of the game times display is the second display mode that indicates a higher expectation than the first display mode, the change in the display mode and the time When the number of points awarded in the point awarding effect executed with a correlation is the second point number, the average value of the second point number is larger than the average value of the first point number. May be.

  By doing in this way, when the expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game times is “big hit” is high, the probability of changing the display mode of the game time display to the second display mode is high, and In the case where the game time display is changed to the second display mode, the point giving executed with a temporal correlation with the change of the game time display mode when the game mode display is changed to the first display mode. Since there are many cases where the number of points given by the effect is large, the change of the display mode of the game round display and the execution of the point giving effect are executed with a correlation in timing, so that the result of the jackpot lottery is obtained. The player's sense of expectation can be synergistically increased.

  Note that any of the above configurations can be realized by setting the display mode of the game times display to the effect scenario. For example, by using an effect scenario that is set so that the display mode of the game time display changes from white to red at the same time as execution of the point giving effect, during execution of the game time, which is one of the above-described configurations, It is possible to realize a configuration in which the timing of changing the display mode of the game times display and the timing of executing the point giving effect are simultaneously performed.

  Further, for an effect scenario set to change the game time display to a display mode suggesting a high degree of expectation, a point executed with a temporal correlation with the change in the game mode display mode. By applying the point giving scenario in which the value of the number of points given by the giving effect is set to a large value, the degree of expectation indicated by the display mode after the change in the game times display, which is one of the configurations described above, is As the value is higher, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the number of points given by the point giving effect executed with a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game times display is larger. In addition, a shape, a pattern, a color, a character, and the like can be adopted as a display mode of the game times display.

  Further, the effect having a temporal correlation with the timing of changing the display mode of the game time display is not limited to the configuration in which the point-giving effect is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the timing at which a certain effect (for example, a reach effect) is executed has a temporal correlation. Even in this way, the player's expectation of the jackpot lottery result can be increased synergistically.

A7-6. Modification 6:
In the first embodiment, in the point providing scenario (see FIG. 46), the number of points to be provided is set in advance for each point providing effect executed in the final stage of the continuous production. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be given in each point giving effect is set in real time during execution. For example, in the point-giving scenario, the total number of executions of the point-giving effect executed in the final stage of the continuous production and the total number of points to be awarded in the final stage of the consecutive production are set as information. A lottery may be performed based on the information after the start of the round, and the number of points to be provided in each point provision effect may be determined. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to guess the pattern in which the points are given, and the player can be focused on the game.

A7-7. Modification 7:
In the first embodiment, a configuration for performing an effect of reducing the number of accumulated points may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the game. In the present embodiment, the point is increased and the button press effect is executed when the point reaches 10 points. However, a predetermined number of points are accumulated from the start of the game round, and the points are accumulated. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect to be subtracted is executed, and when the number of accumulated points reaches a predetermined number of points or less, the button press effect is executed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which 10 points are accumulated at the start of the game round, points are reduced as needed by the effect of subtracting points, and a button press effect is executed when the point reaches 0 points.

A7-8. Modification 8:
In the above-described embodiment, the timing at which the point-giving effect is executed has adopted the configuration set in the effect scenario in advance, but is not limited to such a configuration, and another configuration may be adopted. The details will be described below.

  In the first embodiment, when setting the effect of the continuous game final game time, a configuration using an effect scenario in which the timing for executing the point giving effect is set in advance is adopted. A configuration that uses an effect scenario in which one or more timings at which a point giving effect can be executed, that is, candidate timings for executing the point giving effect (hereinafter, also referred to as candidate timings) is adopted. Also, in the first embodiment, when setting the effect of the game time to execute the point giving effect using only one game time, and when setting the effect of the carryover game time, the point giving effect Timing and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect adopted a configuration using a preset effect pattern, but in this modified example, as in the case of setting an effect of a continuous effect final game time, A configuration using an effect scenario in which one or more candidate timings are set is adopted.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an effect scenario and a point-giving scenario of a continuous effect final game round in Modification Example 8. FIG. 64 shows, as an example, an effect scenario and a point-giving scenario of a carryover game time and a continuous effect final game time related to a continuous effect in which the number of executed games (Np) = 2. In the present modified example, similarly to the first embodiment, the production scenario of the continuous production final game time is set based on the temporary fluctuation time of the game time set as the continuous production final game time. As described above, in the effect scenario in this modification, the timing for executing the button press effect is set, but the timing for executing the point giving effect is not set, and the timing for executing the point giving effect is set. A plurality of candidate timings are set. In the effect scenario of FIG. 64, candidate timings are indicated by broken arrows. The sound-light-side MPU 92 selects one or a plurality of timings (hereinafter, referred to as “pointing effects”) for actually executing a point-giving effect at the time of executing the game, from a plurality of candidate timings set in the effect scenario, based on a point-giving scenario described later. Execution timing).

  In the first embodiment, as shown in the jackpot / reach point giving scenario table of FIG. 45, two points are given for each execution game count (Np) for the point giving scenario corresponding to each effect scenario. A scenario is set, and after determining the number of executions of the continuous effect, one is determined by lottery from two point giving scenarios set corresponding to the number of executions. On the other hand, in the present modification, one point giving scenario is set for each execution game number (Np) with respect to the point giving scenario corresponding to each effect scenario. FIG. 64 shows a point giving scenario in which the number of executed games in the continuous effect is two (that is, the number of executed games Np = 2). As shown in the figure, in the point giving scenario in the present modification, the total value of the number of points to be given for each period up to each button press effect set in the effect scenario (hereinafter, referred to as “the last game time”). The total number of points to be awarded in the game times is set for the carry-over game times as in the above-described embodiment.

  The sound-light-side MPU 92 determines the execution timing of the point giving effect based on the period total giving point and the plurality of candidate timings up to the period of each button press effect set in the effect scenario, for the final game time of the continuous effect. And the number of points to be given in each point giving effect. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 64, 13 points are set in the point giving scenario as the total point giving points in the period from the start of the continuous game final game round to the button press effect 1 (Bt1 in the figure). The timing is set in ten production scenarios. Therefore, for example, one or a plurality of execution timings are determined from ten candidate timings, and thereafter, the number of points to be provided in the point provision effect to be performed at each determined execution timing is determined. A configuration is adopted in which the number of points given in the effect is determined by lottery using random numbers.

  In addition, the execution timing of each point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect can be determined by various methods. For example, an arbitrary value up to 13 points, which is the total number of points granted during the period from the start of the last consecutive game production to the button press production 1, is determined by lottery, and the determined value is set to the first point production production. In the number of points to be given. Next, an arbitrary value up to a value obtained by subtracting the number of points to be awarded in the first point awarding effect from 13 points of the period total awarding point is determined by lottery, and the determined value is determined in the second point awarding effect. To determine the number of points to be awarded. In this way, the number of points to be provided in the point provision effect is determined in order by lottery, and the determined number of points is subtracted from the 13 points of the period total provided points. Perform lottery until Since the number of candidate timings from the start of the continuous production final game round to the button press production 1 is 10 places, if the remaining awarded points are not 0 at the end of the ninth lottery, the last The number of points given in the tenth point giving effect is automatically determined as the number of remaining points. In this way, after determining the number of executions of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point providing effect, the execution timing of the number corresponding to the number of times of the point giving effect is randomly selected from the candidate timings of the effect scenario. Determined by

  As in the present modification, the timing for executing the point-giving effect and the number of points to be awarded in each point-giving effect are determined by lottery. Since the number of points to be made is not patterned, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored, to make various guesses, and to give a sense of expectation. For this reason, in the present modification, only one point-giving scenario is set for each execution game count (Np) for the point-giving scenario corresponding to each rendering scenario. That is, in this modification, a plurality of point giving patterns are set for the point giving scenario corresponding to each effect scenario, even if only one point giving scenario is set for each execution game number (Np). It is possible.

  Also, in the above description, the method of determining the timing of executing the point giving effect in the final stage of the continuous effect game and the method of determining the number of points to be given in each point providing effect has been described. It can be adopted at times. In the first embodiment, the execution timing of the point-giving effect in the case of executing the point-giving effect in the carryover game time and in the case of executing the point-giving effect in one game time is set in advance in the effect pattern. However, as in the present modification, the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points given in each point giving effect may be determined by lottery. In this case, first, an effect scenario is determined based on the fluctuation time of the carry-over game times. As shown in FIG. 64, a plurality of candidate timings are set in the effect scenario prepared for the carry-over game time, similarly to the effect scenario in the last continuous effect game time. Then, based on the candidate timing set in the effect pattern of the game time and the total awarded points set in the game time, the point giving effect is executed by lottery in the same manner as in the above-described continuous effect final game time. And the number of points to be given in each point giving effect. In the above-described first embodiment, the execution timing of the point giving effect and the effect pattern in which the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are set in advance are used. And the number of points to be awarded in each point awarding effect is determined by lottery, so that a plurality of candidates can be obtained without using the effect pattern as in the first embodiment, as in the continuous effect final game time of the present modification. An effect scenario in which timing is set can be used. In this way, even in the production scenario in which the same production is performed, the execution timing of the point provision production and the number of points to be provided are not patterned, so that the player is prevented from being bored, It is possible to make the user make various guesses, and to give a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the effect pattern of the carryover game time corresponds to the total awarded points set in the point provision scenario determined based on the continuous effect final game time and the fluctuation time in the carryover game time. The effect pattern was determined with reference to the point giving effect pattern table. On the other hand, in the present modified example, regardless of the total awarded points, the effect pattern is determined based on the fluctuation time in the carry-forward game times, and based on the candidate timing set for the determined effect pattern and the total awarded point. Then, the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are determined. Therefore, there is no need to provide a point-giving effect pattern table corresponding to the fluctuation time of the carry-forward game times and the total awarded points, and a point-giving effect pattern table corresponding to only the fluctuation time can be provided. That is, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of effect patterns suitable only for the fluctuation time without considering the total assigned points. Then, for each of the effect patterns, the timing of giving points is determined by lottery, so that the effect patterns and the timing of giving points are not patterned, and the player can always be given a sense of expectation. .

A7-9. Modification 9:
In the above modified example 8, in the point providing scenario, the total provided points to be provided in the game time for the period corresponding to the carry-over game time are recorded, and for the continuous game final game time, each button press effect is performed. Although the total point awarded during the period up to the execution is recorded, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the following configuration can be adopted.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram illustrating Modification Example 9. In this modification, in the point awarding scenario, the total awarded points for the period corresponding to the carryover game time are not set, and the points are given from the start of the carryover game time to the most recently executed button press effect. The number of points to be provided, or the number of points to be provided from the button press effect to the next button press effect to be executed, that is, the period total provided points is set. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 65, the period total awarding point is set from the start of the carryover game time to the execution of the button press effect (Bt1) of the continuous effect final game time.

  The configuration of the effect scenario is the same as that of the above-described modification 8. That is, one or a plurality of candidate timings are set in the effect scenario of the carry-over game time and the effect scenario of the continuous effect final game time. Then, the timing of executing the point giving effect and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are the number of points to be given until each button press effect set in the point giving scenario and each button set in the effect scenario. The lottery is determined based on the candidate timing until the press effect, as in the above-described modification 8. By doing so, the timing of executing the point giving effect across the carry-over game time and the continuous game final game time and the number of points to be given in each point giving effect are determined by lottery. Thus, it is possible to further suppress the patterning of the execution timing of the point giving effect and the number of points to be given.

A7-10. Modification 10:
The point giving effect is not limited to the mode of the effect (the effect in which the turtle character gives points) shown in the first embodiment, and various modes can be adopted.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point giving effect in the tenth modification. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), for example, an image showing a roulette for determining points to be given may be displayed on the display surface 41a. A number (for example, 0 to 19) corresponding to the number of points that may be given is displayed on the roulette wheel. After rotating the roulette, the rotation of the roulette is stopped as shown in FIG. 66 (b), and a point number corresponding to the number indicated by the stopped arrow is given on the roulette as shown in FIG. 66 (c). I do. By making the point giving effect in this manner, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the given points while the roulette is rotating. Further, since “0 (zero)” is included in the roulette as the number of points to be given, a sense of urgency can be given to the player in addition to expectation.

  Furthermore, you may employ | adopt the structure which a point provision effect straddles a plurality of game times. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation of the roulette is not stopped in the game time where the rotation of the roulette is started, and the rotation of the roulette is stopped in the game time after the game time. As described above, by executing the point giving effect that straddles a plurality of game times (hereinafter, also referred to as a carry-over point giving effect), the expectation and the urgency of the points given to the player for a long time over the game times are increased. Can be granted.

  For example, in a case where a game time is suspended, if it is determined that points are to be given in the game time, a carry-over point providing effect is performed in a game time (preceding game time) executed before the game time. The process of setting the effect scenario of the preceding game round is executed so that the roulette moving image shown is displayed on the display surface 41a. At the point in time when it is determined that points are to be awarded in the reserved game time (reserved game time), if the preceding game time has not been executed yet, the carry-over point giving effect is executed in the preceding game time. Set the production scenario. In addition, at the time when it is determined that points are to be awarded in the reserved game times (reserved game times), if a preceding game time that has been executed earlier than the reserved game time has already been executed, the time Then, in real time, the display of the roulette moving image indicating the carry-over point giving effect in the preceding game round being executed is started. By displaying the moving image layer of the roulette indicating the carry-over point giving effect as a layer higher than the moving image layer of the effect in the preceding game time, the point giving effect can be started from the preceding game time. In this case, for example, by displaying a moving image of roulette indicating a carry-over point giving effect at a position close to the periphery of the display surface 41a, it is possible to suppress the display of the effect moving image in the preceding game round from becoming difficult for the player to visually recognize. can do.

  In addition, in the carry-over point giving effect of the present modification, the effect of rotating the roulette and thereafter stopping the rotation of the roulette, that is, the effect that suggests that points are given, is defined as the first effect, and roulette. The point at which the rotation is stopped is notified, and the image of the pearl indicating the storage point of the stage St is changed, and the storage point after the point is provided is displayed, that is, the point is provided. If the effect that indicates that the second effect, the first effect is started in the preceding game time, the second effect is executed in the game time executed after the preceding game time, Various aspects can be adopted.

  The following effects can be created by adopting a configuration in which the first effect is started in the preceding game time and the second effect is executed in the game time executed after the preceding game time. The first effect can give the player an expectation that points may be given. Since the second effect is an effect indicating that points are given, it is necessary for the player who has recognized the second effect to recognize that points have been given, and to give a sense of superiority or satisfaction. Can be. Further, by combining the configuration of the first embodiment and the configuration of the present modified example, the following effects can be created. Assuming that the preceding game time is the first game time and the game time executed after the preceding game time is the second game time, the first effect corresponding to the point given in the second game time is the first effect. There are cases where the game starts in the game round and cases where the game starts in the second game round. In other words, in the predetermined game time, when the first effect is executed, the points are awarded in the predetermined game time and in the game times executed after the predetermined game time. In some cases, a player who has recognized that the first effect has been executed can be guessed as to which case, and a sense of expectation can be given.

  Note that, as a configuration in which the first effect is started in the preceding game time and the second effect is executed in the game time executed after the preceding game time, the first game is performed from the start to the end of the first effect. May be adopted in the first game, and the effect of rotating the roulette in the first game may be performed in the first game. A configuration may be adopted in which an effect is started in the game time, in which the rotating roulette in the first effect is stopped, and a process from the start to the end of the second effect is executed in the second game time. In addition, any of the configurations may be employed at the same time. When any of the configurations is adopted, and a configuration in which the point giving effect does not straddle the game time is also combined, a roulette is first given to the player who recognizes that the first effect has been started in the predetermined game time. And a feeling of expectation for estimating whether or not the rotation of the game stops in the game round. If the roulette stops in the game time, whether the point corresponding to the number of points given by stopping the roulette will be awarded in the game time or in a game time after the game time It gives a pleasure or a feeling of expectation to guess whether it will be given. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a gradual enjoyment and a sense of expectation.

  Further, as described in the first embodiment, the accumulation point may be reset when the game round ends, or may not be reset. Therefore, even when the game round ends, the accumulation point is stored in the player. You can draw attention to points. Further, according to this modification, when the first effect is executed, when points are given in the predetermined game time, when points are given in a game time executed after the predetermined game time, This allows the player to pay attention to the transition of the game times. Therefore, various expectations can be given to the player at the time of the transition of the game times.

  The first effect and the second effect in the present modification are not limited to the configuration described in the present modification, and various effects can be adopted. For example, among the point-giving effects in the first embodiment, an effect until a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a and a pearl on which the number of points to be given is displayed is adopted as the first effect. Then, the turtle character drops the pearl on which the number of points to be given is displayed, and the pearl reaches the stage St, changes to an image of the pearl corresponding to the accumulated points, and performs an effect until the point giving effect ends. You may employ | adopt as a 2nd production.

A7-11. Modification 11:
In the first embodiment, a configuration in which the mode of the point giving effect differs depending on the size of the number of points given in the point giving effect may be adopted. For example, the color of the turtle's shell, which is the character displayed in the point giving effect, is displayed in white when the points given are 0 to 2 points, and yellow when the points given are 3 to 6 points. Is displayed in blue when points to be awarded are 7 to 9 points, is displayed in green when points to be awarded are 10 to 15 points, and points to be awarded are 16 to 20 points. In such a case, a configuration of displaying in red may be adopted. Such a configuration can be realized by, for example, the following processing. In step S12303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), after reading the number of provided points, the color of the turtle shell to be displayed in the point providing effect is determined according to the size of the read provided points. Then, in step S12304, the moving image display start command for point addition effect includes information on the color of the turtle shell to be displayed in the point addition effect, and transmits the command to the display MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-adding effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 reads the turtle shell information included in the point-adding effect moving image display start command, and renders the shell color according to the information. A process of displaying an animation for the point giving effect on which the turtle is displayed on the symbol display device 41 is executed. By doing so, the present configuration can be realized. With such a configuration, in addition to displaying the number of points displayed in the point giving effect, a sense of expectation and superiority can be given to the player by the color of the turtle shell.

  In addition, for example, in the above-described first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of points given by the point giving effect is displayed on the pearl dropped by the turtle character in the point giving effect. A configuration may be employed in which the number is not displayed, and the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle is different depending on the size of the number of points given in the point giving effect. Such a configuration can also be realized by a process similar to the above-described process of displaying the color of the turtle shell in different colors according to the size of the number of points given in the point giving effect. That is, in step S12303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), after reading the number of provided points, the pearl color to be displayed in the point providing effect is determined according to the size of the read provided points. Then, in step S12304, the moving image display start command for point addition effect includes information of the pearl color to be displayed in the point addition effect, and the command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-adding effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 reads the pearl color information included in the point-adding effect moving image display start command, and displays the pearl color according to the information. A process for displaying an effect animation for the point giving effect on the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the case of the present modification, since the number of points is not displayed on the pearl dropped by the turtle character in the point-giving effect, the display-side MPU 102 displays the point-giving effect that does not display the number of points on the pearl dropped by the turtle character. A process for displaying a moving image on the symbol display device 41 is executed. By doing so, even if the execution of the point giving effect is started, the player cannot clearly grasp the points to be given, and thus gives the player a sense of expectation regarding the number of points given to the player. be able to. Furthermore, since the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle differs depending on the size of the number of points to be provided, it is necessary to provide the player with a pleasure of estimating the number of points to be provided based on the color of the pearl. Can be.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which characters displayed in the point giving effect are different depending on the size of the number of points given in the point giving effect. For example, the character to be displayed in the point giving effect is set to a turtle character when points to be given are 0 to 2 points, and is set to an octopus character when the points to be given is 3 to 6 points. If the number of points to be given is 7 to 9 points, it is set to a crab character. If the number of points to be given is 10 to 15 points, it is set to a shark character, and the number of points to be given is 16 to 20 points. In this case, a configuration in which the character is set to a whale character may be adopted. This configuration is also realized by the same processing as the above-described configuration, that is, the configuration in which the color of the turtle shell and the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle are changed according to the number of points given in the point giving effect. be able to.

  In addition, when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) as a result of the point giving effect being executed and the points being given, the point giving effect to be executed is executed in other cases. Alternatively, a configuration different from the configuration may be adopted. For example, when a point giving effect in which 9 points are given is executed in a state where the number of accumulated points is 3 points, the number of accumulated points exceeds 10 points. A configuration in which a whale character is set instead of the turtle character displayed in the point giving effect may be adopted. Further, when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) due to execution of the point giving effect and the points are given, and the number of points given by the point giving effect is equal to or more than a predetermined size. In such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which it is set in a different mode from the point giving effect executed in other cases. For example, when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) due to execution of the point giving effect and the points are given, and when the number of points given by the point giving effect is 8 points or more. The character to be displayed in the point giving effect is set to a crab character instead of a turtle character, and a configuration is adopted in which the crab character is set to drop a larger pearl than usual. Is also good.

  Such a configuration can be realized by, for example, the following processing. In the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), it is determined whether or not the point-giving effect to be executed is the last point-giving effect to be executed before the button-pressing effect, based on the effect scenario and the point-giving scenario. This can be realized by determining whether the points given in the effect are equal to or larger than a predetermined size (for example, 8 points). That is, in the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario, the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect to be executed before the button pressing effect. When it is determined that the points to be given are equal to or larger than a predetermined size (for example, 8 points), a crab character is set to drop a pearl larger than a normal case. The command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the point-adding effect moving image display start command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the point-adding effect moving image for the crab character to drop a pearl larger than a normal case on the symbol display device 41. I do. By doing so, the present configuration can be realized. With such a configuration, when the crab character executes a point-giving effect in which a larger pearl is dropped than in a normal case, the player is more likely to perform the point-giving effect than when the normal point-giving effect is executed. Expectation and superiority can be given. Also, during the game, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the point giving effect is executed, and further, whether or not the point giving effect in which the crab character drops a pearl larger than usual is executed. Such an expectation can be given to the player.

  In addition, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, when the point giving effect is executed and the points are given, the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points), and after the button pressing effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value, the super reach effect is executed. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the point giving effect executed before the super reach effect is executed is set to a mode different from the mode of the point giving effect executed in other cases. . More specifically, in a state where the number of accumulated points is 5, a point giving effect of giving 9 points is executed, and the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points) and the accumulated points exceed the threshold. When the super reach effect is executed after the button press effect executed by the user, the character displayed in the point giving effect executed before the super reach effect is executed is displayed at the time of the normal point giving effect. A configuration may be adopted in which a whale character is set in place of a tortoise character. The normal reach effect is an effect that is executed when the symbol is in the reach state. The super reach effect is an effect that suggests to the player that the degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when only the normal reach effect is executed. Note that the special reach production described later has a higher expectation (probability) of winning a jackpot lottery as compared with a case where only a normal reach production is performed and a case where a super reach production is performed in addition to the normal reach production. This is an effect that suggests to the player.

  In addition, the present configuration is executed after the button press effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points) by the point provision effect being executed and points are awarded, and when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value. Not only the super-reach effect, but also the special-reach effect after the button press effect that is executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold, or the fact that the jackpot was won. The present invention may be applied to the case of an effect to be immediately notified (hereinafter, also referred to as a one-shot notification effect). That is, a special reach effect is executed after the button press effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points) by the point giving effect being executed and the points are added and the accumulated point exceeds the threshold value. Is performed, or when a one-notification effect is executed, a configuration is adopted in which the mode of the executed point giving effect is set to a mode different from the mode of the point giving effect executed otherwise. I do.

  Such a configuration can be realized by, for example, the following processing. In the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), it is determined whether the point giving effect to be executed is the last point giving effect to be executed before the button pressing effect, based on the effect scenario and the point giving scenario. Then, when it is determined that the point-giving effect to be executed is the last point-giving effect to be executed before the button-pressing effect, based on the effect scenario, after the button-pressing effect after the point-giving effect is performed, If the type of production is determined and the production is determined to be a specific type of production, such as a normal reach production, a super reach production, a special reach production, or a one-shot announcement production, Then, a point-giving effect in a special mode different from the other cases is set as a point-giving effect before the button-pressing effect. By doing so, the above configuration can be realized.

  As described above, the point giving effect is executed, the points are given, the accumulated points exceed the threshold value (10 points), and the effect executed after the button press effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold value. Depending on the type of the point giving effect that is executed before the effect is executed, the point is given by adopting a different configuration from the point giving effect executed otherwise. In addition to giving the player a feeling of expectation, it is possible to give the player another feeling of expectation and a pleasure of estimating a subsequent game. In addition, since there are a plurality of types of point giving effects, the player can pay attention to the point giving effect executed every time.

  That is, in the present modification, the presentation scenario set for the game time is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS corresponding to the game time. Then, based on the rendering scenario determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS corresponding to the game times, a point giving scenario is determined. Based on the giving scenario, the mode of the point giving effect executed in the game round is determined.

A7-12. Modification 12:
In the first embodiment, a configuration in which the mode of giving points indicates the progress of the game thereafter may be adopted. For example, three points, four points, and one point are given by the three point giving effects, indicating that the special reach effect is executed after the button press effect executed thereafter. According to the configuration to perform and the point giving effect of three times, the point giving mode in which 7 points, 7 points, and 7 points are given is changed to a one-button announcement effect after the button press effect executed thereafter. A configuration that suggests the above can be adopted. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, as follows.

  Regarding the point giving scenario linked to the effect scenario that is set to execute a specific effect such as a special reach effect or one-shot announcement effect, each point giving effect set in the point giving scenario The configuration can be realized by presetting, for example, values of 3, 4, and 1 to the number of assigned points. By doing in this way, the player can be further noticed with respect to the number of points given in each point giving effect. In addition, the player can make various inferences about the progress of the game based on the mode of giving points, and the player can be given more sense of expectation.

  In addition, the content suggested by the mode of the point provision is not limited to the effect performed thereafter, for example, may indicate the number of points to be provided in the point provision effect further performed subsequently, a jackpot The result of the lottery may be suggested, or the carry-over of the accumulated points may be suggested.

A7-13. Modification 13:
In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which information on the mode of giving points that have already been given (hereinafter also referred to as point giving mode information) may be adopted. For example, the history of the mode in which the points are provided may be displayed as the point provision mode information. Then, the history of the mode in which the points are given may be displayed by colors, characters, or the like.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram illustrating Modification Example 13. FIG. 67 illustrates a state in which a pearl image indicating points accumulated in the stage St in the point provision effect displays a history of the mode in which points are provided.

  FIG. 67 (a) shows the accumulated points of the stage St after the initial (first) point giving effect is executed from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started and 4 points are given. Was. In this modified example, the points accumulated by executing the first point giving effect from the state in which the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started are displayed as a white pearl image on the stage St.

  FIG. 67 (b) shows the accumulated points of the stage St after the point accumulation effect is reset and a new game round is started, the second point giving effect is executed, and two points are given. In this modification, the points accumulated by executing the second point giving effect from the state in which the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started are displayed as an image of a yellow pearl on the stage St.

  FIG. 67 (c) shows the accumulation points of the stage St after the accumulation points are reset and a new game round is started, the third point giving effect is executed, and 3 points are added. In this modification, the points accumulated by executing the third point giving effect from the state in which the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started are displayed on the stage St as a yellow-green pearl image. .

  In this manner, points are given by distinguishing the image indicating the points accumulated by executing each point giving effect by the color for each point giving effect that triggered the accumulation points to be given. A history of aspects can be displayed. For example, when the player visually recognizes the pearl image indicating the accumulation points shown in the stage St of FIG. 67C, the player is given points in the order of 4 points → 2 points → 3 points. You can recognize that.

  This modification is realized by, for example, providing the assigned history storage area, which is a storage area for storing the assigned point history of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, in the sound light RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. be able to.

  FIG. 68 and FIG. 69 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the assignment history area. As shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the award history storage area, the number of points awarded (the number of times a point award effect is executed) from the state in which the accumulated points are reset and a new game is started, The color (display food) for displaying the image of the pearl corresponding to the point accumulated by the point giving effect corresponding to the point setting effect is set in advance, and each time the point giving effect is actually executed, the storage area for the given points is set. (Hereinafter, also referred to as a given point storage area) is stored with a value indicating the given point. In the case of the giving history area shown in FIG. 68A, four points are given by the first point giving effect, two points are given by the second point giving effect, and three points are given by the third point giving effect. It turns out that it was given.

  FIG. 68 (b) shows an award history storage area in a case where a point award effect is executed once more from the state of FIG. 68 (a) and 6 points are awarded. In the assigned history storage area of this modification, every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the assigned points are stored in the storage area to the right of the assigned point storage area. Since nine points have already been accumulated when the number of grants is one to three, as shown in FIG. The first to third storages are stored in the same storage area, and the remaining five points are stored in the storage area in the right column. Then, when displaying the pearl image corresponding to the accumulation point on the stage St, the application point in the rightmost column of the application point storage area and the display color corresponding to the number of times of application are read, and the pearl image is displayed on the stage St. Is displayed. In this way, by dividing the storage area for every 10 points, the timer effect (or the effect during standby) is executed by accumulating the 10 points, the accumulated points are subtracted by 10 points, and the accumulated points are newly added to the stage St. Even when points are accumulated, the accumulated points correspond to the accumulated points in the stage St with a display color corresponding to the number of points actually given from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game is started. Images of pearls can be displayed. Further, the giving history storage area shown in the present modified example can correspond to a case where 10 or more points are given in one point giving effect.

  FIG. 69 shows an award history storage area in a case where a point award effect is further executed once from the state of FIG. 68 (b) and 17 points are awarded. In this case, of the 17 points, 5 points are stored in the second column of the provided point storage area, so that the storage area in the second column becomes 10 points. Then, of the remaining 12 points, 10 points are stored in the third column of the provided point storage area, and the remaining 2 points are stored in the fourth column of the provided point storage area. As described above, even when 10 or more points are given in one point giving effect, reading the given point in the rightmost column of the given point storage area and the display color corresponding to the given number of times. Thereby, the image of the pearl corresponding to the accumulation point can be displayed on the stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points actually given from the state where the accumulation point is reset and a new game is started. .

  Further, the timing for storing the points provided in the provided history storage area, the timing for reading the points, and the timing for resetting the points will be described. When the points to be given are stored in the giving history storage area, for example, in step S 12302 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), when the number of given points to be executed is read, the points to be given are stored in the giving history storage area. A configuration in which the information is stored in the area can be adopted. At this time, as described above, every time 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the assigned points are stored in the storage area to the right of the assigned point storage area.

  Regarding the reading of the assigned history storage area, for example, in step S12310 of the point accumulation processing (FIG. 56), the assigned point in the rightmost column of the assigned point storage area in the assigned history storage area and the display color corresponding to the assigned number are displayed. A point accumulation moving image display start command for displaying a pearl image (point accumulation moving image) of a display color corresponding to the number of times of reading and giving points is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the point accumulation moving image display start command displays an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulation point on the stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points given.

  Regarding the reset of the assignment history storage area, for example, after resetting the accumulation point counter Cpnt in step S12603 of the point reset process (FIG. 59), the assignment history storage area is reset. By executing such processing, the configuration according to the modification can be realized.

  By adopting the configuration of the modified example, it is possible for the player to check the history of the mode in which the points are provided, such as the number of executions of the point providing effect and the number of points given in one point providing effect. In addition, it is possible to make the player who has confirmed the history of the mode in which the points are provided estimate the number of point-providing effects to be executed thereafter, the number of points to be provided, and the like, thereby giving a sense of expectation to the game. . Further, as in the above-described modified example 12, when the mode of giving points suggests the progress of the game thereafter, the history of the mode in which points are given as in the present modified example is recorded by the player. Can encourage the player to make further inferences about the progress of the subsequent game, thereby allowing the player to pay attention to the game and giving the player a sense of expectation. can do.

  In the present modification, the history of the mode in which the points are given is displayed by the color of the pearl image indicating the accumulated points, but is displayed by a character that distinguishes the points given in each point giving effect. Or may be distinguished by a mark, a pattern, or the like. Further, the points awarded for each point awarding effect may be directly displayed by numbers. For example, when three points, four points, and one point are given by three point giving effects, "3.4.1" is displayed on the display surface 41a. As described above, various display modes can be adopted as long as the player can recognize the history of the mode in which the points are given.

  Further, as the point giving mode information, information that can identify only the number of points given at the time of executing the most recently executed point giving effect may be displayed. For example, among the pearl images displayed as the accumulation points on the stage St, only the pearl images of the number corresponding to the number of points given at the time of the execution of the point giving effect executed most recently are different from other pearl images. A configuration having different colors, patterns, shapes, and the like may be employed.

A7-14. Modification 14:
As the point giving effect in the first embodiment, a mode in which points are given a plurality of times in one point giving effect may be adopted. For example, in the point giving effect, the effect until the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a and the pearl on which the number of points to be given is displayed is called a point giving suggestion effect, and the number of points to be given. When the turtle character drops the pearl on which is displayed, the pearl reaches the stage St, changes to an image of the pearl corresponding to the accumulation point, and the effect until the point giving effect ends is referred to as a point giving execution effect. In the above, after the point giving suggestion effect is executed once, the point giving execution effect is executed twice.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a point giving effect in the fourteenth modification. As shown in the figure, FIG. 70 (a) shows a state where a point giving suggestion effect is being executed among the point giving effects. In other words, this shows a state in which a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a and an effect is performed until the drop of the pearl on which the number of points to be given is displayed is started. FIG. 70 (b) shows a state where the first point giving execution effect is executed after the point giving suggestion effect is executed. As shown in the figure, the point giving execution effect is an effect indicating that four points are given. FIG. 70 (c) shows a state where the second point giving execution effect is executed after the first point giving execution effect is executed. As shown in the figure, the point giving execution effect is an effect indicating that 5 points are given. FIG. 70D shows a state in which the second point giving execution effect ends and the point giving effect ends.

  By adopting such a configuration, a player who has recognized the point-giving suggestion effect is expected to have the point-execution effect performed thereafter, that is, how many points are awarded. It is possible to give a sense of expectation such as whether or not. In addition, when the point giving execution effect is executed a plurality of times after the point giving suggestion effect is executed once, it is recognized that the point giving suggestion effect has been executed, and thereafter, the point giving execution effect is executed once. Surprising and surprising can be given to the player who is supposed to be done.

  In FIG. 70, an example in which two point giving execution effects are executed for one point giving suggestion effect has been described. However, N (N ≧ 2 (Integer) number of point giving execution effects may be executed. Further, the value of N may be different each time for each point giving effect.

  The point giving effect in the present modification can be realized, for example, as follows. For example, in the case where two point giving execution effects are executed for one point giving suggestion effect, in the point giving scenario applied in the first embodiment, the points corresponding to one point giving effect are generated. Value (for example, 9 points) is divided into two (for example, 4 points and 5 points), and one point (4 points) of the point value divided in the first point giving execution effect is given, and the second point giving execution This can be realized by giving the other point (5 points) of the point value divided by the effect. According to such a process, one point value set in the point giving scenario may be acquired corresponding to the point giving suggested effect to be executed. That is, even if the point giving execution effect is performed N times for one point giving suggestion effect, one point value set in the point giving scenario may be acquired. Then, the obtained point value is divided into N and used for each point giving execution effect. Therefore, even if the point giving execution effect is executed N times in one point giving effect, the process is the same regardless of the value of N up to the process of acquiring the value of the point to be given from the point giving scenario. Therefore, the processing can be simplified. Also, the value of the points set in the point giving scenario in advance can be set regardless of the value of N, and the setting of the number of points in the point giving scenario can be simplified.

  In addition, the point giving effect in the present modified example can be realized, for example, as follows. For example, in the case where two point giving execution effects are executed for one point giving suggestion effect, in the point giving scenario applied in the first embodiment, the points corresponding to the two point giving effects are obtained. Get the value. For example, in the case where the number of points set as the first point-giving effect in the point-giving scenario is 4 points, and the number of points set as the second point-giving effect in the point-giving scenario is 5 points , And the value of the point corresponding to the two points giving effects is acquired. Then, after executing one point giving suggestion effect, the first point giving execution effect is executed by using 4 points of the number of points set as the first point giving effect in the point giving scenario, and thereafter, Then, the second point-giving execution effect is executed using five points of the number of points set as the second point-giving effect in the point-giving scenario. Even in this case, the above configuration can be realized. According to such processing, when N point giving execution effects are executed for one point giving suggestion effect, the number of point giving execution effects to be executed (N times) is calculated from the point giving scenario. Since it is sufficient to acquire the corresponding number (N) of point values, there is no need to execute a process of dividing the value of the point corresponding to one point giving effect into N as in the above configuration, Processing can be simplified.

A7-15. Modification 15:
In the first embodiment, the mode of the point giving effect is a mode that suggests that the addition process is performed on the accumulated points already accumulated in the stage St. For example, when the point giving effect shown in FIG. 12 is described as an example, four points are already accumulated in the stage St as accumulation points, and when the point giving effect is executed, the turtle drops the pearl. A point giving effect in which the displayed point number (3 points) is added to the already accumulated point number (4 points) is executed. As described above, the point providing effect in the first embodiment is a mode that suggests that a newly provided point is added to the accumulated points already stored in the stage St (hereinafter, also referred to as an addition mode). Call). When the point giving effect of the addition mode is executed, the number of points obtained as a result of adding the points given by the point giving effect of the addition mode to the points displayed as the accumulated points is calculated as a new accumulated point. Will be displayed as However, the mode of the point giving effect is not limited to the addition mode, and another mode may be adopted. For example, a point giving effect of a mode (hereinafter, also referred to as a multiplication mode) that suggests that the multiplication process is performed on the accumulated points already stored in the stage St may be adopted.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a point giving effect in a multiplication mode. In the point giving effect of the multiplication mode, as shown in FIG. 71A, after the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the turtle character drops pearls as shown in FIG. 71B. However, “× 2” indicating the multiplication process is displayed on the pearl. Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (c), when the pearl displayed as “× 2” reaches the stage St, it corresponds to the “× 2” displayed on the pearl and has already been stored as a storage point on the stage St. The number of points (8 points) obtained by multiplying the displayed 4 points by 2 is displayed as a new accumulated point.

  Such a configuration can be realized as follows. For example, in a point giving scenario, a value of a point corresponding to a point giving effect in a multiplication mode is set. At this time, the value of the accumulation points up to the point-giving effect of the multiplication mode is X, the value by which the accumulation points are multiplied in the point-giving effect of the multiplication mode is A, and the point-giving effect of the multiplication mode set in the point-giving scenario. If the value of the point corresponding to is set to Y, the value of Y calculated as Y = XA-X is set in the point providing scenario as the value of the point corresponding to the point providing effect in the multiplication mode. The effect scenario is set so that a point-giving effect in a multiplication mode is executed. By doing so, the above configuration can be realized.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give a player who has recognized the point giving effect in the multiplication mode an expectation for the value to be multiplied by the accumulated points, and to play the game in the point giving effect in the multiplication mode. Can attract attention. Further, when the point giving effect of the multiplication mode is executed, the player who recognizes that the turtle character has appeared on the display surface 41a and estimates that the point giving effect of the addition mode is executed is given to the player. , Surprise, and the expectation can be greatly improved.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the point giving effect of the multiplication mode is controlled (changed) according to the magnitude of the value by which the accumulated points are multiplied. For example, a configuration in which the color of the pearl dropped by the turtle is different or a configuration in which the character that appears is different (for example, a configuration in which an octopus appears instead of the turtle) is adopted according to the magnitude of the value by which the accumulation point is multiplied. Is also good. By doing in this way, the player can be further noticed in the point giving effect in the multiplication mode.

  Furthermore, when the point giving effect of the multiplication mode is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which a point number greater than the number of points obtained by multiplying the already accumulated accumulation points is displayed as a new accumulation point. For example, when four points have already been accumulated, a point-giving effect in a multiplication mode is executed. In the point giving effect of the multiplication mode, “× 2” indicating the multiplication process is displayed on the pearl dropped by the turtle. In this case, normally, when “× 2” indicating the multiplication process reaches the stage St, 8 points (4 points × 2) are displayed as new accumulation points, but in this point giving effect, The number of points (for example, 10 points) with more than 8 accumulated points is displayed. In this manner, unexpectedness and happiness can be given to a player who has recognized new storage points that are more than the storage points obtained as a result of multiplying the already stored storage points.

  Further, as a mode of the point giving effect, there are a case where the point giving effect of the addition mode is executed and a case where the point giving effect of the multiplication mode is executed, so that the point giving effect of the adding mode is given to the player. It is possible to give a sense of urgency or a sense of tension, such as whether the execution is to be performed or a point giving effect in a multiplication mode is to be executed.

  Furthermore, when the point giving effect of the addition mode is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of points larger than the number of points obtained as a result of addition to the already accumulated accumulation points is displayed as a new accumulation point. In this manner, unexpectedness and happiness can be imparted to a player who has recognized new accumulation points that are more than the accumulation points that have been added to the already accumulated accumulation points.

  In addition, the mode of the point giving effect is not limited to the adding mode and the multiplying mode, and a configuration of executing a point giving effect in various arithmetic modes such as a point giving effect in a subtraction mode or a division mode may be adopted. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the executed point-giving effect, and to give the player a sense of expectation.

  In addition, a configuration in which the mode of the point giving effect changes during execution of one point giving effect may be adopted. For example, during the execution of one point-giving effect, the mode changes from the addition mode to the multiplication mode, from the multiplication mode to the addition mode, or during the execution of one point-giving effect. A configuration in which the mode changes a plurality of times may be adopted. As described above, it is possible to recognize that the calculation method executed by the point giving effect has changed, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. Also, depending on the calculation method executed by the point giving effect, the value of the new accumulation point after the execution of the calculating process may be greatly different. In addition to giving a sense of urgency to the player, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  FIG. 72 shows, as an example, an image of a pearl dropped by a turtle (hereinafter, simply referred to as an image of a pearl) in a case where the mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during execution of one point giving effect. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of FIG. FIG. 72 (a) shows a pearl image in the case where the mode of the point giving effect is the addition mode. In the image of the pearl, "+", which is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition, is displayed to indicate that the point giving effect is an addition mode. FIG. 72 (b) shows an image of a pearl in a case where the mode of the point giving effect is a multiplication mode. In the image of the pearl, "x" which is an arithmetic symbol indicating multiplication is displayed to indicate that the point giving effect is a multiplication mode.

  For example, when the mode is changed from the addition mode to the multiplication mode during execution of the point giving effect, the arithmetic symbol “+” indicating the addition displayed on the pearl image in FIG. 72A is rotated. 72 (b) is changed to “x” which is an arithmetic symbol indicating multiplication displayed on the image of the pearl in FIG. 72 (b). Conversely, when the mode is changed from the multiplication mode to the addition mode during execution of the point giving effect, the arithmetic symbol “x” indicating the multiplication displayed on the pearl image in FIG. 72B is rotated. Then, it is changed to “+”, which is an arithmetic symbol indicating the addition displayed on the pearl image in FIG. 72A. By adopting such a configuration, the meaning can be largely changed by a process of rotating substantially the same line drawing symbol such as "+" and "x". In addition to giving a great sense of urgency, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  In the case where the mode is changed between the addition mode and the multiplication mode a plurality of times during execution of one point giving effect, the arithmetic symbol is displayed on the image of the pearl dropped by the turtle and falling. "+" (Or "x") may be continuously rotated. Then, at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which the pearl reaches the stage St), the rotation of the arithmetic symbol is stopped, and the calculation (addition or multiplication) indicated by the arithmetic symbol at the time of the stop causes the amount of the calculation to be performed on the accumulation point. Corresponding points (pearl images indicating accumulation points) are displayed on the stage St. By doing so, the player can be further noticed for the point giving effect.

A7-16. Modification 16:
In the first embodiment, one point is displayed as an image of one pearl on the stage St as a display mode of accumulated points. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. It can be displayed in various modes.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode of accumulated points. The display mode of accumulated points shown in the present modification is a display mode in which a meaningful shape (image) is obtained only when the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold value (10 points). FIG. 73 (a) to FIG. 73 (j) show how points are accumulated from 1 point to 10 points. In the case of the display mode shown in FIG. 73, this is a display mode in which a single pearl image is formed only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. By adopting such a display mode, it is possible to give the player an ambition to form one meaningful image from partial images, and to increase the number of accumulated points to 10 points. , And when one meaningful image is formed, a sense of accomplishment can be given to the player.

  In addition, in FIG. 73, although the boundary line (outline) of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point is displayed, the pearl corresponding to one point is not limited to such a display mode. A display mode in which the boundary line of the partial image is not displayed may be adopted.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode in which a boundary line of a partial image of a pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed as a display mode of accumulated points. As shown in the figure, since the boundary line of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of accumulated points. Therefore, the accumulated points may reach the threshold value without the player's consciousness, which can surprise the player.

  In addition, as described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74, as a display mode of accumulated points, a mode (image) that makes one meaning only when the number of accumulated points reaches the threshold (10 points) is displayed. However, a mode may be adopted in which the shape (image) having one meaning is changed at a predetermined timing only when the number of points of the accumulation points reaches the threshold value (10 points). For example, as shown in FIG. 73, the accumulation points are displayed in a display mode in which one pearl image is displayed only when the number of accumulation points reaches 10 points, and thereafter, when the accumulation points reach the threshold value, the pearls are displayed. Changes to an image of a shell showing a timer effect or an image of a shell showing a stand-by effect, the accumulation point on the stage St shifts to the state of 0 points again, and a new accumulation point is accumulated from the state of the 0 point. In this case, as shown in FIG. 75, as a display mode of the new storage point, the storage point is displayed in a display mode in which an image of one whale is displayed only when the number of storage points reaches 10 points. May be adopted. This allows the player to pay attention to the accumulation points of the stage St. Further, each time a shape (image) having one meaning is changed after the number of accumulated points reaches the threshold value (10 points), the player can imagine what shape (image) is formed. As a result, a new sense of expectation can be given to the player.

  Further, for example, a configuration in which the shape (image) formed in the process of accumulating the accumulation points may be different depending on the degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot in the game round. For example, when the one-point announcement effect is executed after the accumulation point reaches the threshold value and the button press effect is executed, an image of one mambo is formed as a shape formed in the process of accumulating the accumulation point. adopt. Then, for example, when the special reach effect is executed after the accumulation point reaches the threshold value and the button press effect is executed, an image of one shark is formed as a shape formed in the process of accumulating the accumulation point. adopt. By adopting such a configuration, the player can be further noticed with respect to the accumulation points of the stage St, and the expectation of the player is increased in the process of forming the image indicating the accumulation points. Can be done.

A7-17. Modification 17:
In the first embodiment, a countable amount of “points” is adopted as a target to be given, but an uncountable amount may be adopted. For example, instead of the point giving effect, an effect in which liquid is added to the container displayed on the stage St may be adopted.

A7-18. Modification 18:
In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the threshold value of the accumulation points for executing the button press effect is set to 10 points is adopted. Any positive value can be adopted as the threshold value of.

A7-19. Modification 19:
In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the button press effect is executed when the accumulation point reaches the threshold value is employed. However, the present invention is not limited to the button press effect, and a configuration in which another effect is executed may be employed. . For example, when the accumulated points reach the threshold value, a predetermined reach effect may be executed instead of the button press effect. That is, when 10 points are accumulated, the player always reaches the point, so that the player can be provided with a sense of expectation for the point of reaching each time points are given. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific process such as a button press effect is not executed even if the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold value. By doing so, after the accumulated points reach the threshold value, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not a specific process such as a button press effect is to be executed, and to give the player a sense of urgency.

A7-20. Modification 20:
In the first embodiment, the indication as to whether or not the accumulation point is carried over is made based on the change in the color of the stage St. However, the suggestion may be made by another method such as lighting, blinking, or changing the shape of the stage St. In addition, a dedicated lamp or the like for indicating whether or not the accumulation point is carried over may be provided.

A7-21. Modification 21:
In the first embodiment, during the period allocated to the button press effect (hereinafter, also referred to as the button press effect period), the effect operation button 24 is operated according to the timing at which the player presses the effect operation button 24. After that, a mode may be adopted in which the effect performed during a period until the button press effect period ends is changed. The time from the start of the button press production period to the timing at which the player presses the production operation button 24 is measured, and the button press production period is set after the production operation button 24 is operated according to the measured value. This can be realized by reading and executing the effect image data from the effect storage area in which the effect corresponding to the period up to the end is recorded. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the button press effect from being patterned, and to make the player pay attention to the button press effect.

A7-22. Modification 22:
In the first embodiment, the position (image) having the function of accumulating the given points is only the stage St displayed on the display surface 41a, but the position having the function of accumulating the given points is provided. A configuration in which a plurality (images) of (images) are displayed on the display surface 41a may be employed.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration in which a plurality of positions (images) having a function of accumulating the given points are displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in FIG. 76A, as positions (images) having a function of accumulating the given points, a first stage St1, a second stage St2, and a third stage St3 are displayed on the display surface 41a. Have been. In the present modification, each stage St has a different effect in the effect. Specifically, the effects executed when the number of points accumulated in each stage St has reached the threshold value are different from each other.

  If the points accumulated in the first stage St1 have reached the threshold value, then a timer effect (or a standby effect) and a button press effect are executed. Then, after the button press effect is executed, a one-shot notification effect is executed. As described above, the one-shot notification effect is an effect that immediately notifies that the jackpot has been won. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the points accumulated in the first stage St1 have reached the threshold value executes a button press effect triggered by the fact that the points accumulated in the first stage St1 have reached the threshold value. It is possible to recognize that the jackpot has been won in the game times.

  If the points accumulated in the second stage St2 have reached the threshold value, then a timer effect (or a standby effect) and a button press effect are executed. Then, after the button press effect is executed, the special reach effect is executed. As described above, the special reach production has a higher degree of expectation (probability) of winning in the jackpot lottery as compared with the case where only the normal reach production is performed and the case where the super reach production is performed in addition to the normal reach production. This is a production that suggests a high price to the player. Therefore, the player who has recognized that the points accumulated in the second stage St2 has reached the threshold value executes a button press effect triggered by the fact that the points accumulated in the second stage St2 have reached the threshold value. It is possible to recognize that the degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery in the game times is high.

  If the points accumulated in the third stage St3 have reached the threshold value, then a timer effect (or a standby effect) and a button press effect are executed. Then, after the button press effect is executed, a normal reach effect is executed. The normal reach effect is an effect that suggests to the player that the degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than a case where the normal reach effect is not executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the points accumulated in the third stage St3 have reached the threshold value executes a button press effect triggered by the fact that the points accumulated in the third stage St3 have reached the threshold value. In the game time, it can be recognized that at least a normal reach effect is executed.

  From such characteristics of each stage St, when a point is awarded, the player desires that points be accumulated most in the first stage St1 among the three stages St. It is desired that points be accumulated in the second stage St2, and finally, it is desired that points be accumulated in the third stage St3.

  In the point giving effect shown in FIG. 76, when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, a pearl image displaying the number of points to be given is not displayed. The turtle character advances on the display surface 41a from the right end to the left end.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the turtle character passes over the stage St on which points to be given in the point giving effect are accumulated, the number of points to be given is displayed. Drop pearls. As shown in FIG. 76 (c), after the dropped pearl reaches the stage St for accumulating the points to be given in the point giving effect, the dropped pearl changes to an image of the pearl indicating the accumulated points, and the stage St Is stored as a storage point.

  Such an effect is a stage St (a first stage St1) for accumulating points in each point giving effect executed in the game time in the effect scenario and the point giving scenario set in the game time in which the effect is executed. , The second stage St2, and the third stage St3) can be realized by setting in advance.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the position (stage St) where the points are accumulated in the point giving effect, and to provide the player with new enjoyment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 76A, points are accumulated in any stage St for a player who has recognized that a turtle character has appeared on the display surface 41a in the point giving effect. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation as to whether or not the number of points to be given. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), the player who recognizes that the turtle character is passing over the upper part of each stage St is expected about the position (stage St) where points are accumulated. It can give a feeling and a sense of urgency, and can also give an expectation to the number of points to be given. Further, for example, when a pearl displaying the number of points given from the turtle character is dropped on the stage St (for example, the first stage St1) expected by the player, the pearl is displayed to the player. , Giving a sense of superiority.

  In the point giving effect described in FIG. 76, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the number of points given is displayed on the pearl. Although the image was not displayed, the image is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, an image of a pearl displaying the number of points to be given is displayed. May be adopted.

  FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point giving effect in which the number of points given is displayed at the start. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), in this point giving effect, when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, a pearl displaying the number of points to be given is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the turtle character passes over each stage St, the pearl displaying the number of points to be given is displayed in three stages St (first stage St1, first stage St1, second stage St1). It is dropped to one of the two stages St2 and the third stage St3). Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), after the pearl on which the number of points to be provided is displayed reaches the stage St for storing points to be provided in the point providing effect, an image of the pearl indicating the stored points , And is stored as a storage point in the stage St.

  In such an effect, unlike the point giving effect shown in FIG. 76, the number of points given is displayed at the start of the point giving effect. In this case, the player who has recognized the number of points to be provided does not always want to accumulate points in the first stage St1, and the stage St in which the accumulated points reach the threshold value is determined by the point giving effect executed this time. In some cases (for example, the second stage St2 shown in FIG. 77), it may be desired that points be accumulated in the stage St. As described above, in the case of the point giving effect shown in FIG. 77, when the accumulated points reach the threshold value, the player determines which stage St has a high degree of expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery. In addition to the consideration, the stage St at which points are desired to be accumulated is determined in consideration of the point accumulation state of each stage St at the present time. Therefore, by executing such a point giving effect, it is possible to give the player a pleasure of grasping the state of the game from various angles.

  In addition, in addition to the effect of giving points (point giving effect), a configuration of executing another effect on points may be adopted. For example, when it is executed, an effect of causing any one of the accumulation points of the three stages St to always reach the threshold (hereinafter, also referred to as threshold reaching effect) may be executed.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a threshold reaching effect. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the threshold reaching effect is started, the crab character passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a with a pearl. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the crab character drops a pearl on the stage St for which the accumulation point reaches the threshold. When the dropped pearl reaches the stage St, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), the accumulation point of the stage St whose accumulation point reaches the threshold changes to a display having reached the threshold. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), a timer effect corresponding to the stage St that has reached the threshold value is executed. In the example of FIG. 78, the accumulation point of the first stage St1 reaches the threshold, and the timer effect image (the image of the whale character and the timer) prepared for the first stage St1 is displayed. As described above, when the points accumulated in the first stage St1 have reached the threshold value, a timer effect (or a standby effect) and a button press effect are executed, and the button press effect is executed. After that, an announcement announcement effect is executed.

  Such a configuration can be realized by setting in advance the threshold-reaching effect in the effect scenario and the point-giving scenario that are set in the game times in which the threshold-reaching effect is executed.

  By adopting such a configuration, in addition to the point giving effect, a new sense of expectation regarding points can be given to the player. Specifically, since the result of the game greatly differs depending on which stage St is the target in which the executed threshold reaching effect reaches the threshold, a great sense of expectation and a sense of urgency are given to the player. be able to.

  In the first stage St1, the second stage St2, and the third stage St3, the effects executed when the points accumulated in the stage St reach the threshold value are a one-shot announcement effect and a special reach, respectively. Although it was an effect and a normal reach effect, it is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which another effect or processing is executed may be adopted.

  Further, the points accumulated in each of the first stage St1, the second stage St2, and the third stage St3 have a configuration in which, as in the first embodiment, there are cases where the points are carried over the game times and cases where the points are not carried over. May be adopted. As in the first embodiment, since the accumulated points may not be carried over, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation so that the accumulated points on each stage reach the threshold before the end of the game round. Further, the player who has recognized that the accumulation of the points has been started in at least one of the stages is made aware of the timing of the end of the game round, and is focused on the mode in which the accumulated points on each stage are provided. be able to. In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over across game rounds, even if the accumulated points on at least one of the three accumulated stages on the game round do not reach the threshold value, Thus, the player can be given an expectation that the accumulation point is not reset at the end of the game round but is maintained until the next game round, and the threshold may be reached in the next game round. That is, such an expectation can be given to each accumulation point on the three stages, and an opportunity to give the player an expectation can be provided more than in the first embodiment. Can be increased.

A7-23. Modification 23:
In the first embodiment, an effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a carry-over change effect) may be executed in which the running game time is not a carry-over game time, and the game time appears to be changed to a carry-over game time.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a carryover change effect. In the game times shown in FIG. 79 (a), the color of the stage St is orange, which indicates that the game times are not carryover game times. When the carryover change effect is executed in the game, the octopus character riding on the yellow stage appears from the right end of the display surface 41a. When the yellow stage is displayed at the position of the stage St on the display surface 41a, it indicates that the game time is a carryover game time.

  After the octopus character on the yellow stage appears, the yellow stage falls at the timing when the yellow stage and the octopus character pass above the stage St, as shown in FIG. 79 (b). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), the image of the yellow stage is superimposed on the orange stage St, and then the color of the stage St changes from orange to yellow. That is, when the carryover change effect is executed, the color of the stage St changes from a color (orange) indicating that the game is not a carryover game time to a color (yellow) indicating a carryover game time.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player who has recognized the execution of the carryover change effect is made to recognize that the game time has been changed from the game time that is not the carryover game time to the carryover game time, and surprised, Can be given a sense of expectation to the game times.

  In this modification, an octopus character riding on a yellow stage appears as in the carryover change effect, and the yellow stage and the octopus character pass over the upper part of the stage St, but the yellow stage falls. Instead, the effect that only the yellow stage and the octopus character pass from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a, that is, the dummy effect that appears to be a carryover change effect is also executed. By executing a dummy effect that pretends to be a carryover change effect, guess whether the image of the yellow stage will fall or not for the player who recognizes that the octopus character on the yellow stage has appeared By doing so, it is possible to guess whether the game time changes to the carry-over game time or not, thereby giving a sense of urgency. Then, when the yellow stage falls, a sense of superiority and a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

  With such a configuration, the setting of the carry-over change effect is set in advance to the effect scenario and the point giving scenario which are set in the game time in which the carry-over change effect is executed, and the carry-over change effect is performed in the stage display control process (FIG. 60). In the case where the effect is executed, it can be realized by executing a process of setting the color of the stage St when the accumulation of points is started to the color (orange) of the stage St when the point is not a carryover game time. it can.

A7-24. Modification 24:
In the first embodiment, an effect in which the remaining time indicated by the timer effect is extended (hereinafter, also referred to as a timer time extension effect) may be executed.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a timer time extension effect. In the game times shown in FIG. 80 (a), a timer effect is being executed. When the timer time extension effect starts, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), a fish character with a timer (hereinafter also referred to as an extension timer) hanging appears from the right end of the display surface 41a. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), when the fish character hanging the extension timer passes over the shell and the timer image indicating the timer effect, the extension timer that the fish character was hanging falls. Then, it is superimposed on the timer image indicating the timer effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (c), the remaining time until the button press effect indicated by the timer image indicating the timer effect is extended.

  That is, in processing, the remaining time until the button press effect before being extended is a time set as a dummy remaining time (hereinafter, also referred to as a dummy remaining time). Then, at the timing when the remaining time of the dummy remaining time approaches 0 (zero), or after the remaining time reaches 0 (zero), the timer time extension effect is executed, and the remaining time indicated by the timer of the timer effect is calculated as the true remaining time. Update on time. By doing so, the configuration of the present modified example can be realized.

  Such a timer time extension effect indicates that the remaining time indicated by the remaining time of the dummy indicates an intermediate break portion of the effect being executed or the time until the end portion of the effect being executed. And the player can be trusted for the remaining dummy time. Then, by executing the timer time extension effect and updating the remaining time indicated by the timer of the timer effect from the dummy remaining time to the true remaining time, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and expectation.

  In this modification, a fish character hanging the extension timer appears as in the case of the timer time extension effect, and the fish character hanging the extension timer passes over the upper part of the stage St. An effect in which the fish character hanging on the extension timer passes only from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a without falling, that is, a dummy effect that appears to be a timer time extension effect is also executed. By performing a dummy effect that pretends to be a timer time extension effect, the player who recognizes that a fish character with a hanging timer has appeared, makes the timer guess whether the timer will fall or not, thereby producing a timer effect. Can be guessed whether the remaining time indicated by is extended or not, and a sense of urgency can be given. Then, when the extension timer falls, a sense of superiority and a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

A7-25. Modification 25:
In the first embodiment, the number of times the accumulated points carry over the game times continuously, that is, the greater the number of times the carried game times are continuously executed, the greater the number of times the carried game times are continuously executed, Control for increasing the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot may be executed. As a specific example, the continuous effect final game time is performed after the three consecutive carry game times are continuously executed, compared to the case where the continuous effect final game time is executed after the one carry-over game time is executed. Is executed, the control is performed such that the expectation that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery of the final stage of the continuous production is increased.

  For example, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery of the reserved game times by the preceding determination process, the larger the number of game times (preceding game times) executed before the reserved game times, the more The control is performed so that a continuous effect is easily executed from the game time executed after it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery of the reserved game time to the reserved game time. Specifically, in the effect information setting process, when the number of executed games Np is determined by lottery based on the number of reconfigurable games Fn, the case where the reserved game time (processing game time) is a big hit , The lottery table data for determining the number of executed games Np is set such that the probability of the value of the number of executed games Np increasing becomes higher than that in the case of occurrence (reach occurrence). In this way, the control is performed such that the greater the number of times that the carryover game times are continuously executed, the higher the degree of expectation that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery of the successive production final game times executed thereafter. can do. By adopting such a configuration, the expectation of the player can be increased as the carry-over game times are continuously executed.

  Furthermore, the larger the number of times the accumulation points carry over the game times continuously while maintaining the state where the accumulation points do not reach the threshold value (10 points), the greater the number of times the accumulation points are carried over to the jackpot lottery of the successive production final game times executed thereafter. The control that increases the degree of expectation may be executed. For example, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery of the reserved game times by the previous determination process, and in the effect information setting process, when the effect scenario and the point giving scenario corresponding to the number of executed games Np are determined. In the case where the reserved game time (processing target game time) is a big hit, the accumulation point is set to a threshold value from the carryover game time to the continuous production final game time, as compared with the case of departure (reach occurrence). The lottery table data for determining the effect scenario and the point providing scenario is set so that the probability of being determined as the effect scenario and the point providing scenario that does not reach (10 points) is increased. By doing in this way, the larger the number of times the accumulation points continuously carry over the game times while maintaining the state in which the accumulation points do not reach the threshold value (10 points), the greater the jackpot of the successive production final game times executed thereafter It is possible to execute a control for increasing the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot in a lottery.

  By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player who has recognized that the accumulation points are continuously carrying over the game times while maintaining the state where the accumulation points do not reach the threshold value (10 points). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from decreasing in a state where the accumulated points have not reached the threshold value.

A7-26. Modification 26:
In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the threshold value of the accumulation points for performing the button press effect is changed. Specifically, the timer effect or the stand-by effect is not executed even though 10 accumulated points are accumulated, accumulated points exceed 10 points, and a predetermined number of accumulated points exceeding 10 points is accumulated. Timer effect, standby effect, or button press effect at the specified timing (for example, 15 points), or timer effect, standby effect, or button press effect despite the state where 10 points are not accumulated in the accumulation points. May be adopted. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration that does not notify the player that the threshold value of the accumulation point for executing the button press effect has been changed. In such a configuration, an effect scenario and a point-giving scenario specializing in the process of changing the threshold are prepared in advance, and only when the process is performed, the value set as the threshold in various processes (usually, By setting “10”) to the changed threshold value (for example, “15”) and executing it, the process can be executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to execute the button press effect at a timing not expected by the player, and as a result, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the process in which such a threshold is changed is executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time in which the process is executed is a big hit or a miss (reach occurrence). By adopting such a configuration, the player who has recognized that the threshold value has been changed, that is, the player who has recognized that the accumulated points exceed 10 points and the accumulated points are 10 points It is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player who has recognized that the button press effect has been executed in spite of the state in which the button press effect has not been accumulated.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is notified by the effect that the threshold value of the accumulation point for executing the button press effect is changed. For example, an effect indicating that the threshold value of the accumulation points for executing the button press effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that the button press effect is more easily executed than when the threshold value of the accumulation points for executing the button press effect is 10 points. Further, in a state where a predetermined number of points have already been accumulated (for example, in a state where 6 points have been accumulated), the threshold value of the accumulated points for executing the button press effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points. If the effect indicating that the button press effect is executed has already been performed, the number of points required for executing the button press effect has been accumulated. In this case, immediately after the effect indicating that the threshold value of the accumulation points for executing the button press effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points was executed, the timer effect was executed prior to the button press effect. In this case, unexpectedness and expectation can be given to the player. Such a configuration can be realized by setting the effect scenario and the point giving scenario in advance.

A7-27. Modification 27:
In the first embodiment, the first execution game time display shown in the first execution game time display area J1, the first reservation game time display shown in the first reservation display area Ds1, and the second execution game time display area J2 are displayed. In each game time, the second execution game time display shown and the second reservation game time display shown in the second reservation display area Ds2 are associated with each display (hereinafter, also collectively referred to as game time display). A configuration for displaying the number of granted points to be provided may be adopted. More specifically, when a point is given in a predetermined game time, in the vicinity of the game time display corresponding to the predetermined game time (for example, immediately above the game time display), A display (provided point suggestion display) corresponding to the number of points to be provided may be displayed. In this case, the suggested point suggestion display may be displayed corresponding to all the displayed game times, or the presented point suggestion display may be displayed corresponding to a part of the displayed game times. May be. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give various inferences and expectations for the game times corresponding to the displayed provided point suggestion display to the player who has recognized the provided point suggested display. For example, when the provided point suggestion display is displayed in association with the game time display corresponding to the pending game time, various inferences about the pending game time are given to the player who has recognized the provided point suggestion display. And expectation. In addition, for example, points are given in a range of less than 10 points in the game round being executed, and the provided point suggestion display corresponding to the game round display corresponding to the next game round to be executed is supported. If the total number of points to be added and the number of points currently given becomes 10 points or more, the provided point suggestion display that is displayed corresponding to the game time display corresponding to the next game time to be executed is not displayed. Compared to the case, the player can be more coveted to carry over the points to the next game round, and if the points are carried forward, the player is given a great expectation to the player can do.

  In addition, after indicating the given point suggestion display corresponding to the predetermined game time, in association with the game time display corresponding to the game time different from the predetermined game time, the display corresponds to the game time display corresponding to the predetermined game time. A configuration in which the information is added and displayed may be adopted. For example, an image of a number displayed as a point suggestion display immediately above the game time display corresponding to the reserved game time for the first starting port (n = 1) is displayed at a predetermined timing at the reserved game time ( (n = 2).

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reverse the player's guess based on the provided point suggestion display displayed in association with the game time display corresponding to the game time different from the predetermined game time, Can be provided with unexpectedness.

  With such a configuration, after displaying the point suggestion display corresponding to the predetermined game time in association with the game time display corresponding to the game time different from the predetermined game time, the game corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed. This can be realized by setting in advance the effect scenario and the point giving scenario so as to be displayed in association with the time display.

  In addition, a configuration is adopted in which, after displaying the provided point suggestion display corresponding to the number of points different from the number of points provided in the predetermined game round, the provided point suggestion display corresponding to the number of points provided in the predetermined game round is displayed. May be. For example, the image of the number “5” displayed as the point indication display immediately above the game time display corresponding to the reserved game time (n = 1) for the first starting port is displayed at a predetermined timing by the number The image is changed to “7”.

  It is possible to overturn the player's guess based on the provided point suggestion display corresponding to the number of points different from the number of points given in the predetermined game round, and it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness, Inflection can be given to a player's expectation.

  Such a configuration can also be realized by setting the effect scenario and the point giving scenario in advance.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Gaming machine structure:
The structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Note that components having the same functions as those of the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

  FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facilities of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged on a front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  At an approximate center of the front door frame 14, an open window 18 is formed. Around the window 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illuminated component is configured by light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role of increasing the effect by lighting or blinking at the time of a winning lottery, a winning, or a reach occurrence performed by the pachinko machine 10. On the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as lent balls lent from a lending machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20 and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and the player can operate the lever 23 to switch between the closed state and the open state of the outlet 22. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, game balls fall from the discharge port 22, and the game balls are discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 is provided in front of the periphery of the upper plate 20 as operation receiving means. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on a game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the staging operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the game ball firing mechanism from firing the game ball by pressing operation by the player, and an operation handle 25 And a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the variable resistor by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in a front view, a game ball firing button 26 for operation by a player is provided. The game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, so that the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board at a predetermined firing intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 of the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing intensity as when the rotation amount of the operation handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when a game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board in a front view and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called “right-hand”. Further, in the following description, a case where a game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 25 and the game ball flows to the left side in front view of the game board and flows down the left side of the game board is referred to as “left”. There is a case where it is expressed as "hitting". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26, thereby launching the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front is adopted, but the configuration in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged in another position is adopted. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (the peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, it is possible for the player to operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only the right hand.

  FIG. 82 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of an outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and thereafter flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is provided. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and arrange the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 has a general winning opening 32, an upper first starting opening 33 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a first starting opening 33), a lower first starting opening 44 (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a first starting opening 44), A second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display unit 45 has a special figure unit 37, a general-purpose unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general winning opening 32 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and a plurality of general winning openings are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning opening 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44 are entrance ports into which game balls can enter. The upper first starting port 33 is provided above the center of the game board 30, and the lower first starting port 44 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery described later is executed. . The lower first starting port 44 is provided with an electric accessory 44a including a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 44a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower first starting port 44. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 44a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the lower first starting port 44. The electric accessory 44a is configured to be open for a predetermined period when a lottery executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35 is won.

  The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port through which game balls can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30. Therefore, the second starting port 34 is provided at a position where a game ball enters when the player operates the operation handle 25 and makes a right hit. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery described later is executed.

  The through gate 35 is a through gate serving as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 44a. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main controller 60 performs an internal lottery (power-operated accessory opening lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the electrification opening is won, the electric accessory 44a shifts to the electrification opening state, which is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed upstream of the lower first starting port 44 with respect to the flowing direction of the game ball, the game ball passing through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing. It is possible to enter the lower first starting port 44. In the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 includes a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As described above, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44, or the second starting port 34, the main controller 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the winning lottery, when the big hit or the small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable prize device 36 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the state changes from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter to an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, the state transits to the closed state again. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

  An out port 43 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various entrance ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. Each of the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

  The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying a first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is fluctuated or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by entry of a game ball into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44. The first symbol display unit 37a displays the segment display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44. As a display mode until the display is performed, a variable display of the first symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to stop displaying the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol is a symbol that is fluctuated or stopped based on a winning lottery triggered by entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is used as a display mode until a lottery is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 34 as an opportunity, and the segment display unit performs a display corresponding to the lottery result. , The second symbol is fluctuated or given. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display unit 37b causes the second symbol display unit 37b to cause the segment display to stop displaying the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

  Here, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop symbol is displayed. It is called fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a to the stop display thereof is referred to as a first variable time, and the second symbol display unit 37b displays the first variable time. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is referred to as a second variable time.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d formed of LED lamps at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

  The first reserve display section 37c displays the number of reserved first start-up ports (the upper first start-up port 33 and the lower first start-up port 44) by the color or combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls having entered the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44 are held as a total of the two first starting ports.

  The second hold display section 37d displays the number of held second start-up ports 34 by the color or combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

  The general-purpose unit 38 includes a light-emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. The general-purpose unit 38 displays a light-on display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display as a display mode of the light-emitting display device when an electric accessory opening lottery triggered by a game ball passing through the through gate 35 is performed. . When the motor-operated accessory opening lottery ends, the general-purpose unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display section 39 is configured by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. The round game means opening and closing until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b is kept open. The number of round games differs depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the shift. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp. For example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of displaying the lottery result and the lottery result.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 has a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, and a CRT.

  When the first symbol display section 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on a game ball entering the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the liquid crystal display device 41 adjusts to that. To perform a variable display of the symbol or a predetermined display. In addition, when the second symbol display section 37b performs a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 performs a variable display or a predetermined symbol Is displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is not limited to performing a variable display or a predetermined display of a symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44, or the second starting port 34. In addition, an effect display or the like in the opening / closing execution mode to be shifted to when a jackpot is won is also performed. Hereinafter, the details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a that are variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. FIG. 83A is an explanatory diagram showing a first liquid crystal symbol or a second liquid crystal symbol that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first symbol for liquid crystal is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a. The second liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (a), on the liquid crystal display device 41, symbols 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, you may employ | adopt the design which added the design of the character etc. to each design which shows number 1-8 as a design displayed by change.

  FIG. 83B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display surface 41 a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As shown, a main display area MA and a sub-display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, there are a case where an image of a first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and a case where an image of a second liquid crystal symbol is displayed. Similarly, in the sub display area SA, similarly to the main display area MA, there are a case where an image of a first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and a case where an image of a second liquid crystal symbol is displayed. When the image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA, the image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the sub display area SA, and the image of the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA. In this case, the image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the sub display area SA. Which of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA is determined by the state of the game.

  In the main display area MA, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. 83A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers. A variable display is provided in which the columns scroll from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L1.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44) or the second starting port 34, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have periodicity. , A variable display scrolling in a predetermined direction is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3, and the symbol row Z2, and finally a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . When the symbol change display is terminated and the stop display is performed, or when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L1. Note that the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design in the main display area MA are not limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, the display mode of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol, such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of active lines, the direction of symbol display in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can adopt various modes.

  In the sub-display area SA, three symbol rows Z4, Z5, and Z6 are displayed on the left, the center, and the right. In each of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6, symbols 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. 83 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order. A variable display is provided in which the columns scroll from top to bottom or bottom to top periodically. As shown in FIG. 83 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L2.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44), the symbols in the symbol rows Z4 to Z6 scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity. Is started. Then, the symbols to be scrolled are switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z4, the symbol row Z6, and the symbol row Z5, and finally, the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z4 to Z6. . When the symbol change display is completed and the stop display is performed, or when the result of the winning lottery by the main control device 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line L2. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L2. In addition, the aspect of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol in the sub-display area SA is not limited to the above-described aspect. For example, the display mode of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol, such as the number of symbol rows in the sub display area SA, the number of active lines, the direction of variable display of the symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can adopt various modes.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting port 34 is displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls retained in the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) and the second starting port 34 is the maximum. Up to four.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b), the display surface 41a has a blinking display and lighting synchronized with the change display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a of the special figure unit 37. A first synchronous display section Sync1 for displaying, and a second synchronous display for blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuation display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special figure unit 37. Section Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is performing the fluctuation display, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 performs the blinking display, and when the first symbol display unit 37a is performing the stop display, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 is performing the stop display. The 1 synchronous display section Sync1 performs lighting display. Also, when the second symbol display section 37b is performing the fluctuation display, the second synchronous display section Sync2 performs the blinking display, and when the second symbol display section 37b is performing the stop display, the second synchronous display is performed. The unit Sync2 performs lighting display.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub-display area SA, the first synchronous display unit Sync1, and the second synchronous display unit Sync2. A configuration in which some or all of these displays are not displayed may be adopted.

B2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to a block diagram.

  FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that a part of the function of the MPU 62 may be provided in another element. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the main control board 61, a payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected. The main control board 61 receives the supply of DC stable 24 V power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power supply into necessary operating power by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, and the like, and supplies the necessary power to each device. Supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44), a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning opening. Various detection sensors provided at various entrances and through gates such as the device 36 are connected. The MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entrance, based on the signals from these detection sensors, and the game ball passes through the through gate. It is determined whether or not it has been performed. Further, the MPU 62 executes a lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) and the second starting port 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, a variable winning drive unit 36c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory driving unit for opening and closing the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44. The main display unit 45 is connected to an opening / closing door driving unit 48b that opens and closes the opening / closing door 48a. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the open / close door 36b is opened / closed. Further, as a result of the election for opening the electric accessory, if the election to open the electric combination is won, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 44b so that the electric accessory 44a is opened. Further, in each game round, the MPU 62 controls the display of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b on the main display portion 45, and displays the round display on the main display portion 45 in the open / close execution mode. The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of ten game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the first starting port (upper side) When the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and When the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out a prize ball.

  A firing control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board at an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, to the launch control device 80, the game ball launch button 26 is connected. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired on the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The sound emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When transmitting various commands, main controller 60 refers to command information storage area 63f of ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, and control of driving of the speaker 46. Is performed, and the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, the sound emission control device 90 is connected to the effect operation button 24, and when the effect operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, a game effect reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, the display control device 100, and the like.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. , The presence or absence of the reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect performed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed in a variable manner. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a lottery, sets a display on the main display unit 45, and sets a symbol display on the liquid crystal display device 41. Specifically, the big random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. When sorting the jackpot types, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when a symbol row displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is deviated and fluctuated.

  A random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, a variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used in an electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 44a of the second starting port 34 is to be opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64 a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a hold information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The hold information storage area 64b has a first hold area Ra and a second hold area Rb. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of the entry are changed. The information is stored in chronological order in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entry are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. Stored in chronological order.

  The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The big hit random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to add one by one in the range of 0 to 1199, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when the game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44), the updated value is entered. Is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of, and when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the second holding area of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the input ball. Stored in Rb.

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first reservation area Ra moves to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the big hit is determined. Is determined. Also, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the hit / failure table stored in the hit / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. , A jackpot is determined.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44), the big hit stored in the first holding area Ra is obtained. The value of the random number counter C1 is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a big hit occurs. When the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, The process of collating with the hit / fail table stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 and determining whether or not a big hit is performed is executed in parallel. In the following, a process of determining whether or not a jackpot has been triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44), and the second starting port 34. The process of determining whether or not a jackpot is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the game is executed in parallel, and the variable display of the first symbol display unit 37a and the variable display of the second symbol display unit 37b are performed. Pachinko machines that can be executed in parallel are also called simultaneous fluctuation machines.

  In the following description, a game (also referred to as a game time) executed when a game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) is referred to as a first game port. In some cases, the game is executed as a start-up game time, and a game (also referred to as a game time) that is executed when a game ball enters the second start-up port 34 is referred to as a second start-up game time.

  Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 39, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the game ball when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the game ball is stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entry.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the. Further, the MPU 62 determines the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. . In making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a big hit. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. Is determined. After the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach is determined. Is determined. However, when the result of the hit lottery becomes a big hit and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach means that, for some of the symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41, some of the symbol rows corresponding to the jackpot may be partially stopped. This is a display state in which the symbols are displayed in that state, and the symbols are changed and displayed in the remaining symbol columns. The combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment refers to a combination of identical symbols in a predetermined activated line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 83 (b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed by performing the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

  As another specific example, in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 83B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z4, and then the same symbol as Z4 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z6. As a result, the reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol is displayed by performing the variable display of the symbol in the symbol row Z5. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z5.

  In addition, in the reach, in the state where the reach line is formed, while performing the fluctuation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol row, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, The combination of the design in which the reach line is formed is reduced or not displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. In addition, when a reach effect is performed or before a reach display, a determination as to whether or not to perform a preview display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is performed using a reach random number counter C3 or another counter. You may.

  Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time of determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the symbol variation by the liquid crystal display device 41. When determining the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a variation time table stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, be incremented by one within a range of 0 to 465, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release in the electric accessory execution area 64e is performed. Using the value of the counter C4, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 44a to the open state. For example, if C4 = 0 to 463, the electric accessory 44a is controlled to be open, and if C4 = 464, 465, the electric accessory 44a is maintained to be closed.

  At least one of the obtained value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. Further, the value of the big hit random number counter C1, the value of the big hit type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb are also referred to as holding information.

  Next, the hit / fail table will be described. The success / failure table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when a winning lottery is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set as the lottery mode of the winning lottery. At the time of the winning lottery in the low-probability mode, the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode is referred to. At the time of the winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the first information in the hold information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). The hit / fail table for matching with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area Ra, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. Is stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine whether or not the first starting port has a low / high probability table, the first starting port has a high / low probability table, and the second starting port has a low / high probability table. Four hit / fail tables for the probability mode (for the probability mode) and for the second start port (for the high probability mode) are stored in the hit / fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the first starting port. FIG. 86 (a) shows a hit / fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 86 (b) shows a hit / fail table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a), in the hit / fail table for the first starting port (for the low probability mode), four values from 0 to 3 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which becomes a jackpot. I have. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, values (4 to 1199) other than the four values of 0 to 3 are out of order. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the hit / failure table for the first starting port (for the high probability mode). Have been. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values of 0 to 19 are out of order. As described above, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode.

  In the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit table for low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit table for high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of the jackpot being higher in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the hit / fail table for the second starting port. FIG. 87 (a) shows a hit / fail table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 87 (b) shows a hit / fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 87 (a), four values of 0 to 3 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which becomes a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for the low probability mode). . In addition, 1192 values of 4 to 1195 are set as values of the big hit random number counter C1 to be small hits, and four values of 1196 to 1199 are set as values of the big hit random number counter C1 to be missed.

  Here, the “small hit” is an opportunity to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening and closing of the variable winning device 36 is executed. However, in both the lottery mode and the support mode described later, it is a success / failure result that is not an opportunity to shift. is there. On the other hand, “out” does not serve as a transition trigger of the opening / closing execution mode, and furthermore, is a success / failure result that does not trigger a transition in the lottery mode and the support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, in the small hit, as the opening / closing execution mode, the opening of the variable winning device 36 whose opening period is 1.6 sec occurs once.

  As shown in FIG. 87 (b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot in the hit / fail table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode). . In addition, 1176 values of 20 to 1195 are set as values of the big hit random number counter C1 to be small hits, and four values of 1196 to 1199 are set as values of the big hit random number counter C1 to be missed.

  As described above, in the winning / not-hitting table for the second opening, similarly to the winning / not-hitting table for the first opening, the probability of winning in the jackpot in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode. ing. Further, in the hit / fail table for the second starting port, the value of the big hit random number counter C1 serving as a small hit is set in both the hit / fail table for the low probability mode and the hit / fail table for the high probability mode. When a lottery is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the second starting port, a small probability of winning is set with a predetermined probability.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing a difference between the following three modes or modes, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set.
(1) Number of open / close times (number of rounds) of the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode
(2) Aspect of opening / closing control of variable winning device 36 in opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low-probability mode or high-probability mode) of winning lottery after completion of opening / closing execution mode

  As a mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, generation of a ball (winning) of a game ball to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. The high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency is relatively high and low.

  In addition to the above (1) to (3), it is also possible to set a jackpot accompanied by execution of a specific process when a win is made. As described later, in the present embodiment, a jackpot type of “specific probability variable jackpot” is set. The specific probability variable jackpot involves execution of a specific process when a winning is achieved. Details will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, if a jackpot is determined as a result of a jackpot, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot types corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 88 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 88 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to at the time of a lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44), and is referred to as the second starting port. The distribution table for the starting port is referred to at the time of a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), in the distribution table for the first starting port, the entry of game balls into the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44) is performed. Based on the jackpot type, 10R certain jackpot, 10R specific jackpot, and 8R regular jackpot are set.

  In the 10R probability change jackpot, the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is 10 times (10 rounds), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In the 10R probability changing jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode is continued until the jackpot is won in the subsequently executed winning lottery. Further, the 10R probability change jackpot becomes a state of a high-frequency support mode described later after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and becomes a state in which the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than the state of the low-frequency support mode. In the case of the 10R probability change jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the hit lottery executed thereafter. Details of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode will be described later.

  In the 10R specific probability change jackpot, the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is 10 (10 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. is there. In addition, in the 10R specific probability changing big hit, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode is continued until the big hit is won in the subsequently executed winning lottery. Further, the 10R specific probability change jackpot is in the state of the high frequency support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than the state of the low frequency support mode. In the case of the 10R-specific probability-change jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the hit lottery executed thereafter.

  In addition, as described above, the 10R specific probability change jackpot involves execution of a specific process when the winning is achieved. Details will be described later.

  In the 8R normal jackpot, the number of times the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed in the opening and closing execution mode is eight (8 rounds), and the mode of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In the case of the 8R normal big hit, the lottery mode of the hit lottery after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low probability mode. Further, the 8R normal jackpot is in the state of the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than the state of the low frequency support mode. However, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is limited to 100 times, and when the total number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, The support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 11” corresponds to the 10R certain jackpot, and “12 to 19” corresponds to the 10R specific jackpot. Correspondingly, "20-39" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the distribution table for the second starting port, as the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, the 2R certain variable jackpot and the 2R normal jackpot are provided. Is set.

  In the 2R probability change jackpot, the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is two (two rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In the 2R probability changing jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the big hit is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Further, the 2R probability change jackpot is in a state of a high-frequency support mode described later after the end of the open / close execution mode, and is in a state in which the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than in the state of the low-frequency support mode. In the case of the 2R probability change jackpot, the high frequency support mode is continued until a jackpot is won in a hit lottery executed thereafter. Details of the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode will be described later.

  In the 2R normal jackpot, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened twice (two rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. . In the 2R normal big hit, the lottery mode of the hit lottery after the end of the open / close execution mode is the low probability mode. In addition, the 2R normal jackpot is in the state of the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode, and the electric accessory 44a is more easily opened than the state of the low frequency support mode. However, in the case of the 2R regular jackpot, the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode is limited to 100 times, and when the total number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode reaches 100 times, The support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the second starting port, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 19” corresponds to the 2R probability variable jackpot, and “20 to 39” corresponds to the 2R normal jackpot. Is set to

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot, the distribution mode of the jackpot type is a game to the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). The difference between the case of a big hit based on the entry of a ball and the case of a big hit based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is different, and the advantage for the player is clear. Differences are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as the mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 after the end of the opening / closing execution mode (3), the launch of the game ball to the game area PA is similar. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of opening the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 per unit time is relatively high or low when compared in a situation where A frequency support mode can be set.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electrification opening in the electrification opening lottery using the electrification accessory opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electrification opening in the election for opening the electric accessory is set higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Further, in the high frequency support mode, one opening time of the electric accessory 44a is set to be longer when the electrification is released than in the low frequency support mode.

  Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the case where the electrification release is won in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the electric accessory 44a occurs a plurality of times, the following is performed after one open state ends. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time set after performing one electric-powered-object opening lottery and then performing the next electric-powered-object opening lottery is set shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. You may.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball enters the lower first starting port 44 is higher than in the low frequency support mode, and the game ball enters the lower first starting port 44. It becomes easy to ball. That is, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in establishing the conditions for acquiring special information.

  FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning / losing table (a winning / failing table for open / closed election) for use in executing an electrically-powered accessory opening lottery.

  FIG. 89 (a) shows an electric accessory opening lottery success / failure table (for the low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 89 (a), the winning / non-winning table for electric-power-operated-object opening lottery (for the low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of the electric-operated-object opening counter C4 that is elected to open. A value has been set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 which is to be removed. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the low-frequency support mode and the electric-power-operated-object opening lottery is executed, the electrification opening is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electrification is released in the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 44a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

  FIG. 89 (b) shows an electric accessory opening lottery success / failure table (for the high frequency support mode) used in the high frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), in the winning / non-winning table for electric-power-operated-object opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode), 462 pieces of 0 to 461 are set as the values of the electric-operated-object opening counter C4 which is elected to open. A value has been set. Four values of 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 which is out of order. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 in the high-frequency support mode and the electric-power-operated-object opening lottery is executed, the electrification opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electrification is released in the high-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 44a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

  As described above, the probability of occurrence of game balls entering the second starting port 34 in the high-frequency support mode is set higher than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric auditors goods opening lottery success / failure table. .

B3. Game flow:
Next, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing a game flow in the gaming machine.

  When the game is started, in step F101, the player makes a left strike, causes a game ball to flow to the left side of the game area PA, and causes the game ball to enter the upper first starting port 33. At this time, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. When a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33, the first starting port game round is executed and a lottery is performed.

  If the winning lottery in the first start-up game round is missed (F101: NO), game balls are repeatedly inserted into the upper first start-up port 33 to execute the first start-up game round.

  If the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed in the first opening game round (F102: YES), if the type of the winning jackpot is a normal jackpot (F103: NO), the first opening game is executed. A round game is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of the round (F104). More specifically, a suggestion effect for urging the player to make a right strike is executed. The player performs a right-handed operation after the end of the first start-up game round in accordance with the suggestion effect, enters a game ball into the special winning opening 36a, and obtains a prize ball.

  When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode (limited to 100 games). A suggestion effect that prompts the player to make a left hit is performed, and the player makes a left hit, causing a game ball to enter the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). The game round for the first starting port is executed (F105).

  The high-frequency support mode is continued until the game is executed 100 times (F106: NO → F107: NO). If the jackpot is won within 100 times (F106: YES), the game proceeds from step F103. .

  On the other hand, when the jackpot has not been won within 100 game times in the high frequency support mode (F106: NO → F107: YES), the game proceeds from step F101.

  The description returns to Step F103. In step F103, if the jackpot type of the won jackpot is the probability variable jackpot (F103: YES), if it is not the specific probability variable jackpot (F108: NO), after the end of the first start-up game round. A round game is executed as a privilege given to the player (F109). More specifically, a suggestion effect for urging the player to make a right strike is executed. The player performs a right-handed operation after the end of the first start-up game round in accordance with the suggestion effect, enters a game ball into the special winning opening 36a, and obtains a prize ball.

  When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode (until the next jackpot win). A suggestion effect that prompts the player to make a left hit is performed, and the player makes a left hit, causing a game ball to enter the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). The game round for the first starting port is executed (F110).

  The high frequency support mode is continued until a jackpot is won in the winning lottery (F110 → F111: NO).

  If the game for the first starting port is executed and a jackpot is won (F110 → F111: YES), the game proceeds from step F103.

  The description returns to Step F108. In step F108, when the jackpot type of the won jackpot is the specific probability variable jackpot (F108: YES), the round game is executed as a privilege given to the player after the end of the first start-up game round. (F112). More specifically, a suggestion effect for urging the player to make a right strike is executed. The player performs a right-handed operation after the end of the first start-up game round in accordance with the suggestion effect, enters a game ball into the special winning opening 36a, and obtains a prize ball.

  When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. A suggestion effect that prompts the player to make a left hit is performed, and the player makes a left hit, causing a game ball to enter the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). The game for the first starting port is executed (F113).

  When the game round for the first start-up port is executed and the jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the first start-up port to be executed (F114: YES), the start of the game round for the first start-up port At times, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency port mode (F115). When a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the first start-up game round executed in a normal gaming machine, the high-frequency support mode is changed to the low-frequency port mode after the end of the first start-up game round. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency port mode at the start of the first start-up game round.

  In addition, at this time, at the start of the first start-port game round, a suggestive effect for urging the player to right-hand is executed.

  In the period in which the game round for the first starting port, which has been won in the jackpot in the winning lottery, is executed, the player performs a right-handed operation in accordance with the suggestion effect prompting a right-handed operation, and inserts a game ball into the second starting port 34. The ball is played, and the second starting port game round is executed (F116). At this time, the lottery mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

  In the second start-up game time, which is executed during the period in which the first start-up game time that has been won in the jackpot is executed (hereinafter also referred to as the first start-up winning game time execution period). If the small hit is won (F117: YES), one round game is executed as a privilege for the small hit (F118). The player enters a game ball into the special winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

  On the other hand, even if a small hit is not won in the executed second start port game round (F117: NO), if a game ball enters the second start port 34, the second start is performed again. A mouth game round is executed.

  In the first start opening winning game time execution period, the average value of the game time of the second start time game time is compared with the average value of the game time of the second start time game time in other periods. It is set so as to be short, and a plurality of second start-up game rounds can be executed during the first start-up winning game round execution period. In addition, as can be seen from the winning / non-performing table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode) of FIG. 87 (b), when the game round for the second starting port is executed, the small hit is won with a high probability. I do. Therefore, it is possible to execute the second start opening game times a plurality of times during the first start opening winning game execution period and to win a plurality of small hits. Can be obtained multiple times. Hereinafter, the process of granting a privilege to a player by a small win in the first start-up game round during the first start-up winning game round execution period is also referred to as “special bonus process”.

  The special bonus process is executed until the first start port winning game time execution period ends. That is, the game is executed until the first start-up game round, which has won the jackpot started in step F114, is completed (F119: NO). When the game round for the first start port, which has won the jackpot, ends (F119: YES), the game proceeds from step F103. That is, the game proceeds in different directions depending on whether the type of the jackpot of the first start-up game round that has won the jackpot is a normal jackpot, a probability-change jackpot, or a specific probability-change jackpot. Hereinafter, the special bonus process will be described using a time chart.

  FIG. 91 is a time chart for explaining the special bonus process.

  FIG. 91 shows a state in which the player starts a game from time T0 and ends the special bonus process. The illustrated time T0 corresponds to the progress of the game in step F101 in FIG. The player starts the game at time T0, enters a game ball into the upper first starting port 33, and executes the first starting port game cycle. At this time, as shown in FIG. 91, an effect image (hereinafter, referred to as the first start-up opening game time) corresponding to the first start-up game time is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 83 (b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41. An effect image corresponding to the second start-up game time (hereinafter, also referred to as a second start-up effect image) is displayed in the sub-display area SA.

  If at the time T1, the 8R-specific probability change jackpot is won in the first start-up game time (corresponding to F108: YES in FIG. 90), after the end of the first start-up game time winning at the 8R specific probability change hit (time T2). , A round game is executed (corresponding to F112 in FIG. 90). As an internal process performed by the main control device 60, an open / close execution mode flag indicating that a round game is to be executed is turned on. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a round effect image triggered by the jackpot of the first start-up game time.

  At time T3, when the open / close execution mode flag is turned off and the round game ends, the high-frequency support mode flag indicating that the main control device 60 is in the high-frequency support mode is turned on. As the internal processing by the main controller 60, a high probability mode flag indicating the high probability mode is turned ON. The state at time T3 in FIG. 91 corresponds to the game progress state in step F113 in FIG.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the high-probability mode, when the player makes a left hit and enters a game ball into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44), A game cycle for one starting port is executed. At this time, the average value of the game times of the first start-up opening game times executed at this time is shorter than that of other periods.

  Thereafter, when the first start-up game round, which has won the jackpot at time T4, is started, the special bonus process is started. More specifically, when the gaming round for the first start port, which has won the jackpot, is started, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Also, in the first start-up winning game time execution period, the average value of the game time of the second start-up game time is compared with the average value of the game time of the second start-up game time in other periods. Is set to be shorter. In addition, a suggestion effect that urges the player to make a right strike is executed. The processing at time T4 in FIG. 91 corresponds to step F114 and step F115 in FIG. Further, as shown in the column of the liquid crystal display device in FIG. 91, when the special bonus process is started, the effect image for the second starting port is displayed in the main display area MA, and the first starting port effect image is displayed in the sub display area SA. The effect image is displayed.

  When the player makes a right hit, enters a game ball into the second starting port 34, executes the second starting game round, and wins a small hit, each of the second starting opening game rounds that have won the small hit is played. After the end, a round game of one round is executed, and as an internal process in the main control device 60, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on after the end of the game round for the second starting port, which has been each small hit, and turned off after the round game is ended. Becomes

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 91, while the first start-port game round is being executed, the main control device 60 is in a period in which the round game is being executed with a small hit of the second start-port game round. As an internal process, the measurement of the game time of the first start-up game time is interrupted. The period in which the measurement of the game time of the first opening game time is interrupted is indicated by hatching in the chart of the first opening game time in FIG. As shown in the drawing, during the period in which the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON in accordance with the small hit of the second start-up game round during the first start-up winning round, the first start-up game round is executed. Execution time measurement is interrupted.

  Then, when the game time of the first start-up game time measured by the internal processing elapses a predetermined time, at time T5, the first start-up game time ends, and the special bonus process is performed. finish.

  When the game time of the first opening game time elapses a predetermined time, a round game corresponding to the first starting game game that has won the jackpot is executed in a period from time T5 to time T6. Then, the open / close execution mode flag is turned on at time T5 and turned off at time T6.

  Note that, after the time T5, the game time set for the second start port game time is set to a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes. Therefore, even if the player makes a right strike to execute the second start-up game round and win the small hit, one game time is extremely long, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the action of the player who does not follow the legitimate game flow of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special bonus process, which is a process of giving a privilege during the execution of the first start-up game round, which has won a jackpot. On the other hand, in addition to giving a sense of expectation about the round game (opening / closing execution mode) as a privilege given after the end of the game round winning the jackpot, the execution of the game round winning the jackpot A feeling of expectation can be given inside.

  Also, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, during the execution of the first start-up game time that has been won for the big hit, the special bonus is triggered by the fact that the small start-up is won in the second start-time game time. (1R round game) is given, so that even if a big hit is won in the first start-up game round, the second start-up game round is further executed and the small hit is performed. , A greater sense of expectation can be imparted.

  Furthermore, after the end of the first start-up game round in which the special bonus process is executed, the round game is executed in response to the jackpot winning in the first start-up game round, so that a greater sense of expectation is provided. Can be granted to a person.

  Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first start-up game time in which the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus process is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of executable times of the second start-up game times in the special bonus process is based on the game time of the first start-up game times corresponding to the period of the special bonus process. In other words, by controlling the game time of the next game to win the jackpot after winning the specific probability change jackpot, the upper limit of the privilege given to the player by the special bonus process can be controlled.

  Note that if the type of the jackpot at the time T1 shown in FIG. 90 is the specific probability variable jackpot, the start of the first jackpot game of the jackpot at the time T1 is triggered regardless of the jackpot type of the jackpot at the time T4. Bonus processing is started.

B4. Various processes executed in main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The processing executed in the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S20101, reading processing of various detection sensors is performed. That is, the state of the various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20102.

  In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20103.

  In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and when each counter value reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in a normal process (FIG. 94) described later.

  In step S20104, a ball entry process for a starting port accompanying a game ball entering the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44) and the second starting port 34 is executed. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step S20104 will be described later. After executing Step S20104, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Incoming ball processing for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be described. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 92: S20104).

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step S20201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (start winning) by determining whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port). 33, the determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the lower first starting port 44). If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has entered the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44) (S20201: YES), the flow proceeds to step S20202, and the payout control is performed. A prize ball command for causing the device 70 to pay out three game balls is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20203.

  In step S20203, an external signal is output to the management control device on the game hall side to output a signal that the game ball has entered the first start port (the upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44). Perform the setting process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20204.

  In step S20204, a start suspended number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as a first suspended start number RaN), which is a value stored in the suspended number storage area of the first suspended area Ra, is read, and the first suspended start number RaN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The first start reserved number RaN indicates a reserved number based on a ball entering the first start port (the upper first start port 33 and the lower first start port 44). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20209.

  If it is determined in step S20201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44) (S20201: NO), the process proceeds to step S20205, It is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 34 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

  If it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and a prize ball for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set the command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20207. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20205 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entry processing for the starting port ends.

  In step S20207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that a game ball has entered the second starting port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20208.

  In step S20208, a start suspension number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as a second start suspension number RbN), which is a value stored in the suspension number storage area of the second suspension area Rb, is read, and the second start suspension number RbN will be described later. Set as the target of processing. The second start reserved number RbN indicates the reserved number based on the ball entering the second start port 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20209.

  In step S20209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of suspension of starting set in step S20204 or step S20208 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). In step S20209, when the number N of suspension of starting is not less than the upper limit (S20209: NO), the ball entry processing for the starting port is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S20209, if the number N of starting suspensions is smaller than the upper limit value (S20209: YES), the process proceeds to step S20210, and after adding 1 to the number N of starting suspensions in the corresponding holding area, proceeds to step S20211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total reserved number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20212.

  In step S20212, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92) are stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the corresponding reserved area, In step S20210, the value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the suspended number obtained by adding 1. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92) is set. The value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. If the second start pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92) are set to: It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second suspension area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start suspension number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S20210. After executing Step S20212, the process proceeds to Step S20213.

  In step S20213, a first determination process is performed. The first determination process is based on information (reservation information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, and a winning lottery success / failure determination result (lottery result), a big hit type, and occurrence of reach. This is a process of determining whether or not there is a request before the hold information is subjected to a hit lottery by the main controller 60. After executing Step S20213, the process proceeds to Step S20214.

  In step S20214, a process of setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command. I do.

  The hold command indicates that a ball has entered the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44) or the second starting port 34, and the hold information acquired based on the incoming ball. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the determination result (first determination information) obtained by the first determination process based on the sub-controller before the suspension information becomes a target of the hit lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in a command output process of a normal process described later (FIG. 94: step S20302).

  In addition, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44), the sound emission control device 90 displays the liquid crystal display. A command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holds. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the ball entry into the second starting port 34, the sound emission control device 90 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 to the number of hold numbers. A command for making a change corresponding to the increase is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second holding display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

  After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the starting port.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, main processing of the game is executed.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the normal processing. In step S20201, a startup process is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device upon power-on, determination of the validity of data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20302.

  In step S <b> 20302, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a prize ball command, and if the prize ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 70. If commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, the commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing Step S20202, the process proceeds to Step S20303.

  In step S20303, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20304.

  In step S20304, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the flow advances to step S20305. In step S20305, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game number control process, a win lottery, setting of a symbol variable display by the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b, and the like are performed. The details of the game times control process will be described later. After executing Step S20305, the process proceeds to Step S20306.

  In step S20306, a game state shift process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. The details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20307.

  In step S20307, a power support process for controlling the driving of the power accessory 44a provided in the right first starting port 44 is executed. In the process of supporting the electric combination, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 44a is to be opened. The details of the electronic role support process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20308.

  In step S20308, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (the start of the command output process in step S20302 in the second and subsequent rounds). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached.

  If it is determined in step S20308 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S20308: NO), in steps S20309 and S20310, until the next normal processing execution timing is reached. , The update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly executed. Specifically, in step S20309, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S20310, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20308 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S20308: YES), the process returns to step S20302, and the processes from step S20302 to step S20307 are performed. Execute.

  Since the execution time of each process from step S20302 to step S20307 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game round control process>
Next, the game times control processing will be described. The game control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 94: S20305).

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the game times control processing. In step S20401, it is determined whether the mode is the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on at the timing when the change of the symbol in the game time in which the jackpot has been won is completed, and when the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, and is turned off at the timing when the opening / closing execution mode ends. By determining whether or not the open / close execution mode is being executed in step S20401, the following two functions are realized. As a first function, by preventing step S20403 (and step S20406) from being executed during the period in which the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, a game round is not started during the period in which the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. can do. As a second function, when the open / close execution mode is executed during the execution of the game, the opening / closing execution mode is executed by not executing step S20404 (and step S20407) described later. During a certain period, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the game number being executed can be interrupted. Hereinafter, the details will be described.

  If it is determined in step S20401 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S20401: YES), it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, and the game is executed without executing any of the processing in step S20402 and thereafter. The control processing ends. That is, when the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, whether a game ball has entered the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) or the second starting port 34. Regardless of whether or not, the game round is not started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20401 that the operation is not in the open / close execution mode (S20401: NO), the process advances to step S20402.

  In step S20402, it is determined whether the first game execution flag is ON. The first game execution flag is a flag that is turned on when the first opening game cycle is started, and is turned off when the first startup game session ends. If it is determined in step S20402 that the first game execution flag is not ON (S20202: NO), the flow proceeds to step S20403.

  In step S20403, a fluctuation start process for the first starting port is executed. The change start process for the first starting port is a process for starting the first starting game round. The details of the change start process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing Step S20403, the process proceeds to Step S20405.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S 20402 that the first game execution flag is ON (S 20402: YES), the flow proceeds to step S 20404.

  In step S20404, a first fluctuation stop process is performed. The first change stop process is a process for stopping the change of the symbol of the started game cycle for the first start port. Details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing Step S20404, the process proceeds to Step S20405.

  In step S20405, it is determined whether the second game execution flag is ON. The second game execution flag is a flag that turns on when the second start-up game round is started and turns off when the second start-up game round ends. If it is determined in step S20405 that the second game execution flag is not ON (S20405: NO), the flow proceeds to step S20406.

  In step S20406, a fluctuation start process for the second starting port is executed. The change start process for the second starting port is a process for starting the game round for the second starting port. The details of the variation start process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing Step S20406, the game round control process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20405 that the second game execution flag is ON (S20405: YES), the flow proceeds to step S20407.

  In step S20407, a second fluctuation stop process is executed. The second change stop process is a process for stopping the change of the symbol of the started second opening game time. Details of the second fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing Step S20407, the game round control process ends.

<Variation start processing for first starting port>
Next, the variation start process for the first starting port will be described. The change start process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game time control process (FIG. 95: S20403).

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the first starting port. In step S20501, it is determined whether or not the first start suspension count RaN = 0. If it is determined in step S20501 that the first start suspended count RaN is not 0 (S20501: NO), the process advances to step S20502. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S20501 that the first start suspended number RaN is 0 (S20501: YES), the first start opening variation start process is ended.

  In step S20502, a first startup port hold information shift process is performed. In the first starting port hold information shift processing, the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is shifted. The details of the first starting port hold information shift processing will be described later. After executing Step S20502, the process proceeds to Step S20503.

  In step S20503, a determination process for the first starting port is performed. In the determination processing for the first starting port, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, a hit / non-judgment judgment for judging the presence or absence of a big hit or a small hit, and the big hit type is sorted. A distribution determination and a reach determination for determining whether or not a reach has occurred are performed. The details of the determination process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing Step S20503, the process proceeds to Step S20504.

  In step S20504, a process of setting a variable time for the first starting port is executed. In the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first starting port, the fluctuation time, which is the time from when the symbol starts to fluctuate until it stops, is set. The details of the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first starting port will be described later. After executing Step S20504, the process proceeds to Step S20505.

  In step S20505, a first variation command is set. In the first variation command, the current game time is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44). Information indicating whether or not a reach has occurred, and information on the fluctuation time set in step S20504. After executing Step S20505, the process proceeds to Step S20506.

  In step S20506, a first type command is set. The first type command includes information on the presence or absence of the jackpot and information on the jackpot type. More specifically, the first type command includes information on 10R probability change jackpot, information on 10R specific probability change jackpot, information on 8R normal jackpot, or information on off.

  The change command and the first type command set in steps S20505 and S20506 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal processing (FIG. 94). The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect in the game round based on the received variation command and the first type command, and controls various devices so that the determined effect is executed. After executing step S20506, the process proceeds to step S20507.

  In step S20507, the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a is started, and the flow advances to step S20508 to turn on the first game execution flag. After that, the process advances to step S20509 to turn on the first variable flag.

  The first game execution flag is set to ON when the first start-up game round is started, the variable display in the first symbol display unit 37a is stopped, and the symbol display is stopped. This flag is turned off when the first symbol display stop time is over. On the other hand, the first fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned on when the first start-up game round is started, and is turned off when the fluctuating display on the first symbol display unit 37a becomes a stop display. .

  After executing Step S20509, the process proceeds to Step S20510.

  In step S20510, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by one. When the high frequency support mode is started, a value is set in the game number counter PNC, and the counter value is decremented by one every time the game is executed. After executing Step S20510, the fluctuation start process for the first starting port is ended.

<First starting port hold information shift processing>
Next, the first start-up port hold information shift process will be described. The first startup port hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 96: S20502) of the first startup port variation start process.

  FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the first start-up port hold information shift processing. In step S20601, 1 is subtracted from the first start suspended number RaN of the first reserved area Ra. After that, it advances to step S20602.

  In step S20602, the data (reservation information) stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20603.

  In step S20603, a process of shifting data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra is performed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. After executing Step S20603, the suspension information shift processing ends.

<Judgment process for first starting port>
Next, the determination process for the first starting port will be described. The determination process for the first startup port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 96: S20503) of the variation start process for the first startup port.

  FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first starting port. In step S20701, it is determined whether the win / fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the MPU 62. In the present embodiment, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability change jackpot. It is turned off at the start of the opening / closing execution mode related to the next jackpot winning. If it is determined in step S20701 that the mode is the high probability mode (S20701: YES), the process proceeds to step S20702.

  In step S20702, a right / wrong determination is made with reference to a first-start opening / failure table (for the high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. 86 (b). It is determined whether or not the values match. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20701 that the mode is not the high probability mode (S20701: NO), the process advances to step S20703.

  In step S20703, a determination is made with reference to the first startup port hit / fail table (for the low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the values match. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20704.

  In step S20704, it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in step S20702 or S20703 is a jackpot. If it is determined in step S20704 that the result of the hit determination is a jackpot (S20704: YES), the flow advances to step S20705.

  In step S20705, it is determined whether the probability change or the normal big hit flag for the second starting port is ON. If it is determined in step S20705 that the probability change or the normal jackpot flag for the second starting port is ON (S20705: YES), the flow advances to step S20722 to stop the lottery result of the first starting port game time. Set the symbol as a stop symbol for removal. Thereafter, the first start-up port determination process ends. That is, at the start of the fluctuation of the first opening game round, if the second winning opening gaming round that has won the jackpot is being executed, the opening / closing execution mode for the stop symbol of the first starting opening game round is not executed. Set to a combination of symbols.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20705 that the probability change or normal jackpot flag for the second starting port is not ON (S20705: NO), the process proceeds to step S20706 to determine whether the specific processing flag is ON. judge. The specific processing flag is turned ON when a specific probability jackpot has been won in a game time executed before the game time for the first start port to be determined. Is turned off when the special bonus process is executed. If it is determined in step S20706 that the specific processing flag is ON (S20706: YES), the process proceeds to step S20707.

  In step S20707, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. That is, a process corresponding to the special bonus process is executed. After executing Step S20707, the process proceeds to Step S20708.

  In step S20708, a special bonus start command is set. The special bonus start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the special bonus process is started. The command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (S20302) of the normal process (FIG. 94). After performing Step S20708, the process proceeds to Step S20709.

  In step S20709, the specific processing flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20710.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20706 that the specific processing flag is not ON (S20706: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S20710.

  In step S20710, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 88A). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of any jackpot type. After executing Step S20710, the process proceeds to Step S20711.

  In step S20711, it is determined whether or not the result (big hit type) of the distribution determination in step S20710 is a probability change big hit. In step S20711, when it is determined that the assigned jackpot type is the probable variable jackpot (S20711: YES), the process proceeds to step S20712.

  In step S20712, the probability change big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S20711 is turned ON. After executing Step S20712, the process proceeds to Step S20713.

  In step S20713, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot is a specific probability variable jackpot. If it is determined in step S20713 that the probability-change jackpot is the specific probability-change jackpot (step S20713: YES), the process proceeds to step S20714.

  In step S20714, the specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S20715 to set a specific probability variable jackpot command. The specific probability variable jackpot command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the specific probability variable jackpot has been won in the game time for the first start-up port to be determined. The command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (S20302) of the normal process (FIG. 94). After performing Step S20715, the process proceeds to Step S20716.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20713 that the probability variable jackpot is not the specific probability variable jackpot (step S20713: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S20716.

  In step S20716, a stop symbol setting process for the probability change big hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability change jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a sets which stop result is to be displayed (stop display) in a state where the stop result is displayed in the current game round which becomes the probability change jackpot. Execute the process for Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type allocated in step S20711 is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the probability change jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20716, the determination process for the first startup port is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S20711 that the assigned jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot (S20711: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S20717.

  In step S20717, the normal big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type allocated in step S20711 is turned ON. After executing Step S20717, the process proceeds to Step S20718.

  In step S20718, a stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal jackpot, the first symbol display unit 37a sets which stop result is to be displayed (stop display) in the first symbol display unit 37a in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is performed. Execute the process for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type allocated in step S20711 is acquired, and The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20718, the determination process for the first startup port ends.

  If it is determined in step S20704 that the result of the hit determination in step S20702 or step S20703 is not a jackpot (S20704: NO), the process proceeds to step S20719, and the reach stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The reach determination is performed with reference to the determination table to determine whether or not the reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as occurrence of reach in the referred reach determination table. The process of step S20719 is executed when the result of the hit / fail determination (winning lottery) in step S20704 is not a big hit. That is, in step S20719, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination is a game time in which a reach occurs among the game times in which the hit is not a big hit. After executing Step S20719, the process proceeds to Step S20720.

  In step S20720, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step S20719 is that a reach has occurred. If it is determined in step S20720 that a reach has occurred (S20720: YES), the flow advances to step S20721 to turn on the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. After executing Step S20721, the process proceeds to Step S20722.

  In step S20722, a departure stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for departure, in the current game round in which departure is made, the first symbol display part 37a is used to set which one of the stop results is displayed and the variable display is ended (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is referred to by referring to the stop result table for departure in the stop result table storage area 63e. The obtained address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20722, the determination processing for the first start-up port ends.

<Process of setting fluctuation time for first starting port>
Next, a description will be given of a process of setting the variable time for the first starting port. The process of setting the fluctuation time for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 96: S20504) of the fluctuation starting process for the first starting port.

  FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a process of setting the variable time for the first starting port. In step S20801, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20802.

  In step S20802, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination regarding the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (S20802: YES), the flow proceeds to step S20803.

  In step S20803, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for big hits stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step S20803, the process advances to step S20807 to set the obtained fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port is completed.

  In step S20802, when it is determined that the result of the hit / fail determination regarding the current game time is not a big hit (S20802: NO), the process proceeds to step S20804, and the result of the reach determination regarding the current game time is occurrence of reach. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach occurrence flag is ON, and if it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (S20804: YES), the process proceeds to step S20805.

  In step S20805, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step S20805, the process advances to step S20807 to set the obtained fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port is completed.

  If it is determined in step S20804 that the reach determination result regarding the current game has not reached the reach (S20804: NO), the process proceeds to step S20806, and the reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is reached. The fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the use fluctuation time table. After executing step S20806, the process advances to step S20807 to set the obtained fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port is completed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table is set such that the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of first startup suspension numbers RaN. The smaller the number of first startup suspension numbers RaN, the shorter the fluctuation time. You may.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time at the time of the reach occurrence, and the fluctuation time that is easy to be selected and the fluctuation time that is hard to be selected at the time of the jackpot winning and the out-of-reach reach may be different. Good. In addition, a variation time table for the probability change jackpot and a variation time table for the normal jackpot may be individually set.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be described. The first fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game control process (FIG. 95: S20404).

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop processing. In step S20901, it is determined whether the first variable flag is ON. If it is determined in step S20901 that the first variable flag is ON (S20901: YES), the process advances to step S20902.

  In step S20902, a first variation time measurement process is performed. Specifically, the first variation time counter PTC1 for measuring the variation time (the variation time of the first symbol display unit) of the first starting game time is down-counted. In this process, the value of the first variable time counter PTC1 is counted down every time the thread passes through the thread of step S20902. That is, the value of the first variable time counter PTC1 is counted down only when the thread has passed through the thread of step S20902. After executing step S20902, the process advances to step S20903.

  In step S20903, it is determined whether the fluctuating time of the first symbol display unit has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first variable time counter PTC1 that has been down-counted by the process of step S20902 has become 0. If it is determined in step S20903 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit has ended (S20903: YES), the process advances to step S20904 to stop the fluctuation of the first symbol display unit. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20905.

  In step S20905, the first variable flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20906.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20903 that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display unit has not ended (S20903: NO), the first fluctuation stop processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S20901 that the first changing flag is not ON (S20901: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S20906.

  In step S20906, a first symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The first symbol stop display time is a time during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed. In step S20906, the first symbol stop display time is set. However, if the first symbol stop display time has already been set, the setting is not performed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol stop display time of all the first starting port game times is set to the same length of time. After executing Step S20906, Step S20907 is executed.

  In step S20907, a first symbol stop display time measurement process is executed. Specifically, a counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time is down-counted. In this process, the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time is counted down every time the thread passes through the thread of step S20907. After executing Step S20907, the process proceeds to Step S20908.

  In step S20908, it is determined whether the first symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of a counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time has become zero. In step S20908. If it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has ended (S20908: YES), the process proceeds to step S20909. On the other hand, in step S20908. If it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has not ended (S20908: NO), the first variation stop processing ends.

  In step S20909, the first game execution flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S20910.

  In step S20910, it is determined whether the big hit flag (big hit flag corresponding to each big hit type) or the small hit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S20910 that the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (S20910: YES), the flow proceeds to step S20911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20910 that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (S20910: NO), the first variation stop processing ends as it is.

  In step S20911, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S20912 to set an opening / closing execution mode start command, and then ends the first variation stop process.

<Variation start processing for second starting port>
Next, the variation start process for the second starting port will be described. The variation start process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game control process (FIG. 95: S20406).

  FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the variation start process for the second starting port. In step S21001, it is determined whether or not the second start suspension count RbN = 0. If it is determined in step S21001 that the second start suspended count RbN is not 0 (S21001: NO), the flow proceeds to step S21002. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21001 that the second start suspended number RbN = 0 (S21001: YES), the fluctuation start process for the second start port ends.

  In step S21002, a second start-up opening hold information shift process is performed. In the second starting port hold information shift processing, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is shifted. The details of the second starting port hold information shift processing will be described later. After executing Step S21002, the process proceeds to Step S21003.

  In step S21003, a determination process for the second starting port is performed. In the determination processing for the second starting port, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, a hit / non-judgment judgment for judging the presence or absence of a big hit or a small hit, and the big hit type is sorted. A distribution determination and a reach determination for determining whether or not a reach has occurred are performed. The details of the determination process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing Step S21003, the process proceeds to Step S21004.

  In step S21004, a process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting port is performed. In the setting process of the fluctuation time for the second starting port, the fluctuation time which is the time from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol to the stop of the symbol is set. The details of the process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting port will be described later. After executing Step S21004, the process proceeds to Step S21005.

  In step S21005, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and also includes a reach. Information on the presence / absence of occurrence and information on the fluctuation time set in step S21004 are included. After executing Step S21005, the process proceeds to Step S21006.

  In step S21006, a second type command is set. The second type command includes information on the presence or absence of a big hit and information on the big hit type. Specifically, the second type command includes 2R-probable jackpot information, 2R normal jackpot information, small jackpot information, or missed information.

  The variation command and the second type command set in steps S21005 and S21006 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal processing (FIG. 94). The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and the second type command, and controls various devices such that the determined effect is executed. After executing step S21006, the process proceeds to step S21007.

  In step S21007, the variable display on the second symbol display section 37b is started, and the flow advances to step S21008 to turn on the second game execution flag. After that, the process advances to step S21009 to turn on the second variable flag.

  The second game execution flag is set to ON when the second start opening game round is started, the variable display in the second symbol display section 37b is stopped, and the symbol display is stopped. This flag is turned off when the second symbol display stop time is over. On the other hand, the second fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned on when the second start-port game round is started, and is turned off when the fluctuating display on the second symbol display unit 37b becomes a stop display. .

  After executing Step S21009, the process proceeds to Step S21010.

  In step S21010, the value of the game number counter PNC is decremented by one. When the high frequency support mode is started, a value is set in the game number counter PNC, and the counter value is decremented by one every time the game is executed. After executing step S21010, the fluctuation start process for the second start-up port ends.

<Second starting port hold information shift processing>
Next, a description will be given of the second start-up port hold information shift process. The second startup opening hold information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 101: S21002) of the second startup opening change start process.

  FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the second start-up port hold information shift processing. In step S21101, 1 is subtracted from the second start suspended number RbN in the second suspended area Rb. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21102.

  In step S21102, the data (reservation information) stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21103.

  In step S21103, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the order of the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. After executing Step S21103, the suspension information shift processing ends.

<Judgment process for second starting port>
Next, the determination process for the second starting port will be described. The determination process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 101: S21003) of the variation starting process for the second starting port.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the second starting port. In step S21201, it is determined whether the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high-probability mode in the MPU 62. In the present embodiment, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the winning of the probability change jackpot. Is turned off at the end of the open / close execution mode related to the normal jackpot winning. If it is determined in step S2201 that the mode is the high probability mode (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S21202.

  In step S21202, a right / wrong determination is made with reference to a second-start-port hit / fail table (for the high-probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the hit / fail table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. 87B. It is determined whether or not the values match. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2201 that the mode is not the high-probability mode (S2201: NO), the process advances to step S21203.

  In step S21203, a right / wrong determination is made with reference to a second-start-port hit / fail table (for the low-probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as the jackpot in the hit / fail table (for the low probability mode) for the second starting port shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the values match. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21204.

  In step S21204, it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in step S21202 or S21203 is a jackpot. If it is determined in step S21204 that the result of the hit determination is a big hit (S21204: YES), the process proceeds to step S21205.

  In step S21205, it is determined whether the probability change or normal big hit flag for the first starting port is ON. If it is determined in step S21205 that the probability change or the normal jackpot flag for the first start-up port is ON (S21205: YES), the process proceeds to step S21218, and the stop indicating the lottery result of the game time for the second start-up port is performed. Set the symbol as a stop symbol for removal. Thereafter, the determination process for the second starting port is terminated. In other words, at the start of the fluctuation of the second opening game round, if the first jackpot winning game round is being executed, the stop symbol opening / closing execution mode of the second startup game round is not executed. Set to a combination of symbols.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21205 that the probability change or the normal jackpot flag for the first starting port is not ON (S21205: NO), the process proceeds to step S21206.

  In step S21206, the distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 88B). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in the numerical range of any jackpot type. After executing Step S21206, the process proceeds to Step S21207.

  In step S21207, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination in step S21206 (big hit type) is a probability change big hit. If it is determined in step S21207 that the assigned jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot (S21207: YES), the flow proceeds to step S21208.

  In step S21208, the probability change big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S21206 is turned ON. After executing Step S21208, the process proceeds to Step S21209.

  In step S21209, a stop symbol setting process for the probability change big hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the probability change jackpot, the second symbol display unit 37b sets which stop result is to be displayed (stop display) in a state where the stop result is displayed in the current game round which is the probability change jackpot. Execute the process for Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step S21206 is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the probability change jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, and The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S21209, the determination process for the second starting port is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S21207 that the assigned jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot (S21207: NO), that is, if the assigned jackpot type is the normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S21210.

  In step S21210, the normal big hit flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S21206 is turned ON. After executing Step S21210, the process proceeds to Step S21211.

  In step S21211, a stop symbol setting process for a normal big hit is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the normal jackpot, the second symbol display unit 37b sets which stop result is to be displayed (stop display) in the second symbol display unit 37b in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is performed. Execute the process for Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step S21206 is obtained by referring to the stop result table for the normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21211, the determination process for the second start-up port ends.

  If it is determined in step S21204 that the result of the hit determination in step S21202 or step S21203 is not a jackpot (S21204: NO), the process proceeds to step S21212.

  In step S21212, it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in step S21202 or S21203 is a small hit. If it is determined in step S21212 that the result of the hit determination is a small hit (S21212: YES), the process proceeds to step S21213.

  In step S21213, the small hit flag is turned ON. After executing Step S21213, the process proceeds to Step S21214.

  In step S21214, a stop symbol setting process for small hits is executed. In the small hit stop symbol setting process, in the current game time when a small hit is made, the second symbol display unit 37b sets which stop result is displayed (stop display) with the stop result displayed. Execute the process for Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the small hit is acquired by referring to the small hit stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, and the address information is stored in the RAM 64. It is stored in the stop result address storage area. After executing step S21214, the second starting port determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S21212 that the result of the hit determination is not a small hit (S21212: NO), the process proceeds to step S21215.

  In step S21215, the reach determination is performed with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 with reference to the reach. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as occurrence of reach in the referred reach determination table. The process of step S21215 is executed when the result of the hit determination (winning lottery) in step S21204 is not a big hit. That is, in step S21215, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination is a game time in which a reach occurs among the game times that are not a big hit. After executing Step S21215, the process proceeds to Step S21216.

  In step S21216, it is determined whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S21215 is that reach has occurred. If it is determined in step S21216 that a reach has occurred (S21216: YES), the flow advances to step S21217 to turn on the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64. After executing Step S21217, the process proceeds to Step S21218.

  In step S21218, a departure stop symbol setting process is executed. In the departure stop symbol setting process, in the current game time when the departure occurs, the second symbol display part 37b is used to set which of the stop results is displayed and the variable display is terminated (stop display). Execute the process. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is referred to by referring to the stop result table for departure in the stop result table storage area 63e. The obtained address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing Step S21218, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

<Process for setting fluctuation time for second starting port>
Next, the process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting port will be described. The process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 101: S21004) of the fluctuation starting process for the second starting port.

  FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the fluctuation time for the second starting port. In step S21301, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21302.

  In step S21302, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21302 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (S21302: NO), the process proceeds to step S21303.

  In step S21303, a low probability fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed. The low-probability-variation-time information acquiring process is a process of acquiring variation time information of the second start-port game time when the second start-port game time is executed when the lottery mode is the low-probability mode. . Specifically, in the case where the game is being advanced in step F101 and the game is being advanced in step F105 in FIG. 90, when the game rotation for the second startup port is executed, the second startup port is executed. This is the process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times. Details of the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described later. After executing Step S21303, the process proceeds to Step S21307.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21302 that the high probability mode flag is ON (S21302: YES), the flow advances to step S21304.

  In step S21304, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21304 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (S21304: YES), the process advances to step S21305.

  In step S21305, high-precision and high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed. When the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed for the second start port. This is a process of acquiring fluctuation time information of game times. Specifically, in the case where the game is being advanced in step F110 and the game is being advanced in step F113 in FIG. This is the process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times. Details of the highly-accurate and high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described later. After executing step S21305, the process proceeds to step S21307.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21304 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (S21304: NO), the process proceeds to step S21306.

  In step S21306, a high-accuracy low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed. When the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the high-accuracy low-frequency-variation-time information acquisition process is performed for the second startup port when the game cycle for the second startup port is executed. This is a process of acquiring fluctuation time information of game times. Specifically, in the process of acquiring the variation time information of the second start port game time when the game time for the second start port is executed in the game progress state of step F116 in FIG. is there. The details of the highly accurate low frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described later. After executing Step S21306, the process proceeds to Step S21307.

  In step S21307, the variable time information acquired in each process of step S21303, step S21305, and step S21306 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting port is completed.

<Low accuracy fluctuation time information acquisition processing>
Next, the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described. The low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S21303) of the fluctuation time setting processing for the second starting port.

  As described above, the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed when the game start state for the second start port is in the game progress state in step F101 and the game progress state in step F105 in FIG. If so, this is the process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the second starting port game times. That is, a period in which a game ball is normally thrown into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) and the first starting port is executed. This is a process executed when a right-handed player hits a game ball into the second starting port 34 to execute the second starting port game cycle. Since there is a possibility that the act of trying to obtain a privilege during a period that should not be obtained by the small hit winning may have been performed, in order to prevent the act, it is acquired in the low probability fluctuation time information acquisition process The fluctuation time information (variation time) is set to a relatively long time. Hereinafter, the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart illustrating the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing. In step S21401, it is determined whether the result of the success / failure determination regarding the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON. If any of the flags is ON (S21401: YES), the process proceeds to step S21402.

  In step S21402, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for low probability large hits stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for low probability big hits is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value obtained as the variation time is 7 minutes. After executing step S21402, the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing ends.

  In step S21401, when it is determined that the result of the hit determination regarding the current game round is not a big hit (step S21401: NO), the process proceeds to step S21403.

  In step S21403, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. If it is determined in step S21403 that a reach occurs in the current game round (step S21403: YES), the flow advances to step S21404.

  In step S21404, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for low-probability reach stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time table for low-probability reach generation is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value obtained as the fluctuation time is 7 minutes. After executing step S21404, the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S21403 that no reach occurs in the current game round (step S21403: NO), the flow advances to step S21405.

  In step S21405, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for low-probability reach non-occurrence stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the low-probability-reach non-occurrence fluctuation time table is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value obtained as the fluctuation time is 7 minutes. . After executing step S21405, the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing ends.

  As described above, the fluctuation time information acquired in the low probability fluctuation time information acquisition processing is set to a relatively long time.

<High-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing>
Next, the high-accuracy high-frequency time-varying-time information acquiring process will be described. The high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S21305) of the fluctuation time setting processing for the second starting port.

  As described above, the highly-accurate and high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is performed when the game progress state of step F110 in FIG. 90 and the game progress state of step F113 in FIG. Is executed, the variable time information of the second starting port game time is acquired. That is, a period in which a game ball is normally thrown into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) and the first starting port is executed. This is a process executed when a right-handed player hits a game ball into the second starting port 34 to execute the second starting port game cycle. Since there is a possibility that an attempt is made to obtain a privilege during a period that should not be obtained by small hits winning, it is necessary to acquire in the highly accurate and high frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing to prevent such an act The fluctuating time information (fluctuating time) is set to a relatively long time. Note that the average value of the fluctuation time acquired in the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is set to a value shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time acquired in the low-precision fluctuation time information acquisition processing. This is because the period during which the high-probability high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed is more advantageous to the player when compared with the period during which the low-probability time fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed. The reason is that the unfairness of the act of the player performing the second start-up game round and obtaining a profit by winning a small hit is not so large as in the case of the certain time fluctuation time information acquisition processing. Hereinafter, the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing. In step S21501, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination regarding the current game round is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probable variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON. If any of the flags is ON (S21501: YES), the process proceeds to step S21502.

  In step S <b> 2502, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the fluctuation time table for high-accuracy and high-frequency jackpot stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63 d of the ROM 63. In the present embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for the high-accuracy high-frequency jackpot is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value obtained as the variation time is 3 minutes. . After executing step S2152, the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S21501 that the result of the hit determination regarding the current game round is not a big hit (step S21501: NO), the process proceeds to step S21503.

  In step S21503, it is determined whether or not reach occurs in the current game round. In step S21503, if it is determined that a reach occurs in the current game round (step S21503: YES), the process proceeds to step S21504.

  In step S21504, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the fluctuation time table for high-reliability high frequency reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. . In the present embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for high-reliability high-frequency reach generation is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value obtained as the variation time is 3 minutes. is there. After executing step S21504, the high-accuracy high-frequency variation time information acquisition processing ends.

  In step S21503, when it is determined that no reach occurs in the current game round (step S21503: NO), the process proceeds to step S21505.

  In step S21505, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table for non-reach occurrence at the time of high accuracy and high frequency stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. I do. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time table for non-occurrence at high probability and high frequency reach is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value obtained as the fluctuation time is 3 minutes. It is. After executing step S21505, the high-accuracy / high-frequency-variation-time information acquisition process ends.

  As described above, the fluctuation time information acquired in the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is set to a relatively long time, but the fluctuation time acquired in the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is The average value is set to a value shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time acquired in the low-probability-time fluctuation time information acquisition processing.

<High-accuracy low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing>
Next, the high-accuracy low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described. The highly-accurate low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S21306) of the fluctuation time setting processing for the second starting port.

  As described above, the high-accuracy low-frequency-variation-time information acquiring process is performed when the game for the second start-up port is executed in the game progress state of step F116 in FIG. This is the process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the game times. That is, during the period in which the special bonus process is being performed, the process is performed when the player hits the game ball into the second starting port 34 by right-handing to execute the second starting port game round. This is processing in accordance with the flow of the original game. The variation time information (variation time) acquired in the highly accurate low frequency variation time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Hereinafter, the high-accuracy low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing will be described.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the high-accuracy low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing. In step S21601, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination regarding the current game round is a small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON, and if the small hit flag is ON (S21601: YES), the flow proceeds to step S21602. In addition, during the period of the special bonus process in which the high-accuracy low-frequency variation time information acquisition process is executed, at the start of the variation of the second start-port game time, the first start-port game time that has won the jackpot is being executed. Therefore, the symbols of the second starting port game times are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols for which the opening / closing execution mode is not executed (see FIG. 103 / S21205: NO). Therefore, during the period of the special bonus process in which the high-accuracy low-frequency-variation-time information acquisition process is executed, the second start opening game time does not win a big hit, which is different from the processes in FIGS. 104 and 105. There is no processing for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won.

  In step S21602, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the high-precision low-frequency hourly small fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. . In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the high-accuracy low-frequency hourly small fluctuation time table is a value between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, and the average value obtained as the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. is there. After executing step S2502, the high-accuracy low-frequency-variation-time information acquiring process ends.

  In step S21601, when it is determined that the result of the hit determination regarding the current game round is not a small hit (step S21601: NO), the process proceeds to step S21603.

  In step S21603, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the high-precision low-frequency non-small-hit fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. I do. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the high-accuracy low-frequency non-small hit fluctuation time table is a value between 1 second and 3 seconds, and the average value obtained as the fluctuation time is 2 seconds. It is. After executing step S21603, the high-accuracy low-frequency-variation-time information acquisition process ends.

  As described above, the fluctuation time information (variation time) acquired in the highly accurate low frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing is set to a very short time. Therefore, a plurality of second start-up game times can be executed during the execution period of the special bonus process, i.e., during a period in which the first start-up game time for which the big hit has been won is executed. As a result, the player can acquire the privilege during the execution of the first start-up game round by winning a plurality of small wins.

<Second fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stop processing will be described. The second fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game control process (FIG. 95: S20407).

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the second fluctuation stop processing. In step S21701, it is determined whether the second variable flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21701 that the second fluctuating flag is ON (S21701: YES), the process advances to step S21702.

  In step S21702, a second variation time measurement process is performed. Specifically, the second variation time counter PTC2 for measuring the variation time of the second start port game time (the variation time of the second symbol display unit) is down-counted. In this process, the value of the second fluctuation time counter PTC2 is counted down every time the thread passes through the thread of step S21702. That is, the value of the second variable time counter PTC2 is down-counted only when passing through the thread, instead of continuously counting down after passing through the thread in step S21702. After executing Step S21702, the process proceeds to Step S21703.

  In step S21703, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the second variable time counter PTC2, which is down-counted by the process of step S21702, has become zero. If it is determined in step S21703 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit has ended (S21703: YES), the process proceeds to step S21704, and the fluctuation of the second symbol display unit is stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21705.

  In step S21705, the second variable flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21706.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21703 that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display unit has not ended (S21703: NO), the second fluctuation stop processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S21701 that the second variable flag is not ON (S21701: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S21706.

  In step S21706, a second symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The second symbol stop display time is a time during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed. In step S21706, a second symbol stop display time is set. However, if the second symbol stop display time has already been set, the setting is not performed. In the present embodiment, the second symbol stop display time of all the second starting port game times is set to the same length of time. After executing Step S21706, Step S21707 is executed.

  In step S21707, a second symbol stop display time measuring process is executed. Specifically, the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time is down-counted. In this process, the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time is counted down every time the thread passes through the thread of step S21707. After executing Step S21707, the process proceeds to Step S21708.

  In step S21708, it is determined whether the second symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of a counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time has become zero. In step S21708. If it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has ended (S21708: YES), the process proceeds to step S21709. On the other hand, in step S21708. If it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has not ended (S21708: NO), the second fluctuation stop processing ends.

  In step S21709, the second game execution flag is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21710.

  In step S21710, it is determined whether the big hit flag (big hit flag according to each big hit type) or the small hit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21710 that the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (S21710: YES), the process proceeds to step S21711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21710 that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (S21710: NO), the second variation stop processing ends as it is.

  In step S21711, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S21712 to set the opening / closing execution mode start command, and then ends the second fluctuation stop processing.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal processing (FIG. 94: S20306).

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step S21801, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening / closing processing period in the opening / closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and is turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing an ending effect in the open / close execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S21801 that the ending period flag is not ON (S21801: NO), the process advances to step S21802 to determine whether the open / close processing period flag is ON. As described above, the open / close processing period flag is turned on when the game state is shifted to the open / close processing period, and is turned off when the open / close processing period is ended.

  If it is determined in step S21802 that the opening / closing processing period flag is not ON (S21802: NO), the process advances to step S21803 to determine whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period, and is turned off at the end of the opening period.

  If it is determined in step S21803 that the opening period flag is not ON (S21803: NO), the process advances to step S21804 to determine whether the open / close execution mode flag is ON. The opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on when the game that triggered the start of the opening / closing execution mode ends, and turned off when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  If it is determined in step S21804 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S21804: YES), the process advances to step S21805. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21804 that the open / close execution mode flag is not ON (S21804: NO), the game state transition processing ends.

  In step S21805, it is determined whether it is a small hit. Specifically, by determining whether the small hit flag is ON or not, it is determined whether the opportunity to start the open / close execution mode is a small hit winning. If it is determined in step S21805 that it is not a small hit (S21805: NO), the process advances to step S21806.

  In step S21806, the high probability mode flag is turned off. In step S21805, it is determined that the game result of the current game round (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small hit, and thus the result of the round lottery in the current game round is a big hit. The high-probability mode flag is turned off in order to change the lottery mode in the open / close execution mode, which is executed when the jackpot has been won, to the low-probability mode. After executing Step S21806, the process proceeds to Step S21807.

  In step S21807, the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. In step S21805, it is determined that the game result of the current game round (the result of the winning lottery) is not a small hit, and thus the result of the round lottery in the current game round is a big hit. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned off in order to change the support mode during the execution of the opening / closing execution mode that is executed when the jackpot is won to the low-frequency support mode. After executing Step S21807, the process proceeds to Step S21808.

  In step S21808, a jackpot opening / closing execution mode command is set. The jackpot opening / closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening / closing execution mode is started in response to the jackpot winning. The jackpot opening / closing execution mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output processing of the normal processing (FIG. 94: step S20302). After executing Step S21808, the process proceeds to Step S21809.

  In step S21809, an open / close execution mode start command is set. The opening / closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening / closing execution mode is started when a big hit is won or when a small hit is triggered. That is, the opening / closing execution mode start command is set when the opening / closing execution mode is started irrespective of a big hit or a small hit. The opening / closing execution mode start command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 94: step S20302). After executing step S21809, the process proceeds to step S21810.

  In step S21810, an open / close scenario setting process is executed. The open / close scenario setting process is a process for setting an open / close scenario in which an open pattern of the open / close door 36b in a round game is set. The opening / closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing Step S21810, the process proceeds to Step S21811.

  In step S21811, an opening time setting process is performed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as an opening time). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing Step S21811, the process proceeds to Step S21812.

  In step S21812, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal processing (FIG. 94). The opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the jackpot type, and information on the jackpot or the small jackpot that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode this time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S21812, the process advances to step S21813 to turn on the opening period flag. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S21803 that the opening period flag is ON (S21803: YES), the process advances to step S21814.

  In step S21814, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third timer counter area T3 set in the opening time setting processing is “0”. If it is determined in step S21814 that the opening period has ended (S21814: YES), the flow advances to step S21815 to turn off the opening period flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S21816.

  In step S21816, a round display start process for notifying the type of the current open / close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display unit 39. After executing Step S21816, the process proceeds to Step S21817.

  In step S21817, the open / close processing period flag is set to ON. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S21802 that the opening / closing processing period flag is ON (S21802: YES), the flow advances to step S21818 to execute the special winning opening / closing processing. The special winning opening opening and closing process will be described later. After executing Step S21818, the process proceeds to Step S21819.

  In step S21819, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening / closing process has been completed. If it is determined that the special winning opening opening / closing process has been completed (S21819: YES), the process proceeds to step S21820. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21819 that the special winning opening opening / closing process has not been completed (S21819: NO), the present game state transition process ends.

  In step S21820, the open / close processing period flag is turned off, and the process advances to step S21821.

  In step S21821, a round display end process is executed. In this process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 of the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing Step S21821, the process proceeds to Step S21822.

  In step S21822, an ending time setting process is performed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting a time length of an ending period (hereinafter, also referred to as an ending time) in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 as the ending time. After executing Step S21822, the process proceeds to Step S21823.

  In step S21823, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). The sound emission control device 90 starts an effect corresponding to the ending period based on receiving the ending command. After executing Step S21823, the process proceeds to Step S21824.

  In step S21824, the ending period flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S21801 that the ending period flag is ON (S21801: YES), the process advances to step S21825.

  In step S21825, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21822), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0”. If it is determined in step S21825 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (S21825: YES), the process proceeds to step S21826.

  In step S21826, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S21827 to execute a transition process at the end of the ending period. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the end of the current ending period. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21827, the process advances to step S21828 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. After that, the flow advances to step S21829 to set an open / close execution mode end command. The opening / closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the opening / closing execution mode has ended. The open / close execution mode end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). Thereafter, the present game state transition processing ends.

  On the other hand, in step S21825, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not “0” (S21825: NO), the present game state transition processing ends as it is.

<Opening / closing scenario setting process>
Next, an opening / closing scenario setting process will be described. The opening / closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 109: S21810).

  FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the opening / closing scenario setting process. In step S21901, it is determined whether the big hit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21901 that the big hit flag is ON (S21901: YES), the process proceeds to step S21902.

  In step S21902, a jackpot opening / closing scenario is set according to the type of jackpot. The opening and closing scenario is a program in which an opening pattern of the opening and closing door 36b in the round game is set. After executing step S21902, the open / close scenario setting process ends.

  If it is determined in step S21901 that the big hit flag is not ON (S21901: NO), the process advances to step S21903.

  In step S21903, a small hit opening / closing scenario is set. In the present embodiment, an opening / closing pattern in which the opening / closing door 36b opens and closes once in a round game is set in the small hit opening / closing scenario. After executing Step S21903, the main open / close scenario setting process ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 109: S21811).

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S22001, it is determined whether or not the trigger of the current open / close execution mode is a jackpot winning. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON.

  If it is determined in step S22001 that the opening / closing execution mode has been triggered by the jackpot (S22001: YES), the flow advances to step S22002.

  In step S22002, 3000 (approximately 6.0 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process ends.

  On the other hand, in step S22001, if it is determined that the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit, that is, if it is determined that the trigger of the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit (S22001: NO), the process proceeds to step S22001. The process proceeds to S22003.

  In step S22003, 0 (0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. After that, the opening time setting process ends.

<Grand Prize opening and closing process>
Next, the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition process (FIG. 109: S21818).

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening and closing process. In step S2211, it is determined whether the opening / closing door 36b is being opened. If it is determined in step S2211 that the opening / closing door 36b is not being opened (S22101: NO), the process proceeds to step S22102.

  In step S22102, it is determined whether an opening condition of the door 36b is satisfied. Specifically, the opening / closing scenario set by the opening / closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether or not it is time to open the opening / closing door 36b. If it is determined in step S22102 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied (S22102: YES), the process proceeds to step S22103.

  In step S22103, the door 36b is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22104.

  In step S22104, an open / close door open command is set. The opening / closing door opening command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has been opened. The opening / closing door opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 94: S20302). After executing Step S22104, the main winning opening opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S22102 that the opening condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (S22102: NO), the main winning opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2211 that the door 36b is being opened (S22101: YES), the process proceeds to step S22105.

  In step S22105, it is determined whether the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is satisfied. As for the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b, it is detected that the continuation opening time of the opening / closing door 36b set in the opening / closing scenario has elapsed or that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the special winning opening 36a. Holds if. If it is determined in step S22105 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b has been satisfied (S22105: YES), the process proceeds to step S22106.

  In step S22106, the door 36b is closed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22107.

  In step S22107, a door closing command is set. The opening / closing door closing command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the opening / closing door 36b has closed. The opening / closing door closing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 94: S20302). After executing step S22107, the main winning opening opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S22105 that the closing condition of the opening / closing door 36b is not satisfied (S22105: NO), the main winning opening / closing process ends.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, transition processing at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game state transition processing (FIG. 109: S21827).

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S22201, it is determined whether or not the opportunity to shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, when any one of the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the opportunity to shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S22201 that the opportunity to shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a jackpot (S22201: YES), the process proceeds to step S22202, and the opportunity to shift to the current opening / closing execution mode is a probable jackpot. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, when the probability change big hit flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode at this time is the probability change big hit.

  If it is determined in step S22202 that the opportunity to shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S22203. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22202 that the trigger of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode this time is not the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S22212.

  In step S22203, the corresponding variable jackpot flag is turned off. Specifically, a process of turning off the ON flag among the 10R variable jackpot flag and the 2R variable flag is executed. After executing Step S22203, the process proceeds to Step S22204.

  In step S22204, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned on. As a result, after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / rejecting lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing Step S22204, the process proceeds to Step S22205.

  In step S22205, it is determined whether the specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON. If it is determined in step S22205 that the specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON (S22205: YES), the process proceeds to step S22209.

  In step S22209, the specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned off. Then, in step S22210, the specific processing flag is turned ON. After executing step S22210, the process advances to step S22211 to set a specific processing command. The specific processing command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the specific processing (special bonus processing) is to be executed. The specific processing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal processing (FIG. 94). After executing Step S22211, the process proceeds to Step S22206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22205 that the specific probability variable jackpot flag is not ON (S22205: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S22206.

  In step S22206, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The high probability mode command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the winning / rejecting lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode. After performing step 06, the process proceeds to step 07.

  In step S22207, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. After that, the flow advances to step S22208 to set a high frequency support mode command. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal processing (FIG. 94). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

  If it is determined in step S22202 that the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode this time is not the probability change jackpot (S22202: NO), the process advances to step S22212 to turn off the corresponding normal jackpot flag. After executing Step S22212, the process proceeds to Step S22213.

  In step S22213, the low probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The low-probability mode command is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the low-probability mode. After executing Step S22213, the process proceeds to Step S22214.

  In step S22214, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. After that, the flow advances to step S22215 to set 100 as a counter value in the number-of-games counter PNC. After performing Step S22215, the process proceeds to Step S22216.

  In step S22216, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the sound emission control device 90 that the support mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal processing (FIG. 94). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

  In step S22201, if it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is not a big hit (S22201: NO), that is, if the trigger for shifting to the current opening / closing execution mode is a small hit, Proceeding to S22217, the small hit flag is turned off. After executing step S22217, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Process for electrical support>
Next, a description will be given of the processing for supporting electric power. The electric power support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 94: S20307).

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the process for supporting the electric hand. In step S22301, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The supporting flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 is opened, and is turned OFF when the electric accessory 44a is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S22301 that the support flag is not ON (S22301: NO), the flow advances to step S22302.

  In step S22302, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is set to ON when the open state is selected in the electric accessory opening lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 44a is set to the open state, and is set to OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step S2302 that the support winning flag is not ON (S22302: NO), the process advances to step S22303.

  In step S22303, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  If it is determined in step S22303 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S22330: NO), the present electric power support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S22330: YES), the process proceeds to step S22304.

  In step S22304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the symbol change display in the ordinary figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S22304 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S22304: YES), the process advances to step S22305 to set the out-of-range display, and then ends the present electric power support process. By setting the off display, the change display of the symbol in the ordinary figure unit 38 is terminated in a state where the off display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22304 that the timing is not the end timing of the variable display (S22304: NO), the process proceeds to step S22306.

  In step S22306, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved items SN is greater than “0”. If it is determined in step S22306 that the value of the number of held items SN is “0” (S22306: NO), the present electronic role support processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22306 that the value of the number of reserved items SN is larger than “0” (S22306: YES), the process proceeds to step S22307.

  In step S22307, it is determined whether the operation mode is the open / close execution mode. After that, the process advances to step S22308 to determine whether the operation mode is the high-frequency support mode. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode in step S22307 (S22307: NO), and if the high frequency support mode is in step S22308 (S22308: YES), the flow proceeds to step S22309 to perform an electric accessory opening lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electric-power-use holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric-power-goods opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric-power-use item opening lottery is performed. Wins. In addition, "750" (that is, 1.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the opening of the motor-driven accessory. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing is started. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22310.

  In step S22310, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S22309 is a support winning. In step S22310, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (S22310: YES), the process proceeds to step S22311, where the support win flag is turned ON and provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 44a is opened. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22312. On the other hand, in step S22310, when it is determined that the result of the motorized accessory opening lottery is not the support winning (S22310: NO), the process proceeds to step S22312 without executing the process of step S22311.

  In step S22312, it is determined whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S22312 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode (S22312: YES), the process proceeds to step S22313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22312 that the winning / rejecting lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S22312: NO), the present electrical role support process ends.

  In step S22313, it is determined whether the number-of-games counter area is "0". In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game number counter is decremented by one each time one game is completed. In step S22313, if it is determined that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S22313: NO), the present electric power support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22313 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the flow advances to step S22314 to turn off the high frequency support mode flag. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22315.

  In step S22315, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. I do. After that, the processing for electric role support ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S22315 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 94: S20302). The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on the reception of the low-frequency support command, and executes a process corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S22307 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S22307: YES), or if it is determined in step S22308 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S22308: NO), the process proceeds to step S22316 to open the electric accessory. I do. Specifically, the value stored in the electric-power-use holding area 64d is shifted, and when the value of the electric-power-goods opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric-power-use item opening lottery is performed. Wins. Also, "14750" (that is, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the opening of the electric accessory. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22317.

  In step S22317, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S22316 is a support winning. If it is determined in step S22317 that the support has not been won (S22317: NO), the present electric power support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22317 that the support has been won (S22317: YES), the flow advances to step S22318 to turn on the support win flag and set “1” in the second round counter area RC2. Then, the processing for electric power support is ended.

  If it is determined in step S22302 that the support winning flag is ON (S22302: YES), the flow advances to step S22319 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure unit 38. In step S22319, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22319: NO), since the display of the pattern is being changed and displayed in the general-purpose unit 38, the process for supporting the electric power as it is is performed. To end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S22319: YES), the process proceeds to step S22320.

  In step S22320, a winning display is set. Thus, the variation display of the pattern in the ordinary figure unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped and displayed. After that, the process advances to step S22321 to turn on the support flag and turn off the support winning flag. Thereafter, the processing for electric power support is completed.

  If it is determined in step S22301 that the supporting flag is ON (S22301: YES), the flow advances to step S22322 to execute an electric utility opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 44a. Thereafter, the processing for electric power support is completed.

<Electronic opening / closing processing>
Next, the electrical opening / closing process will be described. The electric-power opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the electric-power support process (FIG. 114: S22322).

  FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the electrical opening / closing process. In step S22401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is being opened is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory drive unit 44b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is open (S22401: YES), the flow proceeds to step S22402.

  In step S22402, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S22402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22402: NO), the electric power opening / closing process ends as it is. That is, when the opening duration of the electric auditors product 44a has not ended, the electric-power opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S22402 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S22402: YES), the flow advances to step S22403 to perform a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to a closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 44a is "0", the electric accessory 44a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated this time. “250” is set in the second timer counter area T2, which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 44a. After executing Step S22403, the process proceeds to Step S22404.

  In step S22404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process advances to step S22405 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S22405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S22405: NO), the electric power opening / closing processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S22405: YES), the process advances to step S22406 to turn off the support flag. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  If it is determined in step S22401 that the electric accessory 44a is not being opened (S22401: NO), the flow advances to step S22407 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 44a. If it is determined in step S22407 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22407: NO), the electric-power-operated opening / closing processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22407 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S22407: YES), the flow advances to step S22408 to execute an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 44a to an open state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S22409.

  In step S22409, it is determined whether the mode is the open / close execution mode. If it is determined that the mode is not the open / close execution mode (S22409: NO), the process proceeds to step S22410 to determine whether the mode is the high frequency support mode. I do.

  If it is determined in step S22410 that the current mode is the high-frequency support mode (S22410: YES), the flow advances to step S22411 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 seconds) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22409 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S22409: YES), or if it is determined in step S22410 that the mode is not the high-frequency support mode (S22410: NO), the process proceeds to step S22412, and the second process is performed. "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electric-power-operated opening / closing process ends.

B5. Electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 116 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

  The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like are provided in a part of the area of the ROM 93.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like are provided. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 92 has an input port and an output port. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from main controller 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, the various lamps 47, and the display control device 100.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, a video RAM 107. Is installed. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG image data for a background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called an “rendering chip” because it is formed as an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to a rendering process. The VDP 105 adjusts respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, and the like to intervene in data reading and writing, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays the image data on the liquid crystal display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106 in a shared manner. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which JPEG format image data for a background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as a main MPU 62, a main ROM 63, and a main RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93, and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90 are referred to as a light MPU 92 and a sound light, respectively. The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called a display MPU 102.

B6. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the audio light emission control device and the display control device will be described. The processing executed in the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processes executed in the sound emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, a timer interrupt process executed in the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 will be described.

  FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S23101, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound-light RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62. The commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing Step S23101, the process proceeds to Step S23102.

  In step S23102, a state storage process is performed. The status storage process is a process of storing the status of the game being executed using a flag based on a command received from the main MPU 62. The state of the game stored as the flag is used for determining the effect to be executed. Details of the state storage processing will be described later. After executing step S23102, the process proceeds to step S23103.

  In step S23103, a display mode switching process is performed. The display mode switching process is a process of switching an area for displaying the first startup opening effect image and the second startup opening effect image. Specifically, the first start-up effect image is displayed in the main display area MA and the second start-up effect image is displayed in the sub-display area SA, and the second start-up effect effect is displayed in the main display area MA. A process is executed to switch between displaying an image and displaying the first startup effect image in the sub-display area SA. The effect image for the first starting opening includes a first liquid crystal design, and the effect image for the second starting opening includes a second liquid crystal design. Details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing Step S23103, the process proceeds to Step S23104.

  In step S23104, a special one game round effect process is executed. The special 1 game time effect process is a process for setting and executing an effect corresponding to the first start time game time. The details of the special one game round effect processing will be described later. After executing Step S23104, the process proceeds to Step S23105.

  In step S23105, a special second game rendition effect process is executed. The special-time game time effect process is a process of setting and executing an effect corresponding to the second start-port game time. The details of the special 2 game round effect processing will be described later. After executing step S23105, the process proceeds to step S23106.

  In step S23106, a special bonus effect setting process is executed. The special bonus effect setting process is a process for setting an effect to be executed during a period in which the special bonus process is being executed. Details of the special bonus effect setting process will be described later. After executing Step S23106, the process proceeds to Step S23107.

  In step S23107, other display processing is executed. The other display processing is processing for executing various settings related to display based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, a process for updating the number of holds displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is performed. After executing Step S23107, the process proceeds to Step S23108.

  In step S23108, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control processing, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read in the processing of steps S23103 to S23107. That is, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effect set in steps S23103 to S23107. After executing Step S23108, the process proceeds to Step S23109.

  In step S23109, an audio output control process for performing audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control processing, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read in the processing from step S23103 to step S23107. That is, the sound output of the speaker 46 is controlled so that the sound corresponding to the effect set in steps S23103 to S23107 is output. After executing step S23109, the timer interrupt process ends.

<Status storage processing>
Next, the state storage processing will be described. The state process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23102).

  FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the state storage processing. In step S23201, it is determined whether a specific probability variable jackpot command has been received from the main MPU 62. The specific probability variable jackpot command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the game round winning the specific probability variable jackpot. If it is determined in step S23201 that the specific probability variable jackpot command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23201: YES), the process proceeds to step S23202, and the sound light-side specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing Step S23202, the process proceeds to Step S23203.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23201 that the specific probability variable jackpot command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23201: NO), the flow directly proceeds to step S23203.

  In step S23203, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. The specific processing command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the end of the game round that has won the specific probability change jackpot and when the open / close execution mode corresponding to the specific probability change jackpot has ended. If it is determined in step S23203 that the specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23203: YES), the process advances to step S23204 to turn on the sound-light specific processing flag. After executing Step S23204, the process proceeds to Step S23205.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23203 that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23203: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S23205.

  In step S23205, it is determined whether or not a special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62. The special bonus start command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the game round when a special jackpot is won after the special round jackpot is won, and then the jackpot is won in the subsequent game round. If it is determined in step S23205 that a special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23205: YES), the process advances to step S23206 to turn off the sound-light-side specification processing flag. After that, the process advances to step S23207 to turn on the special bonus start flag. After executing step S23207, the process proceeds to step S23208.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23205 that the special bonus start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23205: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S23208.

  In step S23208, it is determined whether a jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has been received from the main MPU 62. The jackpot opening / closing execution mode command is transmitted from the main MPU 62 at the start of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot winning. If it is determined in step S23208 that the jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23208: YES), the process proceeds to step S23209.

  In step S23209, it is determined whether or not the special bonus start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23209 that the special bonus start flag is ON (S23209: YES), the process proceeds to step S23210. In step S23210, the special bonus start flag is turned off. Thereafter, the present state storage processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S23208 that the jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23208: NO), and when it is determined in step S23209 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (S23209). : NO), and this state storage processing is terminated as it is.

<Display mode switching process>
Next, the display mode switching process will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the sound light side MPU 92 of the sound light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interruption process (FIG. 117: S23103).

  FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching process. In step S23301, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received. If it is determined in step S23301 that a special bonus start command has been received (S23301: YES), the process advances to step S23302. In step S23302, the special 2 main display flag is turned on. The special 2 main display flag displays the first start-up effect image including the first liquid crystal design in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 and displays the second start-up effect image including the second liquid crystal design. When the image is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41, the display is turned off, and the effect image for the second starting opening including the second liquid crystal design is displayed on the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and This flag is turned ON when the first starting opening effect image including the liquid crystal design is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. In step S23302, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON when the special bonus process is started. As shown in FIG. 91, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, the second start-up game round is executed a plurality of times, and the lottery result in the second start-up game round is also a small hit for the player. In this embodiment, when the special bonus process is started, the special 2 main display flag is turned on. After executing Step S23302, the process proceeds to Step S23303.

  In step S23303, a special 2 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the special 2 main display command controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the second start-up effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, The effect image for the first opening including the liquid crystal design is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing Step S23303, the process proceeds to Step S23304.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23301 that the special bonus start command has not been received (S23301: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S23304.

  In step S23304, it is determined whether a jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has been received. If it is determined in step S23304 that the jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has been received (S23304: YES), the process proceeds to step S23305.

  In step S23305, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23305 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23305: YES), the process advances to step S23306 to turn off the special 2 main display flag. After that, the process advances to step S23307 to transmit the special 1 main display command to the display control device 100. That is, when the opening / closing execution mode is started in response to the winning of the jackpot, the effect image for the first starting port including the symbol for the first liquid crystal is displayed on the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 and the second liquid crystal is displayed. The display mode is such that the effect image for the second starting opening including the design is displayed in the sub-display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

  In the present embodiment, when a game is executed along a legitimate game flow, there is a low probability of winning a jackpot in the hit lottery in the second starting port game round, and the opening / closing execution mode executed upon the jackpot winning Has a high probability of winning the jackpot in the first starting game round. Therefore, when the open / close execution mode is executed due to the jackpot winning, the first start-up effect image including the first liquid crystal design is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

  In step S23307, the special main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100 as described above. The display control device 100 that has received the special 1 main display command controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 41 to display the first start-up opening effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 and the second display image. The effect image for the second starting opening including the liquid crystal design is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step S23307, the display mode switching process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S23304 that the jackpot opening / closing execution mode command has not been received (S23304: NO), and when it is determined in step S23305 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23305: NO). Then, the present display mode switching processing is terminated.

<Special 1 game rendition process>
Next, the special game play effect processing will be described. The special game play production process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23104).

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the special-purpose game effect production process. In step S23401, it is determined whether a special 1 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S23401 that the command for special 1 variation has been received (S23401: YES), the flow advances to step S23402.

  In step S23402, the special variation command received this time is read, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence or absence of the reach, and the variation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S23403.

  In step S23403, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23403 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23403: NO), the process advances to step S23404 to execute a special 1 effect pattern setting process for the main display area. The special effect pattern setting process for the main display area is a process of setting the contents of the advance effect and the reach effect to be displayed in the main display area MA based on the information read in step S23402. The details of the special effect pattern setting process for the main display area will be described later. After executing Step S23404, the process proceeds to Step S23406.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23403 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23403: YES), the process advances to step S23405 to execute a special 1 effect pattern setting process for the sub display area. Specifically, based on the information read in step S23402, the contents of the preview effect and the reach effect to be displayed in sub-display area SA are set.

  Here, the process of step S23405, that is, the process of setting the special effect pattern for the sub-display area is executed during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed. That is, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the first start-up opening effect image is displayed in the sub-display area SA. As described with reference to FIG. 91, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, the game time for the second start-up port is executed with a high probability that the game time for the second start-up port is executed during the execution of the game time for the first start-up port where the jackpot has been won. One round is won and a round game of one round is executed. Then, during a period in which the round game is executed in accordance with the small hit of the second start-up game time, the measurement of the game time of the first start-up game time is interrupted as an internal process of the main control device 60. Therefore, the display time of the first start-up effect image displayed in the sub-display area SA during this period is variable, and cannot be specified when the display of the first start-up effect image in the sub-display area SA is started. . Therefore, as the first start-up effect image to be displayed in the sub-display area SA, an image is set so as not to give a sense of incongruity to the player no matter at what timing the display ends. For example, an image in which the first liquid crystal design is monotonically changing without a story or an image in which a predetermined character repeats a monotonous operation is set. By doing so, it is possible to display the effect image for the first start-up opening in the sub-display area SA in which the display time is variable, without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  After executing Step S23405, the process proceeds to Step S23406.

  In step S23406, a process of setting a liquid crystal symbol to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the current game winning lottery is a big hit, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the activated line L (L1 or L2). Is set as information of the current liquid crystal design. If the result of the lottery of the current game is out of order, the presence / absence of the reach is determined from the content of the special 1 change command. If it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of the reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol is displayed on the activated line L (L1 or L2). Is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the active line L (L1 or L2), and the stop result is on the active line L (L1 or L2). Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is not established is set as information of the current liquid crystal symbol. After executing Step S23406, the process proceeds to Step S23407.

  In step S23407, a process for determining a fluctuation display pattern of the current game is executed. In this process, information on the fluctuation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the special 1 fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the liquid crystal symbol specified in step S23406 are used. Select a variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of. When selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S23407, the process proceeds to step S23408.

  In step S23408, a process of updating the suspension information is performed. In the update processing of the hold information, the information of the first hold number counter area is updated so that the first hold number stored in the first hold number counter area of the sound-light RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S23408, the process proceeds to step S23409.

  In step S23409, the special effect setting flag is turned ON. The special 1 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that an effect pattern, a stop liquid crystal design, a variable display pattern, and the like in the first starting opening game time are set. After executing Step S23409, the process proceeds to Step S23410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23401 that the command for changing the special 1 has not been received, the process proceeds directly to step S23410.

  In step S23410, a special game play effect execution process is executed. The special 1 game time effect execution process is a process of controlling the start and end of the change of the liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first start-up game time. The details of the special one game round effect execution processing will be described later. After executing Step S23410, the process proceeds to Step S23411.

  In step S23411, a special 1 variation time measurement process is executed. The special 1 change time measurement process is a process of measuring the time for changing and displaying the liquid crystal symbol of the game time for the first starting port. The details of the special 1 change time measuring process will be described later. After executing Step S23411, the special-purpose 1 game rendition effect processing is ended.

<Setting process of special 1 effect pattern for main display area>
Next, processing for setting a special effect pattern for the main display area will be described. The process of setting the special effect pattern for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special game effect effect process (S23404 in FIG. 120).

  FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the setting processing of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area. In step S23501, based on the received special variation command, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is a game time that has won a jackpot. If it is determined in step S23501 that the game time to be processed is the game time in which the jackpot has been won (S23501: YES), the flow advances to step S23502.

  In step S23502, it is determined whether or not the game time to be processed is a game time that has been won in the probability change jackpot, based on the received special variation command. If it is determined in step S23502 that the game time to be processed is the game time that has won the probability change jackpot (S23502: YES), the process proceeds to step S23503.

  In step S23503, it is determined whether or not the sound-light-side specific probability variable big hit flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23503 that the sound-light-specific specific variable jackpot flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined to be a 10R variable jackpot (step S23503: NO), the process proceeds to step S23504.

  In step S23504, an effect pattern for the probability change jackpot is set as the special effect pattern (effect image for the first starting opening) to be displayed in the main display area MA. After that, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

  If it is determined in step S23503 that the sound-light-side specific certainty variable jackpot flag is ON (S23503: YES), the flow advances to step S23505. In step S23505, an effect pattern for the specific probability big hit is set as a special effect pattern (effect image for the first starting opening) to be displayed in the main display area MA. After executing step S23505, the process proceeds to step S23506.

  In step S23506, the sound-light-side specific certainty variable big hit flag is turned off. After that, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

  Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the effect pattern for the probability-change jackpot set in step S23504 and the effect pattern for the specific probability-change jackpot set in step S23506 are the same or similar effect patterns. By doing so, it is difficult to distinguish whether the current jackpot is a probability-change jackpot or a specific probability-change jackpot, and the player is given an expectation as to which type of jackpot it is. Can be.

  If it is determined in step S23502 that the game time to be processed is not the game time that has won the probability change jackpot (S23502: NO), the process proceeds to step S23507.

  In step S23507, an effect pattern for a normal jackpot is set as a special effect pattern (effect image for the first starting opening) to be displayed in the main display area MA. After that, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

  If it is determined in step S23501 that the game time to be processed is not the game time that has won the jackpot, the process proceeds to step S23508.

  In step S23508, it is determined whether the sound-light-side specification processing flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23508 that the sound-light-side specification processing flag is not ON (S23508: NO), the process proceeds to step S23509.

  In step S23509, a special effect pattern (first start-up effect image) to be displayed in the main display area MA is set as a departure effect pattern. After that, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

  If it is determined in step S23508 that the sound-light-side specification processing flag is ON (S23508: YES), the flow advances to step S23510.

  In step S23510, a setting process of a stray effect pattern for a specific process is executed. The process is executed when the first start-up game round wins a specific probability jackpot, and after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the win ends, the first start-up game round is executed. is there. That is, the process is a process of setting a departure effect pattern in the first start-up game time executed during the period from time T3 to time T4 in FIG. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern that indicates that a special bonus process will be started when the next jackpot is won is set as the effect pattern for departure in the game cycle for the first start-up port executed during the period. adopt. By doing so, a sense of expectation can be given to the player. After that, the processing for setting the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

<Special 1 game round effect execution process>
Next, the special game effect rendering execution processing will be described. The special game play effect execution processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special game play effect processing (FIG. 120: S23410).

  FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the special-purpose game effect production execution process. In step S23601, it is determined whether or not the special 1 effect setting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23601 that the special 1 effect setting flag is ON (step S23601: YES), the flow advances to step S23602. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23601 that the special 1 effect setting flag is not ON (step S23601: NO), the special 1 game rendition effect executing process is terminated.

  In step S23602, it is determined whether or not the special 1 variable display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23602 that the special 1 variable display start flag is not ON (S23602: NO), the process advances to step S23603.

  In step S23603, a process of starting the change of the first liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, the various lamps 47, the display, and the like are displayed based on the effect pattern, the pattern for the stop liquid crystal, and the variation display pattern of the current game time set in steps S23404 to S23408 of the special-purpose game time effect processing. The operation contents of the control device 100 and the like are set. After executing Step S23603, the process proceeds to Step S23604.

  In step S23604, a first liquid crystal symbol change start command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Specifically, the information of the effect pattern, the symbol for the stopped liquid crystal, and the variation display pattern set in the current game time is set in the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command, and transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 uses the effect pattern based on the content of the first liquid crystal design variation start command, the design for the stop liquid crystal, and the variation display pattern as the first start-up effect image for the liquid crystal display device 41. It is displayed on the display surface 41a. After executing step S23604, the process proceeds to step S23605.

  In step S23605, the special 1 variable display start flag is turned on. Thereafter, the special special 1 game rendition effect execution processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S23602 that the special 1 variable display start flag is ON (S23602: YES), the process proceeds to step S23606.

  In step S23606, it is determined whether the value of the sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC1 is 0 or not. The sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC1 is a counter for measuring the variation time in the first starting port game time. The sound-light-side MPU 92 performs the first start-up by recognizing the timing at which the sound-light-side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 becomes 0 in a special-time fluctuation time measurement process described later. The timing at which the fluctuating time in the mouth game round ends is specified. If it is determined in step S23606 that the value of the sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC1 is 0 (S23606: YES), the flow advances to step S23607. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23606 that the value of the sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC1 is not 0 (S23606: NO), the game processing effect execution processing for the special 1 is terminated as it is.

  In step S23607, a process of ending the change of the first liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, various lamps 47, the display control device 100, and the like for terminating the change of the first liquid crystal symbol (displaying the stopped symbol) are set. After executing Step S23603, the process proceeds to Step S23608.

  In step S23608, a symbol change end command for the first liquid crystal is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command stops the first liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the first liquid crystal symbol change start command. After executing Step S23608, the process proceeds to Step S23609.

  In step S23609, the special 1 effect setting flag and the special 1 variable display start flag are turned off. Thereafter, the special special 1 game rendition effect execution processing ends.

<Variable time measurement processing for special 1>
Next, the special-purpose variable time measurement processing will be described. The special-purpose variation time measuring process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special-purpose game effect producing process (S23411 in FIG. 120).

  The variation time measurement process for the special feature 1 is a process of measuring the variation time of the game time for the first starting port. In addition, this processing has a function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the open / close execution mode is being executed.

  FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the special-purpose variable time measurement processing. In step S23701, it is determined whether or not the special 1 variable display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23701 that the special 1 variable display start flag is ON (S23701: YES), the flow advances to step S23702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23701 that the special 1 variable display start flag is not ON (S23701: NO), the present special 1 variable time measuring process ends as it is.

  In step S23702, it is determined whether an opening / closing execution mode start command has been received. If it is determined in step S23702 that the opening / closing execution mode start command has been received (S23702: YES), the flow advances to step S23703.

  In step S23703, the special 1 count stop flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S23706.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23702 that the open / close execution mode start command has not been received (S23702: NO), the process advances to step S23704.

  In step S23704, it is determined whether an open / close execution mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S23704 that the open / close execution mode end command has been received (S23704: YES), the flow advances to step S23705 to turn off the special 1 count stop flag. After executing Step S23705, the process proceeds to Step S23706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23704 that the open / close execution mode end command has not been received (S23704: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S23706.

  In step S23706, it is determined whether the special 1 count stop flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23706 that the count stop flag for special 1 is not ON (S23706: NO), the process proceeds to step S23707.

  In step S23707, the sound light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is counted down. In this process, the value of the sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC1 is counted down every time the thread passes through the thread of step S23707. That is, the value of the sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC1 is counted down only when the thread has passed through the thread of step S23707. After executing step S23707, the variable time measurement process for special feature 1 ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23706 that the count stop flag for special 1 is ON (S23706: YES), the variable time measurement process for special 1 is ended as it is.

  By performing such a process, the variation time measurement process for the special feature 1 is capable of interrupting the measurement of the variation time while the open / close execution mode is being executed. Time measurement can be realized.

  As described above, by receiving the opening / closing execution mode start command indicating the start of the opening / closing execution mode from the main MPU 62 during the execution of the game times, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the game times in the sound light MPU 92 is interrupted, and When the opening / closing execution mode end command indicating the end of the opening / closing execution mode is received from the main MPU 62 during the execution of, the measurement of the variation time of the game times in the sound light side MPU 92 which has been interrupted is restarted. When such processing is performed, for example, if the stop and restart of the measurement of the fluctuation time are repeated frequently, for example, during a period in which the special bonus processing is being performed, the fluctuation time measured by the main MPU 62 and the sound There is also a possibility that the fluctuation time measured by the optical side MPU 92 will be shifted. Therefore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which information regarding the current value of the fluctuation time measured by the main MPU 62 is included in the opening / closing execution mode start command and the opening / closing execution mode end command transmitted by the main MPU 62. The sound-light-side MPU 92 measures the sound-light-side MPU 92 based on the information on the current value of the fluctuation time measured by the main-side MPU 62 included in the received opening / closing execution mode start command and the opening / closing execution mode end command. A configuration for correcting the value of the fluctuation time may be adopted. In addition, if it is known that an error occurs in the fluctuation time measured by the sound-light-side MPU 92 as compared with the fluctuation time measured by the main-side MPU 62, the error value or the error value is determined in advance. When the average value is determined and the sound light-side MPU 92 measures the fluctuation time, a configuration for correcting the error value may be adopted. In this way, the measurement of the fluctuation time can be accurately synchronized between the main MPU 62 and the sound light MPU 92.

<Special 2 game round production process>
Next, the special second game round effect processing will be described. The special-purpose game rendition effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23105).

  FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the special second game rendition effect processing. In step S23801, it is determined whether a special 2 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S23801 that the command for changing the special 2 has been received (S23801: YES), the process advances to step S23802.

  In step S23802, the command for the special 2 fluctuation received this time is read, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of the big hit, the type of the big hit, the presence or absence of the small hit, and the fluctuation time is read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the MPU 92. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S23803.

  In step S23803, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23803 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23803: NO), the process advances to step S23804 to execute processing for setting a special 2 effect pattern for the main display area. The setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is a process of setting the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect to be displayed in the main display area MA based on the information read in step S23802. The details of the special 2 effect pattern setting process for the main display area will be described later. After executing step S23804, the process proceeds to step S23806.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23803 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23803: YES), the process advances to step S23805 to execute processing for setting a special 2 effect pattern for the sub display area. Specifically, based on the information read in step S23802, the contents of the preview effect and the reach effect to be displayed in sub-display area SA are set.

  After executing step S23805, the process proceeds to step S23806.

  In step S23806, a process of setting a liquid crystal symbol to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the current game winning lottery is a big hit, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the activated line L (L1 or L2). Is set as information of the current liquid crystal design. If the result of the lottery of the current game is out of order, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the content of the special 2 change command. If it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of the reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol is displayed on the activated line L (L1 or L2). Is determined as information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the active line L (L1 or L2), and the stop result is on the active line L (L1 or L2). Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is not established is set as information of the current liquid crystal symbol. After executing step S23806, the process proceeds to step S23807.

  In step S23807, a process for determining a fluctuation display pattern of the current game is executed. In this processing, information on the fluctuation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the special 2 fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the liquid crystal symbol specified in step S23806 are used. Select a variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of. When selecting the variation display pattern, the variation display pattern table stored in the variation display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound light ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S23807, the process proceeds to step S23808.

  In step S23808, a process of updating the hold information is executed. In the update processing of the hold information, the information of the second hold number counter area is updated so that the second hold number stored in the second hold number counter area of the sound-side RAM 94 is decremented by one. After executing step S23808, the process proceeds to step S23809.

  In step S23809, the special 2 effect setting flag is turned ON. The special 2 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that an effect pattern, a stop liquid crystal design, a variable display pattern, and the like in the second start-up game time are set. After executing Step S23809, the process proceeds to Step S23810.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23801 that no special second variation command has been received, the process proceeds directly to step S23810.

  In step S23810, a special second game round effect execution process is executed. This is a process for controlling the start and the end of the change of the symbol for the liquid crystal corresponding to the game time for the second starting port. The details of the special 2 game round effect execution processing will be described later. After performing Step S23810, the process proceeds to Step S23811.

  In step S23811, a special second variation time measurement process is executed. The special 2 change time measurement process is a process of measuring the time during which the liquid crystal symbol of the second start-up game time is changed and displayed. The details of the special 2 fluctuation time measuring process will be described later. After execution of step S23811, the special-second game-play effect processing ends.

<Setting process of special 2 effect pattern for main display area>
Next, processing for setting a special 2 effect pattern for the main display area will be described. The process of setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the process for special game effect rendering (FIG. 124: S23804).

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the setting processing of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area. In step S23901, it is determined based on the received special second variation command whether or not the game time to be processed is a game time that has won a jackpot. If it is determined in step S23901 that the game time to be processed is a game time that has won a jackpot (S23901: YES), the process proceeds to step S23902.

  In step S23902, a jackpot effect pattern including a probable change jackpot and a normal jackpot is set. After that, the processing for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

  If it is determined in step S23901 that the game time to be processed is not the game time that has won the jackpot (S23901: NO), the process proceeds to step S23903.

  In step S23903, it is determined whether the special bonus start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23903 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (S23903: NO), the process advances to step S23904.

  In step S23904, it is determined based on the received special second variation command whether or not the game time to be processed is a game time that has won a small hit. If it is determined in step S23904 that the game time to be processed is the game time that has been won in small hits based on the received special second variation command (S23904: YES), the flow proceeds to step S23905.

  In step S23905, an effect pattern for small hits during normal times (when not during the special bonus) is set. After that, the processing for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

  If it is determined in step S23904 that the game time to be processed is not the game time that has won the small hit based on the received special second variation command (S23904: NO), the process proceeds to step S23906.

  In step S23906, an effect pattern for departure during normal times (when not during the special bonus) is set. After that, the processing for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

  If it is determined in step S23903 that the special bonus start flag is ON (S23903: YES), the process advances to step S23907.

  In step S23907, it is determined based on the received special second variation command whether or not the game time to be processed is a game time that has won a small hit. If it is determined in step S23907 that the game time to be processed is the game time that has won the small hit based on the received special second variation command (S23907: YES), the flow proceeds to step S23908.

  In step S23908, an effect pattern for a small hit at the time of the special bonus is set. The setting method of the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of the special bonus differs depending on the state of the game at the time of executing the process. The details of the setting process of the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of the special bonus will be described later. After executing step S23908, the processing for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

  If it is determined in step S23907 that the game time to be processed is not the game time that has won the small hit based on the received special fluctuation command (S23907: NO), the process proceeds to step S23909.

  In step S23909, a stray effect pattern for a special bonus is set. After that, the processing for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area ends.

  FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram for describing the setting processing of the small hit effect pattern at the time of the special bonus in step S23908.

  In the setting processing of the effect pattern for the small hit at the time of the special bonus, the effect pattern is set with reference to the effect pattern table data (TB1 to TB9) in which the variation time of the game times to be processed is associated with the effect pattern. I do. FIG. 126 is a correspondence table in which the effect pattern table data to be referred is associated with each game state at the time of executing the small bonus effect pattern setting process at the time of the special bonus.

  As shown in the figure, the type of the jackpot for the first start-up game time that triggered the start of the special bonus process (the type of the jackpot for the first start-up game time at time T4 in FIG. 91), For each remaining time RT from the start of the change of the first start-up game cycle, the second start-up game cycle is executed during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed. The effect pattern table data is set in association with each other.

  For example, when the type of the jackpot of the first start-up gaming round (the type of jackpot of the first start-up gaming round at time T4 in FIG. 91) that triggered the start of the special bonus process is the 10R specific probability variable jackpot. If the remaining time RT of the fluctuation time of the first start-up game time at the timing of setting the effect of the second start-up game time is 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, the effect pattern table With reference to the data TB2, the effect pattern of the small game for the second start-up opening that has been won is determined.

  As shown in the drawing, in each effect pattern table data, an effect pattern is set in association with each change time UT of the game time for the second starting port, and an effect pattern according to the change time is selected and set. .

  In this manner, by setting the method of setting the effect pattern of the second start-up game time at the time of the special bonus according to the state of the game when setting the effect pattern, various suggestive effects are provided to the player. Can be performed.

  For example, when the remaining time RT of the first start-up game time during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed is reduced, an effect indicating that the remaining time of the special bonus process is short is executed, and the player is provided with the effect. A feeling of irritation can be imparted. In addition, when the remaining time RT of the game time for the first opening is sufficient, an effect indicating that the remaining time of the special bonus process is small is executed, and thereafter, the remaining time of the special bonus process is sufficiently left. Executing the effect that suggests that this is the case can give the player a sense of expectation.

  In addition, by changing the method of setting the effect pattern for each type of jackpot of the first opening game that triggered the start of the special bonus process, the type of jackpot of the first opening game is suggested. Can be performed.

<Game effect production execution process for special 2>
Next, the special second game round effect execution processing will be described. The special 2 game turn production execution processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special 2 game turn effect processing (FIG. 124: S23810).

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the special-second game round effect execution processing. In step S24001, it is determined whether or not the special 2 effect setting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24001 that the special 2 effect setting flag is ON (step S24001: YES), the process proceeds to step S24002. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24001 that the special 2 effect setting flag is not ON (step S24001: NO), the present special 2 game rendition effect execution processing ends.

  In step S24002, it is determined whether the special 2 variable display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24002 that the special 2 variable display start flag is not ON (S24002: NO), the process proceeds to step S24003.

  In step S24003, a process of starting the change of the second liquid crystal symbol is performed. Specifically, the speaker 46, the various lamps 47, the display, and the like are displayed on the basis of the effect pattern of the current game, the pattern for the stop liquid crystal, and the variation display pattern set in steps S23404 to S23408 of the process for special 2 game operations. The operation contents of the control device 100 and the like are set. After executing Step S24003, the process proceeds to Step S24004.

  In step S24004, a symbol change start command for the second liquid crystal is transmitted to the display control device 100. Specifically, the information of the effect pattern, the pattern for the stop liquid crystal, and the change display pattern set in the current game time is set in the second liquid crystal pattern change start command, and transmitted to the display control device 100. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 uses the effect pattern based on the content of the second liquid crystal design variation start command, the design for the stop liquid crystal, and the variation display pattern as a second start opening effect image of the liquid crystal display device 41. It is displayed on the display surface 41a. After executing Step S24004, the process proceeds to Step S24005.

  In step S24005, the special 2 variable display start flag is turned on. Thereafter, the special special 1 game rendition effect execution processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S24002 that the special 2 variable display start flag is ON (S24002: YES), the process proceeds to step S24006.

  In step S24006, it is determined whether the value of the sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC2 is 0 or not. The sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC2 is a counter for measuring the variation time in the second starting port game time. The sound-light-side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 counts down in a special-time fluctuation time measurement process described later, and recognizes the timing at which the sound-light-side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 becomes 0. The timing at which the fluctuating time in the mouth game round ends is specified. If it is determined in step S24006 that the value of the sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC2 is 0 (S24006: YES), the process proceeds to step S24007. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24006 that the value of the sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC2 is not 0 (S24006: NO), the special-purpose 2 game rendition effect execution processing ends.

  In step S24007, a process of ending the change of the second liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, various lamps 47, the display control device 100, and the like for ending the change of the second liquid crystal symbol (displaying the stopped symbol) are set. After executing Step S24003, the process proceeds to Step S24008.

  In step S24008, a second liquid crystal symbol change end command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command stops the second liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the second liquid crystal symbol change start command. After executing Step S24008, the process proceeds to Step S24009.

  In step S24009, the special 2 effect setting flag and the special 2 variable display start flag are turned off. After that, the special second game round effect execution processing is ended.

<Variable time measurement processing for special 2>
Next, the special-purpose variable time measurement processing will be described. The variation time measurement process for the special 2 is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the process for the special round game effect production (FIG. 124: S23811).

  The special second variation time measurement process is a process of measuring the variation time of the second starting port game time. In addition, this processing has a function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the open / close execution mode is being executed.

  FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special-purpose variable time measurement processing. In step S24101, it is determined whether or not the special 2 variable display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24101 that the special 2 variable display start flag is ON (S24101: YES), the process proceeds to step S24102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24101 that the special 2 variable display start flag is not ON (S24101: NO), the present special 2 variable time measuring process ends.

  In step S24102, it is determined whether an opening / closing execution mode start command has been received. If it is determined in step S24102 that the open / close execution mode start command has been received (S24102: YES), the process advances to step S24103.

  In step S24103, the special 2 count stop flag is turned ON. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S24106.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24102 that the opening / closing execution mode start command has not been received (S24102: NO), the process proceeds to step S24104.

  In step S24104, it is determined whether an open / close execution mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S24104 that the open / close execution mode end command has been received (S24104: YES), the flow advances to step S24105 to turn off the special 2 count stop flag. After executing Step S24105, the process proceeds to Step S24106. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24104 that the opening / closing execution mode end command has not been received (S24104: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S24106.

  In step S24106, it is determined whether the special 2 count stop flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24106 that the count stop flag for special 2 is not ON (S24106: NO), the process proceeds to step S24107.

  In step S24107, the sound light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is counted down. In this process, the value of the sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC2 is counted down every time the thread passes through the thread of step S24107. That is, the value of the sound-light-side variation time counter SPTC2 is counted down only when the thread has passed through the thread of step S24107. After execution of step S24107, the variable time measurement process for special feature 2 ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24106 that the special 2 count stop flag is ON (S24106: YES), the present special 2 variable time measuring process is terminated.

  By executing such a process, the variation time measurement process for the special feature 2 is a variation of the game time for the second start port having a function of interrupting the measurement of the variation time during the period in which the open / close execution mode is executed. Time measurement can be realized.

<Special bonus effect setting process>
Next, the special bonus effect setting process will be described. The special bonus effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23106).

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the special bonus effect setting processing. In step S24201, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received. If it is determined in step S24201 that a special bonus start command has been received (S24201: YES), the flow advances to step S24202.

  In step S24202, a special bonus effect is set. In the special bonus effect, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, an image for the period of the special bonus process, an output of sound, and a lamp are displayed in an area other than the main display area MA and the sub display area SA of the display surface 41a. This is a setting process for executing lighting of the LED. After executing Step S24202, the present special bonus effect setting processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24201 that the special bonus start command has not been received (S24201: NO), the special bonus effect setting processing ends.

<Various processes executed in display control device>
Next, processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control apparatus 100 is mainly a main processing that is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off after the power is turned on, and is executed when a command is received from the sound emission control apparatus 90. There are a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interruption signal. When the command reception and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command interrupt process is executed with priority. Therefore, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the sound emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing a main process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is executed when the power is turned on, and is continuously executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described.

  In step S24301, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S24302.

  In step S24302, interrupt permission setting is performed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main processing, an infinite loop processing is executed until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, a command interruption process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interruption process is a process executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S24401, a command storage process is performed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when a V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified. Execute the display instruction.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during drawing of the image, It is possible to prevent the image accompanying the new drawing instruction from being developed in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. Hereinafter, the details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S24501, a command corresponding process is executed. In the command corresponding process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 131), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when an effect command is stored, control of drawing and display of an image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the effect operation command has been stored, it is determined whether or not it is during the period of accepting the press of the effect operation button 24. The control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not during the reception period of the press of the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command corresponding process (S24501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and a process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason will be described. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the mode of the announcement effect or the effect of the liquid crystal design and the like set by the sound emission control device 90 is quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is displayed. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41.

  In step S24502, a display setting process is performed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S24501) or the like. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S24503.

  In step S24503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting process (S24502), the type of the character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S24504.

  In step S24504, a drawing process is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S24503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process based on these pieces of information, and displays the image drawn based on the information received at the time of the immediately preceding V interrupt process on the symbol display device 41 together with a drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S24505 to execute other processing, and then the V interrupt processing ends.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special bonus process, which is a process of giving a privilege during the execution of the first start-up game round, which has won a jackpot. On the other hand, in addition to giving a sense of expectation about the round game (opening / closing execution mode) as a privilege given after the end of the game round winning the jackpot, the execution of the game round winning the jackpot A feeling of expectation can be given inside.

  In addition, even if a jackpot is won in the first opening game round, the special bonus process may or may not be executed during the execution of the game round. When the first start-up game round is started, a sense of urgency such as whether or not the special bonus process is executed can be given to the player.

  Also, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, during the execution of the first start-up game time that has been won for the big hit, the special bonus is triggered by the fact that the small start-up is won in the second start-time game time. (1R round game) is given, so that even if a big hit is won in the first start-up game round, the second start-up game round is further executed and the small hit is performed. , A greater sense of expectation can be imparted.

  Furthermore, after the end of the first start-up game round in which the special bonus process is executed, the round game is executed in response to the jackpot winning in the first start-up game round, so that a greater sense of expectation is provided. Can be granted to a person.

  The upper limit of the number of executions of the second start-up game times that can be executed during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed is the time during which the first start-up game times being executed during the period is being executed. Depends on. That is, the upper limit of the amount of the privilege granted as the special bonus is determined by the time during which the first start-up game time being executed during the period is being executed. Accordingly, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the player wants the game cycle for the first start-up port being executed to continue for a longer time during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed. Also, as the end of the first opening game round is approaching, it is desired to obtain a little more bonus as a special bonus, that is, to execute the second opening game round and win as little as possible with a small hit. It is possible to give a feeling and a feeling of frustration about the end time of the game cycle for the first start-up port, and it is possible to give intonation to the emotion of the player.

  Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first start-up game time in which the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus process is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state.

  In addition, in the first start-up game round that has won the winning lottery, whether or not to execute the special bonus process is determined before the first start-up game round in which the special bonus process is performed and the big bonus is determined. It is determined based on the jackpot type corresponding to the winning first start-up game time. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the first start-up game round executed before the first start-up game round in which the special bonus process is executed and having won the jackpot is specified. If the jackpot is a probability change jackpot, a special bonus process is executed in the first start-up opening game time after which the jackpot is won. That is, before the special bonus process is executed, it is possible to specify in advance that the special bonus process will be executed when a big hit is won in the first start-up game time. As a result, for example, during the execution of the first start-up game round that has won the specific probability change jackpot, the next time the jackpot is won in the first start-up game round, the special bonus process is executed (notice). The special bonus process is executed after the execution of the first start-up game round, in which the special bonus process is executed after the execution of the first start-up game round, in which the special bonus process is performed, or after the execution of the first start-up game round winning the specific probability change jackpot. It is possible to execute an effect that gives a notice (suggestion) of the execution. In addition, the condition that the specific probability variable jackpot is won in the first opening game time and the condition that the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode when the jackpot is subsequently won in the first opening game time Can be one of As described above, in the first start-up game time that has been won in the winning lottery, it is determined whether or not to execute the special bonus process before the first start-up game time in which the special bonus process is executed. By making a determination based on the jackpot type corresponding to the first start-up game round that has been executed and has won the jackpot, it is possible to execute various handling processes for executing the special bonus process.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment switches the method of setting the variation time of the second start-up game time between the period during which the special bonus process is executed and the other period. More specifically, the average value of the fluctuation time of the second opening game times set in the period in which the special bonus process is executed is equal to the average value of the fluctuation time of the second startup game times set in other periods. Shorter than the average. Therefore, the period during which the special bonus process is executed can be set to a state advantageous to the player. In addition, when performing such processing, there is a possibility that the player may be excessively advantageous. However, in the present embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus processing is performed, the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Since the mode is switched to the support mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute the second start-up game times executed during the period based on the jackpot type of the first start-time game times executed during the period during which the special bonus process is executed. Determine the production pattern. Therefore, it is possible to make the player infer the lottery result (big hit type) of the first start-up game time through the effect of the second start-up game time. In other words, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the first start-up game cycle using the effect performed in the second start-up game cycle. In addition, based on the lottery mode (high-probability mode or low-probability mode) after the end of the first start-up game time performed during the period in which the special bonus process is performed, the special bonus process is performed during the period in which the special bonus process is performed. The effect pattern of the second start-up game time to be performed is determined. Therefore, by utilizing the effect executed in the second opening game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in the lottery mode after the end of the first starting game round.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets the first start-up game at the timing when the effect is set with respect to the setting of the effect of the second start-up game time executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed. The effect pattern of the second start opening game time is set based on the elapsed time. Therefore, for the player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the executed second start-up game round, the elapsed time since the first first start-up game round is executed and the first start-up game round are performed. Can be inferred, and a sense of expectation for the first start-up special information game time can be indirectly provided through an effect corresponding to the second start-up special information game time. Further, as one of the conditions for executing such a process, that is, a process of performing the effect pattern setting of the second start-up game cycle based on the elapsed time of the first start-up game run, It is a condition that the game times for the starting opening have been won by the jackpot. Therefore, it is assumed that the second start-up game time is executed during the execution of the first start-up game time, and whether the effect of the second start-up game time is based on the elapsed time of the first start-up game time. By making the player guess, it is possible to make a guess as to whether or not the first starting port game time has won a jackpot. That is, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the success or failure of the lottery for the first start-up game time through the effect of the second start-up game time. Further, as one of the conditions for executing such a process, that is, a process of performing the effect pattern setting of the second start-up game cycle based on the elapsed time of the first start-up game run, The condition is that the player has won the specific probability jackpot in the first start-up game round executed before the start-up game round. Therefore, it is assumed that the second start-up game time is executed during the execution of the first start-up game time, and whether the effect of the second start-up game time is based on the elapsed time of the first start-up game time. By letting the player guess, whether or not a specific probability jackpot has been won in the first start-up game round executed prior to the first start-up game round, that is, It is possible to make a guess as to whether or not the special bonus process is executed in one start-up game time, and it is possible to give a great sense of expectation to the player.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can display the first liquid crystal symbol depending on the state in which the first start port game round is executed, even if the jackpot is won in the first start port game round. The process of exchanging the display area to be displayed and the display area for displaying the second liquid crystal symbol may or may not be performed. Specifically, in the case where the specific start jackpot has been won before the first jackpot gaming round that has won the jackpot is executed, the first start jackpot gaming round that has won the jackpot is started. As a result, a process of exchanging the display area for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is performed. On the other hand, in the case where a jackpot other than the specific probability variable jackpot has been won before the first jackpot gaming round won in the jackpot is executed, the first startup mouth gaming round won in the jackpot is started. As a result, the process of exchanging the display area for displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is not performed. Therefore, by letting the player recognize whether or not the replacement of the display area has been performed, whether the state in which the first start-port game round has been executed is after the game round that has been won in the specific probability change jackpot, Alternatively, it can be guessed that it is after a game round that has won a jackpot other than the specific probability variable jackpot. As a result, by allowing the player to recognize whether or not the replacement of the display areas has been performed, the player can be guessed whether or not the special bonus process is to be performed, and a great sense of expectation can be given. In addition, by executing an effect using whether or not the display areas can be replaced, it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the special bonus process is to be executed.

B6. Modification of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In the modified example described below, the description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as those of the above embodiment will be omitted.

B6-1. Modification 1
In the second embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the first start-up game round winning the jackpot is determined by lottery at the start of the first start-up game round in which the special bonus process is performed. Therefore, it may be performed, or may be performed based on the jackpot type in the first start-up game round. That is, in the above-described embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the first start-up game time that has won the jackpot is based on the first start-up game time (after execution first It is determined on the basis of whether or not a specific probability variable jackpot has been won in the first start-port game round (first-run first start-gate game round) that has won the jackpot executed earlier than the start-up jackpot game round. However, in this modified example, the jackpot type in the first execution opening game round is not referred to, and the determination based on the jackpot type in the second execution first opening game round or the later execution first startup opening game round is not performed. At the start of the game is determined by lottery. By doing so, it is not necessary to execute a process of storing the jackpot type of the first start-up game round that has been previously executed and which has won the jackpot (for example, storage by a flag), thereby reducing the processing load. Can be planned.

  In addition, the probability change jackpot and the normal jackpot can be set as the type of the jackpot type, and if the probability change jackpot is won in the first opening game time, then the probability change jackpot or the normal jackpot is obtained in the first opening game time. A configuration may be adopted in which a special bonus process is executed at the timing of winning. By doing so, it is not necessary to set the jackpot type such as the specific probability jackpot and to set the specific probability jackpot flag, and the processing can be simplified.

  In addition, if the type of high frequency support mode is provided as a jackpot type, the high frequency support mode set in the game round executed after the jackpot is won and the open / close execution mode ends is a specific high frequency support mode. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a special bonus process is executed when a jackpot is won in the first starting game round during the execution of the specific high-frequency support mode. Specifically, as the jackpot type, a 10R certain-variable jackpot A in which the high-frequency support mode A in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is pattern A is executed, and a high-frequency jackpot A in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is pattern B A configuration in which the 10R certain-variable jackpot B in which the support mode B is executed can be set. Then, for example, a configuration is adopted in which a special bonus process is executed when a jackpot is won in the first starting game round during the execution of the high frequency support mode B. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effects as those of the above embodiment can be obtained. Further, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a during the execution of the high frequency support mode.

B6-2. Modified example 2:
In the above embodiment, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first start-up game round, but the support mode is set to low at the start of the first start-up game round. A configuration for executing processing for switching from the frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode may be employed. By employing such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged excessively during the execution of the first start-up game round.

B6-3. Modification 3:
In the above-described embodiment, the special bonus process is started at the start of the change of the first symbol of the first start-up game round that has won the jackpot, but as a modified example, the first start-up game round that has won the jackpot. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the first symbol change display ends and the first symbol is stopped and stopped. That is, in the period from the time when the change of the first symbol of the first start-up game time that has won the jackpot to the stop of the display of the first symbol stopped (hereinafter, also referred to as a stop display period). Alternatively, a configuration for executing a special bonus process may be adopted. Specifically, at the start of the stop display period, the method of setting the variation time of the second start-up game time is changed, and a relatively long time (5 minutes to 10 minutes) is set as the variation time. Switching to a setting method in which a relatively short time (2 to 5 seconds) is set. Then, at the start of the stop display period, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. In addition, the stop display period for executing the special bonus process is set to a relatively long time such as 30 seconds to 1 minute. By doing so, the configuration of the modified example can be realized.

B6-4. Modification Example 4:
In the above-described embodiment, when a winning is won in the probability change jackpot, the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode from the end of the opening and closing execution mode executed after the winning game, and the high probability mode until the next jackpot is won. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and as a modified example, when the winning in the probability change jackpot is performed, the lottery mode is changed to the high probability mode from the end of the opening and closing execution mode executed after the winning game time. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode shifts to the low probability mode after the predetermined number of game times have been executed. In other words, the number of games executed in the high probability mode is limited. By doing in this way, for example, in the case of winning a specific probability variable jackpot, a special bonus process is executed if the jackpot is subsequently won. However, the configuration of the present modified example is a game game that can be executed in the high probability mode. There is a limit on the number of times, and the special bonus process is not executed unless a jackpot is won before the limited number of game times is executed. Therefore, during the period in which the player wins the specific probability jackpot and the game is executed in the high probability mode thereafter, the player can be given a sense of urgency or frustration, and can give inflection to the emotion.

B6-5. Modification 5:
In the above-described embodiment, the high frequency support mode is thereafter executed even if the jackpot of any of the jackpot types is won in the game round for the first starting port. Therefore, during the period in which the high-frequency support mode is being executed, by executing an effect indicating the jackpot type of the winning jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation during the high-frequency support mode. For example, during the period in which the high-frequency support mode is being executed, if a performance indicating that the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot is performed, the player who has recognized the performance is notified. On the other hand, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the special bonus process may be started when the next big hit is won.

  In addition, during the period in which the high frequency support mode is being executed, if a performance indicating that the jackpot type of the won jackpot is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot or an 8R regular jackpot is executed, At the start, the player who recognizes that the mode has been shifted from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode may determine whether the shift of the support mode is due to the start of the special bonus process, or as the high frequency support mode. It is difficult to determine whether or not this is due to the end of the number of executed games (100 times), and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency.

B6-6. Modification 6:
In the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot type in the first start-up game round winning first is the specific probability variable jackpot, it is triggered by the first start-up game round executed later. As described above, the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first start-up game round, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and another configuration may be employed. For example, regardless of the jackpot type in the first start-up gaming round that has been previously won, the executed first start-up gaming round is a jackpot or a specific jackpot-type jackpot. As an opportunity, a configuration may be adopted in which the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode at the start of the first start-up game round. By doing so, it is possible to give the player who has recognized that the high-frequency support mode has been switched to the low-frequency support mode a sense of expectation for the subsequent progress of the game.

B6-7. Modification 7:
In the above-described embodiment, the process at the start of the first start-up game round that has won the jackpot is determined later depending on whether or not the jackpot type in the first start-up game round that has been previously won is the specific probability variable jackpot. It was determined whether or not the special bonus process was started at the start of the first start-up game round that won the jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. Based on this, other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration determines the process at the start of the game round that has won the jackpot later. For example, if the jackpot type in the game round that won the jackpot first is the probable change jackpot, a configuration that starts a specific effect at the start of the game round that wins the jackpot later, or a low frequency support mode for the high frequency support mode Various configurations such as a configuration for switching to a mode, a configuration for switching from a low-frequency support mode to a high-frequency support mode, and a configuration for changing the setting method of the fluctuation time of the game times may be adopted.

B6-8. Modification 8:
In the present embodiment, the start of the special bonus process triggers the change time of the second start-up game time to be high despite the fact that the average value of the set change time is shorter than other periods. The frequency support mode has been switched to low frequency support, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and the high frequency support mode is set in spite of the fact that the average value of the fluctuation time of the game times set based on a specific opportunity becomes shorter. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration is switched to low frequency support. For example, when the mode is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode, the method of setting the fluctuation time is switched so that the average value of the fluctuation time of the set game times is shortened, and the high frequency support mode is switched to the low frequency mode. A configuration for switching to support may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is employed, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

B6-9. Modification 9:
In the above-described embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first opening game round, particularly, when the jackpot is won and the special bonus process is executed in the first opening game round, the first starting slot is set. The second start-up game run executed during the period in which the game play is executed is an effect performed in the second start-up game run with respect to the second start-up game run executed in another period. Is different, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. The second start-up game executed during the period from the start of the first start-up game round to the end thereof Another configuration may be adopted as long as the effect to be executed in the round is determined based on the symbol (lottery result) corresponding to the single first opening game round. For example, depending on whether the lottery result corresponding to the single first start-up game round is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot, the one first start-up game round is started and then ended. The effect (or the effect setting method) executed in the second start-up game time executed during the period until the start may be different. Even in such a case, it is possible to give an expectation to the first start-up game cycle by using the effect executed in the second start-up game cycle.

B6-10. Modification 10:
In the above-described embodiment, the configuration in which the bonus is given to the player in the form of the special bonus process during the period in which the first start-up game round winning the jackpot is executed is adopted. Another configuration may be adopted as long as the privilege is given to the player during the period in which the playing game is being executed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a low-frequency support mode is switched to a high-frequency support mode during execution of the first start-up game round that has won a jackpot, and a privilege is given to the player. In addition, the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment is a so-called simultaneous fluctuating pachinko machine in which the first start-port game round and the second start-port game round are executed in parallel. A pachinko machine in which the game time and the second start port game time are exclusively executed may be adopted. In this case, during the execution of the game for the first start port, which has won the jackpot, the mode is switched from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode, and the game ball can easily enter the second start port. A configuration in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port may be adopted.

B6-11. Modification 11:
In the above embodiment, elapsed time information (remaining time RT) which is information on the elapsed time (including the remaining time of the first starting port game time) from the start of the first start port game time to a predetermined timing. And, based on the elapsed time information, an effect corresponding to the second start-up game round executed during the period in which the first start-up game round for which the elapsed time information is to be acquired is executed. As long as the configuration is set, another configuration may be adopted. For example, based on the remaining time of the first start-up game round, information corresponding to the remaining time in the second start-up game round executed during the period in which the first start-up game round is being executed is displayed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect indicating that more time remains as the remaining time than the actual remaining time of the first start-up game time is performed based on the actual remaining time. Even in such a case, the player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the executed second start-up opening game time is notified of the elapsed time from the execution of the first start-up game time or the first start-up time. It is possible to infer the remaining time until the end of the game round, and indirectly give a sense of expectation to the game round for the first start-up port through an effect corresponding to the game round for the second start-up port.

B6-12. Modification 12:
In the above-described embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, a change in the symbol of the first start-up game time that has been won in the jackpot is changed to a specific small hit in the second start-up game time. A configuration may be adopted in which the operation is stopped when the operation is performed. In this way, a sense of urgency can be given to the player.

B6-13. Modification 13:
In the above-described embodiment, when the second start port game time is executed during the fluctuation of the first start port game time that has won the jackpot, the second start port game time has won the jackpot. Even if it is set to stop at the symbol indicating that the big hit has not been won in the case, if it has been won at the small hit, it stops at the symbol indicating that it has been won at the small hit However, only if a specific small hit has been won, it will stop at the symbol indicating that the small hit has been won, and even if other small hits have been won, it will be won. A configuration that is set so as to stop at a symbol indicating that it is not performed may be adopted.

B6-14. Modification 14:
In the above-described embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first start opening game round in a state where the specific probability jackpot has been won in the first start opening game round previously won, that is, the special bonus process is executed. In such a case, a configuration in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and another configuration may be employed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, when a gaming round in which a jackpot is won in the state of the high probability mode is executed, a display area in which a first liquid crystal symbol and a second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched. A configuration may be adopted in which a display area in which a first liquid crystal symbol and a second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched when a gaming round in which a jackpot is won is executed in the frequency support mode. In addition, a display for displaying a symbol for the first liquid crystal and a symbol for the second liquid crystal are displayed when a game time for winning a big hit is executed in a state where a specific small hit is won in the game time executed earlier. A configuration in which the regions are switched may be adopted. In addition, the object of the symbol whose display area is switched is not limited to the symbol for the first liquid crystal and the symbol for the second liquid crystal. It may be a symbol for open lottery. Even in such a case, by making the player recognize whether or not the replacement of the display areas has been performed, the player can make various guesses and give the player a sense of expectation.

B6-15. Modification 15:
In the above-described embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the upper limit of the amount of the privilege given as the privilege, that is, the number of times the second start-up game times can be won in small hits Has been determined based on the length of the fluctuation time of the first opening game times corresponding to the special bonus process, but the upper limit of the amount of the privilege is determined by the fluctuation of the game times satisfying a specific condition. Other configurations may be employed as long as they are determined based on the length of time. For example, the upper limit value of the number of game balls that can enter the second start port during the execution of the first start port game cycle is determined based on the length of the fluctuation time of the first start port game cycle. May be adopted. Even in this case, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that he / she wants to obtain as many benefits as possible as the end of the game round approaches and a feeling of frustration regarding the end time of the game round. Inflection can be given to emotion.

C. Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which a special action device opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device or a game ball enters a specific region of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that wins a jackpot when a right is generated, a game machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, and a sparrow ball.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, includes a plurality of reels in which a plurality of types of symbols are provided in a circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols has been established on the activated line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a bonus such as payout of medals is provided to the player. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame includes a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

  Further, in the above embodiment, some of the functions realized by software may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

D. Regarding the inventions extracted from the above embodiments, etc .:
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
The changing means includes:
A gaming machine, comprising: change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so as to reach a preset threshold value (10 points).

  According to the feature A1, since the change control means for changing the predetermined amount so as to reach the preset threshold value in the game times is provided, the player can change the predetermined amount until the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value. Can be noticed. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation about the game after the predetermined amount reaches the threshold.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to Feature A1,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment);
The specific processing execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process is performed in the game time more than when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of execution is high,
The change control means,
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed. Gaming machine, characterized in that it has means for changing the size of the game machine.

  According to the feature A2, when the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process is executed in the game time when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, by executing the specific processing, a great sense of expectation can be given to the player. In addition, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the change control unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Every time the predetermined amount is changed, a sense of expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, by changing the predetermined amount and executing the specific process, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2,
Reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value upon termination of the game round. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature A3, since the reset means is provided for executing a reset process for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the preset initial value upon the end of the game round, until the game round is completed. Can be given an expectation to the player such that the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value. In addition, the player who has recognized that the game time has started and the predetermined amount has started to change can be made aware of the timing at which the game time ends and pay attention to the manner in which the predetermined amount changes.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to Feature A3,
The reset means,
In the first case (when the game time is not the carryover game time), the predetermined amount (accumulation point) changed in the game time is returned to the initial value upon the end of the game time, and in the second case In the case where the game time is a carry-over game time, a means for not returning the predetermined amount (accumulation point) changed in the game time to the initial value upon the end of the game time (carrying-over the accumulation point) is provided. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A4, the predetermined amount may return to the initial value when the game round ends, or may not return. Therefore, even when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold in the game round. Giving the player an expectation that the predetermined amount will not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, will be maintained until the next game round, and the predetermined amount may reach the threshold value in the next game round. Can be. That is, even at the end of the game round, a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to Feature A3 or Feature A4,
The reset means,
Reset execution for determining whether or not to execute the reset process upon termination of the first game round, based on the special information corresponding to a second game round executed after the first game round A gaming machine comprising control means.

  According to the feature A5, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process upon the end of the first game round, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. Therefore, the mode of returning or maintaining the predetermined amount to the initial value can be a mode having relevance over a plurality of game times. That is, the player who has recognized the change in the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round but also the expectation in the second game round. And a new game can be created.

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5,
Reset processing execution suggestion means (stage) for suggesting in the predetermined game round whether or not the reset means returns the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value when the predetermined game round ends. (A function of executing display control processing).

  According to the feature A6, since the reset means suggests in the predetermined game round whether or not the resetting means returns the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value in response to the end of the predetermined game round, the resetting is performed. By the suggestion by the process execution suggestion means, for a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value becomes the threshold in the next game round. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching.

<Characteristic B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A specific process execution unit that executes a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value by changing the change unit;
Reset means for executing reset processing (point reset processing in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the changing means to a preset initial value;
With
The reset means,
In the first case (when the game time is not the carryover game time), the predetermined amount changed in the game time is returned to the initial value upon the end of the game time, and in the second case (the game time is In the case of a carry-over game time), the game machine further comprises means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game time to an initial value when the game time ends.

  According to the feature B1, the predetermined amount may return to the initial value upon the end of the game round or may not return to the initial value. Therefore, even at the end of the game round, the player is noticed about the predetermined amount. be able to. Further, even when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round, the predetermined amount is not returned to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round, and the predetermined amount is maintained in the next game round. An expectation that the amount may reach the threshold value can be given to the player. That is, even at the end of the game round, a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein:
The reset means,
Reset execution for determining whether or not to execute the reset process upon termination of the first game round, based on the special information corresponding to a second game round executed after the first game round Equipped with control means (effect information setting processing in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature B2, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process upon the end of the first game round, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. Therefore, the mode in which the predetermined amount is changed can be a mode that has relevance over a plurality of game times. That is, the player who has recognized the change in the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round but also the expectation in the second game round. And a new game can be created.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2,
When the predetermined game time at which the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold value (10 points) is a third game time,
The specific processing execution means,
Based on the special information corresponding to a fourth game time executed after the third game time, the specific process (button press effect) is executed in the third game time or the third game time. It is provided with a specific process execution control means for determining whether or not to execute in a game time executed after the game time (effect information setting process in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature B3, based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game time executed after the third game time, the specific process is executed in the third game time or after the third game time. Since it is determined whether or not to execute the game in the executed game round, it is possible to provide a relationship over a plurality of game rounds with respect to the timing at which a specific process is executed. Therefore, based on the timing at which the specific process is executed, the player makes various inferences regarding the special information corresponding to the third game time and the special information corresponding to the game time executed after the third game time. Can be made. For example, even when a specific process is not executed in the game time, various speculations such as speculation that the specific process may not be executed in the game time because the specific process is executed in the next game time. The guess can be made to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

  According to the feature B4, the specific effect is executed as the specific process, so that the player can pay attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game. Further, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4,
An operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player is provided,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process (an effect performed after a button is pressed) in response to receiving the input operation.

  According to the feature B5, since the specific process includes the process of starting the execution of the preset process in response to the input operation being accepted, the timing at which the execution of the specific process gives the player a sense of expectation Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, the player can be further focused on the game, and the expectation of the player can be further increased.

[Feature B6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5,
A gaming machine comprising: a predetermined amount display unit (a function of executing a point accumulation process / a function of displaying a pearl image on a stage) for displaying a display corresponding to the predetermined amount (accumulation points).

  According to the feature B6, the predetermined amount display means for displaying the predetermined amount is provided, so that the player can always be conscious of the predetermined amount and can pay attention to the game.

[Feature B7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B6,
A reset process execution suggestion unit for indicating in the predetermined game round whether or not the reset unit returns the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to an initial value in response to the end of the predetermined game round. (Effect information setting processing in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature B7, since the reset means suggests in the predetermined game round whether or not the resetting means returns the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value upon the end of the predetermined game round, the resetting is performed. By the suggestion by the process execution suggestion means, for a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round, the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value becomes the threshold in the next game round. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment);
With
The changing means includes:
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect), the predetermined amount is changed so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. A gaming machine comprising change control means.

  According to the feature C1, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Therefore, a sense of expectation can be given to the player every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein
The change means may include a change amount determining means for determining the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game time based on special information corresponding to a second game time executed after the first game time. Provide (effect information setting processing in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature C2, the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. The predetermined amount that changes may be in an aspect that is relevant over a plurality of game times. That is, the player who has recognized the change in the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round but also the expectation in the second game round. And a new game can be created.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The change means includes change timing determination means for determining the timing of changing the predetermined amount in the game time based on the special information corresponding to the game time (the effect information setting process and the effect setting in the first embodiment). processing)
A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature C3, the timing for changing the predetermined amount in the game time is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game time, so that the special information or the other special information that determines the fluctuation time of the game time is used. The predetermined amount can be changed at a timing suitable for various factors to be determined.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C3,
Reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value upon termination of the game round,
The reset means,
Means for determining whether or not to execute the reset processing upon termination of the first game round, based on the special information corresponding to a second game round executed after the first game round. Provide (effect information setting processing in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature C4, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process at the end of the first game round, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round executed after the first game round. Therefore, the mode of returning or maintaining the predetermined amount to the initial value can be a mode having relevance over a plurality of game times. That is, the player who has recognized the change in the predetermined amount in the first game round is given not only the expectation in the first game round but also the expectation in the second game round. And a new game can be created.

[Feature C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4,
Resetting means for executing a reset process of returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to an initial value set in advance of the end of the game round,
The reset means,
A means for determining whether to execute the reset process based on the special information corresponding to the game time when the game time ends (effect information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature C5, based on the special information corresponding to the game time, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process at the end of the game time, so that the special information for determining the fluctuation time of the game time or In consideration of various factors determined by other special information, it is possible to determine whether to return the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the initial value.

[Feature C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C5,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

  According to the feature C6, the specific effect is executed as the specific process, so that the player can pay attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game. Further, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature C7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6,
An operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player is provided,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (effect performed after pressing a button) in response to the input operation being accepted.

  According to the feature C7, since the specific process includes the process of starting the execution of the preset process in response to the input operation being received, the timing at which the execution of the specific process gives the player a sense of expectation Then, by further actively involving the player in the game through the input operation, the player can be further focused on the game, and the expectation of the player can be further increased.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A specific process execution unit that executes a specific process (button press effect) when the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches a preset threshold (10 points) by changing the change unit;
When the predetermined amount reaches the threshold, time suggestion means (timer effect control) for executing a time suggestion process (timer effect) indicating a time until the specific process (button press effect) is executed. Function to perform processing),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature D1, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold, the time suggesting means for executing the time suggesting process indicating the time until the specific process is executed is provided, so that the specific process is executed. It is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation about a specific process to be executed after the elapse of the suggested time during a period from when the suggested time is suggested to when the specific process is performed. it can. Further, since the time suggesting means suggests that the time until the specific process is executed becomes shorter as time elapses, the expectation of the player can be increased as time elapses.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein
When the game time at which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value is a first game time,
The time suggesting means (the function of executing the point filling control process)
In the first case, the execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) is started in the first game round,
In the second case, the execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) is not started in the first game time, but in the second game time, which is a game time executed after the first game time. A gaming machine comprising: means for starting execution of the time suggestion process.

  According to the feature D2, when the predetermined amount has reached the threshold value in the first game time, the execution of the time suggestion process is started in the first game time and after the first game time. The game may be executed in the second game time, which is the game time, so when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, by recognizing whether or not the time suggestion process is executed in the game time, The pleasure of estimating when a specific process is executed can be given to the player.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to Feature D2,
The first case is a case where the specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect) in the first game round,
The second case is a gaming machine wherein the specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect) in a game time executed after the first game time.

  According to the feature D3, when the predetermined amount has reached the threshold value and the execution of the time suggestion process is started in the first game round, the player is notified of the time in the first game round. This allows the player to recognize that a specific process is to be performed, and gives the player a sense of expectation for the first game round. Further, when the predetermined amount has reached the threshold value and the execution of the time suggestion processing has not been started in the first game round, the player is provided with a game after the first game round. It is possible to make the player recognize that a specific process is executed in the round, and give the player a sense of expectation for the subsequent game round.

[Feature D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D3,
When the game time at which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value is a third game time,
The specific processing execution means,
Based on the special information corresponding to a fourth game time executed after the third game time, the specific processing is executed in the third game time or executed after the third game time A game machine comprising a specific process execution control means for deciding whether or not to execute the game at a given game time.

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to provide the relevance over a plurality of game times with respect to the timing at which the specific process is executed. Therefore, based on the timing at which the time suggesting process indicating the time until the specific process is performed, the player can be guessed which game time can be expected based on the timing at which the time suggesting process is performed, and a new gaming property is provided. Can be created.

[Feature D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the specific process executing means includes means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

  According to the feature D5, the specific effect is executed as the specific process, so that the player can pay attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game. Further, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature D6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D5,
An operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player is provided,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (effect performed after pressing a button) in response to the input operation being accepted.

  According to the feature D6, since the specific process includes the process of starting the execution of the preset process in response to the input operation being received, the timing at which the execution of the specific process gives the player a sense of expectation Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, the player can be further focused on the game, and the expectation of the player can be further increased.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
A first process execution unit that executes a first process (standby effect) when a specific condition is satisfied (in the first embodiment, when 10 or more accumulation points are accumulated);
A second process execution unit that executes a second process (timer effect) when the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated);
With
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round,
The first processing execution means includes:
In the case where the second process execution means executes the second process (timer effect) in a second game time executed after the first game time, the first process is executed in the first game time. Execute the process of (waiting production)
When the second processing execution means executes the second processing (timer effect) in the first game time, the first process (standby effect) is not executed. .

  According to the feature E1, when the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round, and when the second process is performed in the second game round, after the specific condition is satisfied, A period occurs before the second processing is performed. In such a case, the first processing execution means executes the first processing in the first game round, so even in a period that occurs from when a specific condition is satisfied to when the second processing is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the second process will be executed later, and to maintain a sense of expectation for the second process.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein:
When the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated), a specific process execution unit that executes a specific process (button press effect) is provided.
In the case where the specific condition is satisfied in the first game time and the specific process (button press effect) is executed in the first game time, the second process is performed in the first game time. Processing (timer effect) is executed,
In the case where the specific condition is satisfied in the first game time and the specific process (button press effect) is executed in the second game time, the second process is performed in the second game time. A gaming machine characterized by executing processing (timer effect).

  According to the feature E2, when a specific condition is satisfied in the first game round, the player recognizes which game round the second process is to be executed in, thereby executing the specific process. Since the number of times of the game to be performed can be estimated, the player can concentrate on the timing at which the second process is executed, and expects the player who has recognized the execution of the second process from the player. A feeling can be given.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to Feature E2,
The specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect) in the first game time, or executes the specific process in the second game time, based on the special information corresponding to the second game time. A gaming machine comprising a specific process execution control means for determining whether to execute a specific process (button press effect).

  According to the feature E3, based on the special information corresponding to the second game time executed after the first game time, the specific processing is executed in the first game time or the specific process is executed in the second game time. Since it is determined whether or not to perform the specific process, it is possible to provide the relevance over a plurality of game times regarding the timing at which the specific process is executed. Therefore, the player who has recognized the execution of the second process can be made to estimate the timing at which the specific process is executed, and based on the estimated timing at which the specific process is executed, the special information at each game time Can be guessed as to whether or not satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to make the player guess whether the special information in each game time satisfies the predetermined condition by various factors, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to Feature E2 or Feature E3,
The second processing (timer effect) is performed until the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the specific condition is satisfied (when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated). A gaming machine characterized by a process that indicates time.

  According to the feature E4, the execution of the second process suggests the time until the specific process is executed, and the execution of the second process is performed after the suggested time elapses during the period until the specific process is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation about the specific processing to be performed. Further, it is suggested that the time until the specific process is executed becomes shorter as time elapses, so that the expectation of the player can be increased as time elapses.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The gaming machine, wherein the first process (standby effect) is a process indicating that the second process (timer effect) is to be executed.

  According to the feature E5, the first process is a process suggesting that the second process is to be executed. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the first process has been executed is notified of the second process by the second process. An expectation can be given to the execution of the processing.

<Characteristic F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
The changing means includes:
When the first process (the predetermined effect in the first modification of the first embodiment) is performed in the game, the predetermined amount is reduced after the first process in the game is performed. In some cases, the predetermined amount may not be changed,
When a second process (a specific effect in the first modification of the first embodiment) is executed in the game time, the predetermined amount is reduced after the second process in the game time is executed. A gaming machine characterized by always changing.

  According to the feature F1, when the second process is executed in the game round, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round, and therefore, the second player is requested to change the predetermined amount in the game round. Can be given to the execution of the process, and the player can pay attention to the game. Further, when the second process is executed, a feeling of excitement can be given to a player who desires a predetermined amount of change, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect);
The changing means includes:
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process (button press effect), the predetermined amount (accumulation point) is set to a predetermined threshold (10) before the specific process is executed. A game machine comprising change control means for changing the value to reach point).

  According to the feature F2, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold value by the time the specific process is executed. Therefore, a sense of expectation can be given to the player every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount. Further, when the second process is executed, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round, so that the player who recognizes that the second process has been executed is notified of the specific process. An expectation of execution can be given.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to Feature F2,
When the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing in the game time is better when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability of executing a button press effect).

  According to the feature F3, by executing a specific process, a great sense of expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, by performing the second process, the change of the predetermined amount, and the execution of the specific process, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to Feature F3,
The first processing is a predetermined effect (a predetermined effect in the first modification of the first embodiment).
The gaming machine, wherein the second processing is a specific effect set in advance (a specific effect in Modification 1 of the first embodiment).

  According to the feature F4, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the effect performed in the game round. Then, when a specific effect is executed, a great sense of expectation and a sense of excitement can be given to the player.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features F2 to F4,
An operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player is provided,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (effect performed after a button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

  According to the feature F5, since the specific process includes the process of starting the execution of the preset process in response to the input operation being received, the timing at which the execution of the specific process gives the player a sense of expectation Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, the player can be further focused on the game, and the expectation of the player can be further increased.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
A predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for executing a predetermined process (awarding of points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
The predetermined processing execution means includes:
In the case where the mode of the game time is the first mode, in the game time executed after the game time, there are cases where the predetermined process is executed and cases where the predetermined process is not executed,
In the case where the mode of the game time is the second mode, the predetermined process is always executed in a game time executed after the game time.

  According to the feature G1, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined process is always executed in the game round executed after the game round, so that the player who desires the predetermined process is performed. In addition to this, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the aspect in the game round, and to pay attention to the game in the game round. In addition, when the mode of the game time is the second mode, the predetermined process is executed in the game time executed after the game time for the player who has desired to execute the predetermined process. It is possible to give a sense of expectation and a sense of excitement, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein
The predetermined processing execution means includes:
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
The changing means (the function of executing the point giving effect in the second modification of the first embodiment)
When the mode of the game times is the first mode, in the game times executed after the game times, there are cases where the predetermined amount is changed and cases where the predetermined amount is not changed,
When the mode of the game is the second mode, the predetermined amount is always changed in a game performed after the game is performed.

  According to the feature G2, when the mode of the game is the second mode, the predetermined amount always changes in the game performed after the game, so that the game in which the predetermined amount is desired to be changed is determined. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the mode in the game round, and to pay attention to the game in the game round. In addition, when the mode of the game time is the second mode, the predetermined amount may be changed in the game times executed after the game time for the player who wants to change the predetermined amount. , A sense of expectation can be given, and a feeling of excitement can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature G3]
The gaming machine according to Feature G2,
Reset means for executing reset processing (point reset processing in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the changing means to a preset initial value;
The first aspect of the game times is a mode in which the reset means returns the predetermined amount to an initial value upon termination of the game times,
The game machine according to the second aspect of the gaming machine, wherein the reset means does not return the predetermined amount to an initial value upon termination of the gaming cycle.

  According to the feature G3, if the reset unit does not return the predetermined amount to the initial value upon the end of the game round, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round executed after the game round. It is possible to give a player who wants to change the predetermined amount a sense of expectation that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value when the game round ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the game even at the end of the game round. Further, if the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value after the end of the game round, the player who desires the change of the predetermined amount is given a predetermined number of game rounds to be executed after the game round. It is possible to give a sense of expectation about the change in the amount, as well as to give a sense of excitement, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine according to Feature G2 or Feature G3,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect);
The changing means includes:
When the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, a change control unit that changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G4, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so that the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Therefore, a sense of expectation can be given to the player every time the changing means changes the predetermined amount. Further, if the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value upon the end of the game round, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round executed after the game round, so that the end of the game round is triggered. As a result, the player who has recognized that the predetermined amount has not returned to the initial value can be given a sense of expectation regarding the execution of a specific process.

[Feature G5]
The gaming machine according to Feature G4,
When the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific processing in the game time is better when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability of executing a button press effect).

  According to the feature G5, by executing a specific process, a great sense of expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, the presence or absence of the reset process, a change in the predetermined amount, and the execution of the specific process can give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner.

[Feature G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G3 to G5,
Reset processing execution suggestion means (stage) for suggesting in the predetermined game round whether or not the reset means returns the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value when the predetermined game round ends. (A function of executing display control processing).

  According to the feature G6, the reset means suggests in the predetermined game round whether or not the resetting means returns the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value upon termination of the predetermined game round. For the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value upon the end of the game round by the suggestion by the process execution suggestion means, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round after the predetermined game round. It is possible to provide a feeling of expectation that the predetermined amount that has not returned to the initial value may reach a threshold value in a game time after the predetermined game time.

[Feature G7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features G4 to G6,
An operation receiving means (effect operation button) for accepting an input operation from a player is provided,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the specific process includes an execution start process for starting execution of a preset process (effect performed after a button is pressed) when the input operation is accepted.

  According to the feature G7, since the specific process includes the process of starting the execution of the preset process in response to the input operation being received, the timing at which the execution of the specific process gives the player a sense of expectation Further, by making the player actively participate in the game through the input operation, the player can be further focused on the game, and the expectation of the player can be further increased.

<Characteristic H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Predetermined processing execution means for executing predetermined processing in the game times,
Prior to the predetermined process executing means executing the predetermined process, a predetermined effect executing means for executing a predetermined effect (point giving effect);
With
The predetermined processing execution means includes:
A non-executing unit that executes a non-executing process that does not execute the predetermined process (a point giving effect in which the assigned points are 0) even though the predetermined effect executing unit executes the predetermined effect. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature H1, since the predetermined process execution unit includes the non-execution unit that executes the non-execution process that does not execute the predetermined process even though the predetermined effect execution unit has executed the predetermined effect, the predetermined effect Can be expected not to execute the non-execution processing. In addition, when the non-execution processing is not executed, a sense of excitement can be given to the player, and when the non-execution processing is executed, the player is discouraged. In other words, depending on whether or not the non-execution processing is executed, it is possible to impart inflection to the player's sense of expectation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein
The predetermined processing execution means includes:
As the predetermined process, a change unit that changes a predetermined amount (accumulation points in the first embodiment) in the game times is provided,
The no execution means,
Despite the fact that the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect, there is provided a non-change means for executing a non-change process (point giving effect in which the given points are 0) in which the predetermined amount is not changed. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature H2, even though the predetermined effect execution means has performed the predetermined effect, the non-change means for executing the non-change processing that does not change the predetermined amount is provided, so that the predetermined effect has been executed. The recognized player can be expected not to execute the no-change processing. In addition, when the non-change processing is not executed, a sense of excitement can be given to the player, and when the non-change processing is executed, the player is discouraged. In other words, depending on whether or not the non-change processing is executed, it is possible to impart inflection to the player's sense of expectation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to Feature H2,
Reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value upon termination of the game round,
An upper limit is set on the number of times the non-change means executes the non-change processing (point giving effect in which the given points are 0) during a period from the start of the game round to the time when the reset means executes the reset processing. (Modification 3 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature H3, an upper limit is set for the number of times the non-change means executes the non-change processing during a period from the start of the game round to the time when the reset means executes the reset processing. The player who has recognized that the number of executions has reached the upper limit can be given a strong sense of expectation that a predetermined effect will be executed. This is because, when the number of executions of the non-change processing reaches the upper limit, a predetermined amount always changes when a predetermined effect is subsequently executed. Therefore, even when the non-change processing is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of executions reaches the upper limit. That is, when the predetermined effect is executed, if the non-change processing is not executed, the predetermined amount changes, so that the player can be given a sense of excitement, and the non-change processing is executed. Even in this case, the player can be provided with an expectation (an expectation that the number of executions reaches the upper limit). As a result, the expectation of the player can be increased regardless of whether the non-change processing is executed or the case where the non-change processing is executed.

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to Feature H2 or Feature H3,
A specific processing execution means for executing a specific processing,
The specific processing execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process is performed in the game time more than when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of execution is high,
The changing means includes:
When the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the control unit includes a change control unit that changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature H4, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold by the time the specific process is executed. Since the change control means is provided for changing the predetermined amount, the player can be provided with a sense of expectation every time the change means changes the predetermined amount. Further, by executing the specific processing, it is possible to give the player an even greater sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner by performing a predetermined effect, the presence or absence of the no-change process, the number of times the no-change process is performed, a predetermined amount of change, and the execution of the specific process. it can.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to Feature H3 or Feature H4,
The reset means,
In the first case (when the game time is not the carryover game time), the predetermined amount changed in the game time is returned to the initial value upon the end of the game time, and in the second case (the game time is In the case of a carry-over game time), the game machine further comprises means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game time to an initial value when the game time ends.

  According to the feature H5, the predetermined amount may return to the initial value upon the end of the game round or may not return. Therefore, even when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold in the game round. The predetermined amount is not returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, but is maintained until the next game round, and the player can expect the predetermined amount to reach the threshold value in the next game round. That is, even at the end of the game round, a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

<Characteristic I group>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A first specific process execution unit that executes a first specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value by changing the change unit; ,
A second specific process execution unit that executes a second specific process (unfilled effect in Modification 4 of the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value;
With
When the second specific process (unfilled effect) is executed, the amount of change (accumulation point) from the initial value of the predetermined amount before the execution of the second specific process is: The special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition when the second change amount is larger than the first change amount than when the second change amount is larger than the first change amount. A gaming machine characterized by high expectations.

  According to the feature I1, even when the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, the predetermined amount is set when the second specific process is executed. The greater the amount of change from the initial value of, the higher the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and it is possible to give the player an expectation. That is, when the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, and when the amount of change from the initial value of the predetermined amount is relatively large, the second specific It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the processing of (1) will be executed.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein:
In the first specific process (button press effect), the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a higher probability of being executed.

  According to the feature I2, a strong expectation can be given to the player who has recognized that the first specific process has been executed, that the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition. it can. In addition, since the first specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player every time the changing unit changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
The content of the second specific process (unfilled effect) differs depending on the predetermined amount (accumulation point) before the execution of the second specific process (according to the first embodiment). Modification 4)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature I3, the content of the process differs depending on the predetermined amount before the execution of the second specific process, so that the second specific process is performed regardless of the predetermined amount. The player can pay attention to the content, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
After the second specific process (unfilled effect) is executed, a third specific process executing means for executing a third specific process (unfilled advanced effect in Modification 4 of the first embodiment) is provided. ,
In the game time, the case where the third specific process (unfilled development effect) is executed is more in the game time than in the case where the first specific process (button press effect) is executed. A gaming machine having a high expectation that the corresponding special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature I4, when the third specific process is executed, the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition when the first specific process is executed, compared to when the first specific process is executed. Expectations are high. Therefore, even when the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold value and the first specific process is not executed, if the second specific process is executed, the player It is possible to give a strong sense of expectation that the third specific process will be executed. Furthermore, when the third specific process is executed, the degree of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than when the first specific process is executed. A stronger expectation can be given to the player who has recognized that the third specific process has been executed. In summary, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold, the first specific process is executed, so that a sense of expectation can be given to the player, and when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold. However, it gives the player a sense of expectation that the second specific process will be performed, and when the second specific process is performed, the third specific process is performed. This can give the player a strong sense of expectation. Therefore, regardless of the situation of the game, a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Game time display means for displaying a game time display which is a display indicating one game time being held or being executed;
Display mode changing means for executing a display mode changing process for changing the display mode of the game display being displayed (a function of executing a process for changing the display mode of the game display in Modification 5 of the first embodiment); ,
A predetermined process executing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for executing a predetermined process (awarding of points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
With
A gaming machine, wherein a timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and a timing at which the predetermined process executing unit executes the predetermined process have a temporal correlation.

  According to the feature J1, the change of the display mode of the game times display and the execution of the predetermined process are executed with a correlation between the timings, thereby synergistically increasing the sense of expectation of the player. it can.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein
The predetermined processing execution means includes:
Changing means for changing a predetermined amount (accumulation points in the first embodiment) in the game times (modification 5 in the first embodiment);
A gaming machine, wherein a timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and a timing at which the changing mode changes the predetermined amount have a temporal correlation.

  According to the feature J2, the change of the display mode of the game times display and the change of the predetermined amount are executed with the timing correlated, so that the sense of expectation of the player can be synergistically increased. it can.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to Feature J2,
The changing means includes:
A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined amount is changed within a predetermined time after the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process.

  According to the feature J3, the player who has recognized that the display mode of the game times display has changed and has increased the sense of expectation can further recognize that the predetermined amount has changed within the predetermined time. It is possible to provide a stronger feeling of expectation and a feeling of elation.

[Feature J4]
The gaming machine according to Feature J2,
A gaming machine, wherein a timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and a timing at which the changing mode changes the predetermined amount are simultaneous.

  According to the feature J4, the player's expectation can be increased synergistically by causing the player to simultaneously recognize the change in the display mode of the game times display and the change in the predetermined amount.

[Feature J5]
The gaming machine according to Feature J2,
The gaming machine, wherein the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process within a predetermined time after the changing mode changes the predetermined amount.

  According to the feature J5, the player who has recognized that the predetermined amount has changed and has increased the sense of expectation further recognizes that the display mode of the game times display has changed within the predetermined time, thereby further improving the game. It is possible to provide a stronger feeling of expectation and a feeling of elation.

[Feature J6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J5,
There is a correlation between the display mode of the game times display after the display mode changing unit has changed and the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the changing unit (Modification 5 in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature J6, by giving a correlation between the display mode of the game times display after the display mode changing unit has changed and the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the changing unit, the display mode changing unit. When the display mode of the game times display after the change is in a mode that meets the player's expectation, and when the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the change means is large, An even stronger sense of expectation and superiority can be imparted.

[Feature J7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J6,
The display mode changing means includes:
When the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the display mode of the game time display is changed to the second display mode rather than changing the display mode of the game time display to the first display mode. The probability of changing to the display mode is high,
When the display mode changing unit changes the game times display to the first display mode, the predetermined amount of change by the changing unit is a first change amount,
When the display mode changing unit changes the game amount display to the second display mode, and the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the changing unit is a second change amount,
The average value of the second change amount is larger than the average value of the first change amount (Modification 5 of the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature J7, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, there is a high probability that the display mode of the game display is changed to the second display mode, and the display mode changing means changes the game display to the second display mode. When the display mode is changed to the first display mode, the change amount of the predetermined amount is often larger than when the display mode is changed to the first display mode. Is executed with a correlation between the timings, so that the player's expectation that the special information satisfies a predetermined condition can be synergistically increased.

<Feature K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A change mode information display unit that displays change mode information that is information on the mode of change of the predetermined amount that has already been changed (displays an image of a pearl on the stage St indicating an accumulation point in the modification 13 of the first embodiment). Function), and
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature K1, the change mode information display means for displaying the change mode information which is the information regarding the change mode of the predetermined amount which has already been changed is provided, so that the player can determine how the predetermined amount has changed. It is possible to easily grasp, to encourage the player to make various guesses based on the change mode information, and to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to Feature K1, wherein
The changing means includes means for changing a predetermined amount at a plurality of timings,
The change mode information display means,
A means for displaying the change mode information in a manner in which the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the change means at each of the timings is identifiable (on stage St indicating a storage point in Modification 13 of the first embodiment); A function of displaying a pearl image).

  According to the feature K2, the change means displays the change mode information in such a manner that the change amount of the predetermined amount changed at each timing can be identified, so that the player who has recognized the change mode information, for example, To encourage the user to try to find regularity for the predetermined amount of change that has changed at each timing so far, or to guess the predetermined amount of change at the next and subsequent timings. It is possible to provide the player with new enjoyment based on the change mode information.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to Feature K1 or Feature K2,
The changing means includes:
A means for determining a mode of change of the predetermined amount based on the special information corresponding to the game times (a function of determining a point-giving scenario based on an effect scenario in Modification 12 of the first embodiment); A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature K3, since the mode of the predetermined amount of change is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game times, the change mode information that is the information on the mode of the predetermined amount of change that has already been changed is recognized. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the special information corresponding to the game times.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to Feature K3,
On the basis of the special information corresponding to the game time, provided with an effect determination means to determine the effect to be performed in the game time,
The changing means includes:
Means for determining the mode of the change of the predetermined amount (the point-giving scenario in Modification 12 of the first embodiment) based on the determined effect (Radio Scenario in Modification 12 of the first embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature K4, the effect to be executed in the game time is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game time, and the mode of the predetermined amount of change is determined based on the determined effect. The player who has recognized the change mode information that is the information regarding the change mode of the predetermined amount is caused to make various guesses about the contents of the effect to be executed later in the game, and to provide a sense of expectation based on the change mode information. Can be granted.

<Characteristic L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A first effect execution means for executing a first effect (pointing suggestion effect in Modification Example 14 of the first embodiment) that is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed;
After the first effect is executed, a second effect execution that executes a second effect (a point-giving execution effect in Modification 14 of the first embodiment) that is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed. Means,
With
The second effect execution means,
In the first case, after the first effect is executed once, the second effect is executed once. In the second case, after the first effect is executed once. A means for executing the second effect N times (N is an integer greater than or equal to 2) times.

  According to the feature L1, the first effect is an effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed, so that the player who recognizes the first effect may change the predetermined amount. Expectation can be given. Since the second effect is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed, the player who has recognized the second effect is made to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, and gives a sense of superiority and satisfaction. can do. Therefore, when the second effect is executed N times after the first effect is executed once, a predetermined amount is given to the player N times after the first effect is executed once. It can be recognized that it has changed. As a result, it is possible to give the player who has recognized the first effect a feeling of expectation how many times the predetermined amount changes thereafter. When the second effect is executed N times after the first effect is executed once, it is recognized that the first effect is executed, and then the second effect is executed once. Surprising and surprising can be given to the player who is supposed to be done.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to Feature L1,
The change unit includes a change amount information obtaining unit that obtains change amount information that is information corresponding to a change amount of the predetermined amount to be changed,
The second effect execution means,
In the first case, after the first effect is executed once, the second effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by the change amount corresponding to the change amount information is executed once. And
In the second case, the change amount corresponding to the change amount information is divided into N pieces, and after the first effect is executed once, the change amount of each of the N pieces is divided. A means for executing the second effect N times indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by the divided change amount (Modification 14 of the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature L2, in both the first case and the second case, the change amount information may be obtained in accordance with the first effect to be executed, so that the second effect is set to N as in the second case. Even in the case where the process is executed multiple times, the process up to the process of acquiring the change amount information is the same as the first case, and the process can be simplified. Further, the change amount information can be set without distinguishing between the case where the information is used as the first case and the case where the information is used as the second case, and the setting of the change amount information can be simplified. it can.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine according to Feature L1,
The second production change amount information acquiring means for acquiring second production change amount information which is information corresponding to a predetermined amount of change amount indicating that the change is made in one second production. With
The second effect execution means,
In the first case, one piece of the second effect change amount information is acquired, and after the first effect is executed once, a change corresponding to the acquired second effect change amount information is acquired. Executing the second effect once indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by an amount,
In the second case, N pieces of the second effect change amount information are acquired, and after the first effect is executed once, the acquired N pieces of the second effect change amount information are obtained. The second effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by the corresponding change amount is executed N times in accordance with the acquired N pieces of the second effect change amount information (first embodiment) Modification 14 of
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature L3, in the second case, it is sufficient to acquire the number of pieces of second effect change amount information according to the number of times of the second effect to be executed. There is no need to execute a process of dividing the change amount corresponding to the use change amount information into N pieces according to the number of times of the second effect to be executed, and the process can be simplified.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to Feature L1 or Feature L2,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment);
The specific processing execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process is performed in the game time more than when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of execution is high,
The changing means includes:
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulation points) is set to a predetermined threshold (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed. A game machine characterized by comprising means for changing so as to reach).

  According to the feature L4, a specific process is executed in the game time when the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, as compared with when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, by executing the specific processing, a great sense of expectation can be given to the player. Further, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold by the time the specific process is executed. Every time the amount is changed, an expectation can be given to the player. That is, every time the second effect is executed, a sense of expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, a predetermined amount of change (execution of the second effect) and execution of the specific processing can give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner.

<Characteristic M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
First effect execution means for executing a first effect (a first effect in Modification 10 of the first embodiment) that is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed;
After the first effect is executed, a second effect execution that executes a second effect (a second effect in Modification 10 of the first embodiment) that is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed. Means,
With
The first effect execution means,
In a case where the change means changes the predetermined amount in a second game time which is a game time executed after the first game time,
Means for starting the first effect corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game time, in the first game time;
Means for starting in the second game time the first effect corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game time,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature M1, the first effect is an effect suggesting that the predetermined amount is changed, so that the player who recognizes the first effect may change the predetermined amount. Expectation can be given. Since the second effect is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount is changed, the player who has recognized the second effect is made to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, and gives a sense of superiority and satisfaction. can do. The first effect corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game time may be started in the first game time or may be executed in the second game time. . In other words, in the predetermined game time, when the first effect is executed, when the predetermined amount changes in the predetermined game time, and when the predetermined amount changes in the game time executed after the predetermined game time. In some cases, the player who has recognized that the first effect has been executed can be guessed as to which case, and a sense of expectation can be given.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine according to feature M1, wherein
The first effect execution means,
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in the second game time,
Means for informing the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the change means in the second game time in the first game time,
Means for informing the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the change means in the second game time in the second game time;
(Modification 10 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature M2, when the predetermined amount is changed in the second game time, the change amount of the predetermined amount to be changed in the second game time is notified in the first game time, There is a case where a change amount of a predetermined amount to be changed in the game time is notified in the second game time. In other words, in a predetermined game time, when a predetermined amount of change is notified, in the predetermined game time, a predetermined amount corresponding to the notified change amount changes, In the game time executed after the game time, a predetermined amount corresponding to the notified change amount may change, and for a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount of change amount has been notified, It is possible to make a guess as to which of these cases, and to give a sense of expectation.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
A specific process execution unit that executes a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value by changing the change unit;
Reset means for executing reset processing (point reset processing in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the changing means to a preset initial value;
With
The reset means,
In the first case (when the game time is not the carryover game time), the predetermined amount changed in the game time is returned to the initial value upon the end of the game time, and in the second case (the game time is In the case of a carry-over game time), the game machine further comprises means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game time to an initial value when the game time ends.

  According to the feature M3, the predetermined amount may return to the initial value upon the end of the game round or may not return to the initial value. Therefore, even at the end of the game round, the player is paid attention to the predetermined amount. be able to. Further, even when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game round, the predetermined amount is not returned to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round, and the predetermined amount is maintained in the next game round. An expectation that the amount may reach the threshold value can be given to the player. Therefore, depending on the feature M1, when the first effect is executed, there are cases where the predetermined amount changes in the predetermined game time and cases where the predetermined amount changes in the game time executed after the predetermined game time. Further, when the predetermined amount changes due to the feature M3, the predetermined amount may return to the initial value when the game round ends, or may not return to the initial value. It is possible to give a great sense of expectation to the player.

<Characteristic N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Effect execution means for executing an effect,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
The effect executing means includes a change effect executing means for executing a change effect (point giving effect) which is an effect indicating that the predetermined amount changes when the changing means changes a predetermined amount,
The change effect execution means, based on the special information corresponding to the game times in which the change means changes the predetermined amount, the change effect (point giving effect in Modification 11 of the first embodiment). A game machine comprising: means for determining a game machine.

  According to the feature N1, the change effect execution means determines the mode of the change effect based on the special information corresponding to the number of game times in which the change means changes the predetermined amount. People can be noticed. In addition, it is possible to give a player who has recognized that the change effect has been executed, to a sense of expectation for the number of times of the game in which the predetermined amount changes.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to Feature N1,
The effect execution means,
Game time effect determination means for determining a game time effect (effect scenario in Modification Example 11 of the first embodiment) which is an effect executed in the game time based on the special information corresponding to the game time;
The change effect execution means sets the mode of the change effect (point giving effect in Modification Example 11 of the first embodiment) based on the contents of the game effect (effect scenario in Modification Example 11 of the first embodiment). A gaming machine comprising means for determining.

  According to the feature N2, since the change effect execution means determines the mode of the change effect based on the contents of the game effect effect, the change effect execution means is notified to the player who has recognized that the change effect has been executed. Based on the mode, it is possible to make a guess about the contents of the game rendition effect executed thereafter, and to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to Feature N2,
The change effect execution means,
In the case where the game effect includes a specific effect, and when the changing unit changes the predetermined amount before the specific effect is performed, the predetermined amount changes. Means for executing the change effect in a specific manner indicating that the change effect is performed (Modification 11 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature N3, the change effect execution means is a case where the game effect includes a specific effect, and the change means changes the predetermined amount before the specific effect is executed. Since the change effect indicating that the predetermined amount changes is executed in a specific mode, the relationship between the mode of each executed change effect and the content of the game rendition effect executed thereafter is given to the player. Each time a change effect is executed, the content of the game effect to be executed thereafter is estimated. Further, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the special information corresponding to the game time based on the content of the estimated game time effect.

<Character O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A predetermined amount display means for displaying a predetermined amount;
Calculation suggestion effect execution means for executing a calculation suggestion effect that is an effect of a mode suggesting that operation processing is performed on the displayed predetermined amount;
A gaming machine comprising:
The operation suggestion effect execution means,
As one calculation suggestion effect, a mode suggesting that an addition process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount or a suggestion that a multiplication process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount. From one of the aspects, the aspect suggesting that an addition process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount or the execution of a multiplication process on the displayed predetermined amount. An arithmetic processing mode change effect executing means for executing an operation mode change effect which is an effect for changing to the other mode of the suggested mode (Modification 15 in the first embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature O1, by changing the mode of the calculation suggestion effect, it is possible to recognize that the calculation method executed for the displayed predetermined amount has changed, and it is possible to provide unexpectedness. . In addition, since the new predetermined amount after the execution of the arithmetic processing may greatly differ depending on the arithmetic method executed for the predetermined amount, the player may be changed by changing the mode of the operation suggestion effect. Can be given a sense of urgency, and intonation can be given to the player's sense of expectation.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein
A mode that indicates that the addition process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount is an additive symbol display mode in which an arithmetic symbol “+” indicating an addition is displayed.
A mode that indicates that the multiplication process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount is a multiplication symbol display mode that is a mode in which an arithmetic symbol “x” indicating multiplication is displayed,
The arithmetic processing mode change effect execution means,
As the arithmetic processing mode change effect, either the symbol “+”, which is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition, or the symbol “x”, which is an arithmetic symbol indicating multiplication, is rotated to display the arithmetic symbol indicating addition. There is provided a means for executing an effect of changing to a display of one of a certain “+” and an arithmetic symbol “x” indicating multiplication (Modification 15 in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature O2, the meaning can be largely changed by executing a process of rotating substantially the same line drawing symbol such as “+” and “x”, so that the player can be changed despite the simple process. , A great sense of urgency can be given to the player, and intonation can be given to the expectation of the player.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature O1 or the feature O2,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (a function of executing a point giving effect) for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A specific process executing means for executing a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment);
With
The specific processing execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process is performed in the game time more than when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of execution is high,
The changing means includes:
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulation points) is set to a predetermined threshold (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed. A game machine characterized by comprising means for changing so as to reach).

  According to the characteristic O3, a specific process is executed in the game time when the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, as compared with the case where the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, by executing the specific processing, a great sense of expectation can be given to the player. Further, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold by the time the specific process is executed. Every time the amount is changed, an expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the sense of urgency of the player with respect to the change of the mode of the calculation suggestion effect, and when the mode of the calculation suggestion effect is changed, a great inflection is expected in the player's expectation of the game. Can be granted.

<Character P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
Predetermined amount display means for displaying the predetermined amount;
Prior to the change of the predetermined amount, a multiplication mode effect execution means for executing a multiplication mode effect that is an effect of a mode suggesting that a multiplication process is performed on the displayed predetermined value,
(Modification 15 of the first embodiment),
The predetermined amount display means includes:
When the multiplication mode effect execution means executes the multiplication mode effect, the multiplication mode effect execution means includes means for displaying, as a new predetermined amount, a multiplication result amount that is a result of multiplying the displayed predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature P1, the multiplication mode effect execution means for executing the multiplication mode effect is provided, so that the player who has recognized the execution of the multiplication mode effect is given an expectation for the value multiplied by the predetermined amount. Can be paid attention to the multiplication mode effect.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to Feature P1, wherein:
The multiplication mode effect execution means,
There is provided means for controlling a mode of the multiplication mode effect to be executed according to a magnitude of a value by which the displayed predetermined amount is multiplied (Modification 15 in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the feature P2, the multiplication mode effect execution means controls the mode of the multiplication mode effect to be executed according to the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the displayed predetermined amount. Can be done.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to Feature P1 or Feature P2,
The predetermined amount display means includes:
Means for displaying, as a new predetermined amount, an amount larger than a multiplication result amount, which is an amount of a result of multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, when the multiplication mode effect execution unit executes the multiplication mode effect. (Modification 15 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature P3, when the multiplication mode effect execution means executes the multiplication mode effect, an amount larger than the multiplication result amount that is a result of multiplying the displayed predetermined amount is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Therefore, unexpectedness and happiness can be given to the player who has recognized the new predetermined amount larger than the multiplication result amount.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to P3, which indicates that an addition process is to be performed on the displayed predetermined amount before the predetermined amount changes. An addition mode effect execution unit that executes an addition mode effect that is an effect of the mode,
The predetermined amount display means includes:
When the addition mode effect execution unit executes the addition mode effect, a unit is provided that displays an addition result amount, which is the amount of the result of adding the displayed predetermined amount, as a new predetermined amount ( First Embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature P4, since the addition mode effect execution means is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency or tension such as whether the addition mode effect or the multiplication mode effect is executed.

[Feature P5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features P1 to P4,
Prior to the change of the predetermined amount, an addition mode effect execution means for performing an addition mode effect which is an effect of a mode suggesting that an addition process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount is provided. ,
The predetermined amount display means includes:
When the addition mode effect execution unit executes the addition mode effect, an amount larger than an addition result amount that is a result of adding the displayed predetermined amount is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Means (Modification 15 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature P5, when the addition mode effect execution means executes the addition mode effect, an amount larger than the addition result amount that is a result of multiplying the displayed predetermined amount is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Therefore, unexpectedness and happiness can be given to the player who has recognized the new predetermined amount larger than the addition result amount.

<Characteristic Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
First changing means for changing a first amount in the game times (a function of giving points in Modification Example 22 of the first embodiment);
Second changing means for changing the second amount in the game times (a function of giving points in the modification 22 of the first embodiment);
First specific processing execution means for executing a first specific processing;
A second specific process executing means for executing a second specific process;
With
The first changing means includes:
When the first specific process execution means executes the first specific process, the first amount is set to a predetermined first threshold value before the first specific process is executed. 10 points).
The second changing means includes:
When the second specific process execution means executes the second specific process, the second amount is set to a predetermined second threshold value before the second specific process is executed. (10 points).

  According to the feature Q1, when the first specific process execution unit executes the first specific process, the first changing unit sets the first amount in advance by the time the first specific process is executed. When the second specific process execution unit executes the second specific process, the second change unit executes the second specific process until the second specific process is executed. In addition, since the second amount is changed so as to reach a second threshold value set in advance, a sense of expectation can be given to the player when the first amount changes, and further, the second amount is changed. Is changed, the expectation can be given to the player. That is, in the number of times of the game, the player can be made to pay attention to the change of at least two amounts, and a sense of expectation can be given.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine according to Feature Q1, wherein
The game time in which the first specific process is executed is more expected than the game time in which the first specific process is not executed, in which the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Gaming machine characterized by high performance.

  According to the feature Q2, a sense of expectation is given to the player who has recognized that the first specific process has been executed in the game time, that the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. be able to.

[Feature Q3]
The gaming machine according to Feature Q1 or Feature Q2,
Reset processing for returning at least one of the first amount and the second amount changed in the game round to a preset initial value upon termination of the game round (point reset processing in the first embodiment) A game machine comprising reset means for executing the following.

  According to the feature Q3, since the reset means is provided, at least one of the first amount and the second amount is set to a threshold value (first threshold value, second threshold value) corresponding to each amount before the game round ends. Can be given to the player so as to reach. Also, the game time is started, and the player who recognizes that at least one of the first amount and the second amount has started to change is made aware of the time when the game time ends, and the first amount and the first amount are changed. One can note the manner in which the second quantity changes.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine according to feature Q3,
The reset means,
In the first case, at least one of the first amount and the second amount changed in the game time is returned to the initial value upon the end of the game time, and in the second case (the game time is carried over) In the case of a game round), means for not returning at least one of the first amount and the second amount changed in the game round to the initial value upon the end of the game round (carrying over the accumulation point) A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature Q4, at least one of the first amount and the second amount may or may not return to the initial value upon the end of the game round, and therefore, the first amount and the second amount may not change in the game round. Even if at least one of the second amounts does not reach the threshold value corresponding to each amount, the amount is not returned to the initial value at the end of the game round, but is maintained until the next game round, and the next game round is performed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the threshold may be reached in the round. That is, even at the end of the game round, a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

<Characteristic R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
A specific process execution unit that executes a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value by changing the change unit;
Reset means for executing reset processing (point reset processing in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount changed by the changing means to a preset initial value;
With
The reset means,
In the first case (when the game time is not the carryover game time), the predetermined amount changed in the game time is returned to the initial value upon the end of the game time, and in the second case (the game time is In the case of a carry-over game time), means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game time to the initial value upon the end of the game time,
The reset means does not return the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game time to the initial value upon the end of the game time, the larger the number of times of the end of the game time, the more the predetermined game time The degree of expectation that the special information corresponding to a game to be executed later satisfies the predetermined condition is high (Modification 25 in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the characteristic R1, the reset means does not return the predetermined amount changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value upon the end of the game round as the number of times of the end of the game round increases, the more the predetermined number increases. Since the special information corresponding to the game time executed after the game time has a high expectation that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value when the game time ends. , The greater the sense of expectation can be given to the player.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to Feature R1, wherein
When the special information in the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies a predetermined condition,
The reset means,
Means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the first game time to an initial value until the second game time,
The changing means includes:
A gaming machine comprising: means for restricting a change amount of the predetermined amount so that the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value from the first game time to the second game time.

  According to the feature R2, for the player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the time of the end of the game time and the opportunity for the end of the game time continues and the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value. , Can give a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the player from decreasing in a state where the predetermined amount has not reached the threshold value.

<Characteristic S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times from a preset initial value (a function of executing a point giving effect);
A specific process execution unit that executes a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value by changing the change unit;
A threshold changing unit that executes a threshold changing process for changing the value of the threshold (Modification 26 of the first embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature S1, the predetermined amount is changed in the game times, and the specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the preset threshold value. Therefore, the player pays attention to the mode of the predetermined amount change. Can be done. In addition, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold and a specific process is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority or expectation. Further, since the threshold value may be changed, it is difficult for the player to estimate the timing at which the specific process is executed, and the specific process can be executed at a timing not expected by the player. As a result, unexpectedness can be given to the player.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
The threshold changing means,
A gaming machine comprising: a threshold change process determining unit that determines whether to execute the threshold change process in the game time based on the special information corresponding to the game time.

  According to the feature S2, based on the special information corresponding to the game time, it is determined whether to execute the threshold change process in the game time, so the player who has recognized that the threshold value has been changed, or To give a sense of expectation to a player who recognizes that a threshold has been changed when a specific process has been executed, as to whether or not special information corresponding to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Can be.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
When the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process is performed in the game time more than when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability of execution.

  According to the feature S3, when the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, a specific process is executed in the game time, when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability of execution is high, the expectation can be given to the player when the specific process is executed. Further, since the specific processing is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even when the predetermined amount changes.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine comprising:
In a case where the game round operation is ended after the game round operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination unit is set to one of the game rounds,
Changing means (function of executing a point giving effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game times;
Before the predetermined amount is changed, a change amount display (indicative point suggestion display in Modification 27 of the first embodiment) indicating information on the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the changing unit is displayed. Change amount display means;
A gaming machine equipped with.

  According to the feature T1, before the predetermined amount is changed, the change means displays the change amount display indicating the information on the change amount of the predetermined amount to be changed, so that the player who has recognized the change amount display is displayed. Thus, it is possible to give various inferences and feelings of expectation to the game times corresponding to the change amount display.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to Feature T1,
Game time display means for displaying a game time display which is a display indicating one game time being held or being executed,
The change amount display means includes:
A gaming machine comprising: means for displaying the change amount display corresponding to a predetermined game time in association with the game time display corresponding to the predetermined game time.

  According to the feature T2, since the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed in association with the game time display corresponding to the predetermined game time, the change amount display displayed in association with the game time display is displayed. It is possible to give the player who has recognized various guesses and feelings of expectation to the game times corresponding to the displayed change amount display. For example, when the change amount display is displayed in association with the game time display corresponding to the suspended game time, various inferences and expectations regarding the suspended game time are given to the player who has recognized the change amount display. A feeling can be given.

[Feature T3]
The gaming machine according to feature T2,
The change amount display means includes:
After displaying the change amount display corresponding to a predetermined game time in association with the game time display corresponding to a game time different from the predetermined game time, the game time display corresponding to the predetermined game time A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying in association with a game machine.

According to the feature T3, after displaying the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game time in association with the game time display corresponding to the game time different from the predetermined game time, the game time corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed. Since it is displayed in association with the display, it is possible to reverse the player's guess based on the change amount display displayed in association with the game time display corresponding to a game time different from the predetermined game time, Thus, unexpectedness can be provided.
[Feature T4]
The gaming machine according to Feature T2 or Feature T3,
The change amount display means includes:
After displaying a change amount display corresponding to a change amount different from the change amount changed by the changing means in the predetermined game time, a change corresponding to the change amount changed by the change means in the predetermined game time A gaming machine characterized by displaying a quantity display.

  According to the characteristic T4, after displaying the change amount display corresponding to the change amount different from the change amount changed by the change means in the predetermined game time, the change corresponding to the change amount changed by the change means in the predetermined game time Since the amount display is displayed, it is possible to reverse the player's guess based on the change amount display corresponding to the change amount different from the change amount changed by the changing means in a predetermined game time, and it is unexpected for the player. The character can be given, and the intonation can be given to the expectation of the player.

[Feature T5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features T1 to T4,
A specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment);
The changing means includes:
Change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulation points) to reach a preset threshold value (10 points);
The specific processing execution means,
When the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process is performed in the game time more than when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of execution is high,
The change control means,
When the specific process execution means executes the specific process, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold (10 points) before the specific process (button press effect) is executed. Gaming machine, characterized in that it has means for changing the size of the game machine.

  According to the feature T5, when the special information corresponding to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the specific process is executed in the game time when the special information corresponding to the game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, by executing the specific processing, a great sense of expectation can be given to the player. In addition, when the specific process execution unit executes the specific process, the change control unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Every time the predetermined amount is changed, a sense of expectation can be given to the player. Therefore, by changing the predetermined amount and executing the specific process, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in a stepwise manner.

  The inventions of the above-described feature group A to feature group T solve the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various types of structures, controls, effects, etc., are used for the purpose of improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, etc. Technical improvements have been made from a point of view.

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as detection and deterrence of illegal acts by the player and illegal alteration of the gaming machine.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the interest in the games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machines, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing more healthy games. It is rare.
<Characteristic U group>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time execution means for executing the game time, when the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times;
Firing means for firing a game ball;
A ball entry section into which the launched game balls can enter,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry section (the electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment);
A state of the assisting means is a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entry section, and State transition means for transitioning to a second state (a state in which the electrically-powered accessory 44a is open), which is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high-frequency support mode) and a second control mode are different control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (Low-frequency support mode).
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means,
The control mode is changed from the first control mode (high-frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low) at the start of a game round for notifying the result of the determination based on the result of the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine comprising means for switching to a frequency support mode.

  According to the feature U1, since the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round for notifying the result of the determination based on the result of the determination by the determining unit, the game is provided. The processing executed after the start of the round and the control mode of the state transition means can prevent an excessively advantageous or disadvantageous state for the player. For example, if the control mode of the state transition means is a control mode advantageous to the player, and if the processing executed after the start of the game turns to a state advantageous to the player, a state excessively advantageous to the player There is a possibility that it will be. However, since the gaming machine according to this feature includes a unit that switches the control mode based on the result of the determination by the determination unit at the start of the game round, for example, a process executed after the start of the game round can be performed in a state advantageous to the player. In such a case, by switching the control mode from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is not too advantageous to the player, it is possible to suppress a state that is excessively advantageous to the player. .

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to Feature U1, wherein
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode), the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode). A gaming machine characterized in that a game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry section than in the case of controlling the game machine.

  According to the feature U2, when the state transition means is controlled in the first control mode, a game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry section than when controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this feature, when the processing executed after the start of the game turns into a state advantageous to the player, the control mode is changed from the control mode advantageous to the player to the state in accordance with the state. Since the control mode can be switched to a control mode that does not become too large, it is possible to suppress a state that is excessively advantageous to the player.

[Feature U3]
The gaming machine according to Feature U1 or Feature U2,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means,
When the determining unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a bonus granting unit (a function for executing a round game) )When,
When the game time corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, a game time running privilege granting unit (function for executing a special bonus process) that grants a privilege during execution of the game time. With
The control means,
When the game cycle to be executed satisfies the specific condition (when the specific processing flag is ON), at the start of the game cycle, the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode. A gaming machine comprising a switching means (a function of turning off a high frequency support mode flag).

  According to the feature U3, when the game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, the bonus is given by the game round execution privilege granting unit during the execution of the game round, and the game is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, the control means includes means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game time when the game time satisfies a specific condition. Even during the period in which the privilege is granted by the running privilege granting means, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

[Feature U4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features U1 to U3,
A first ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
With
The auxiliary means,
It is arranged at any one of the first ball entry part or the second ball entry part,
The information acquisition means,
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry section, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry section With
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. Means for storing the second special information, which is the special information,
The game execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying a result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the first special information, and a notification result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the second special information. A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel.

  According to the feature U4, a means for executing the first special information game time and the second special information game time in parallel is provided. For example, the second special information game time is executed during the execution of the first special information game time. A process of giving a privilege to the determination result can be performed. In such a case, the processing executed after the start of the first special information game turns into a state advantageous to the player. However, the gaming machine of this feature switches the control mode to the first mode at the start of the first special information game round. Since there is provided a means for switching from the control mode to the second control mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous during the execution of the first special information game.

<Characteristic V group>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature V1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time execution means for executing the game time, when the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times;
When the determining unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a bonus granting unit (a function of executing a round game) for granting a bonus after a game round for notifying a result of the determination,
A game time corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition (a game time that has won a jackpot) is defined as a condition-fulfilled game time, and the condition-established game time executed first among the two condition-fulfilled game times. Is the first condition satisfied game time, and when the condition satisfied game time executed after the first condition satisfied game time is the post condition satisfied game time, the process at the start of the post condition satisfied game time is A processing determining means for determining based on the special information corresponding to the game condition where the preceding condition is satisfied (based on the jackpot type of the previous game time having won the jackpot, a special bonus process is performed at the start of the game time after the jackpot is won). Function to determine whether or not to perform related processing),
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the feature V1, since the processing at the start of the post-condition satisfied game time is determined based on the special information corresponding to the first condition satisfied game time, the processing determination means is provided. A corresponding process to the process to be executed at the start of the post-condition satisfying game round can be executed beforehand. For example, performing an effect indicating a process to be executed at the start of the post-condition establishment game time in the pre-condition establishment game time, or in the game time executed between the pre-condition establishment game time and the post-condition establishment game time It is possible to execute various processing corresponding to the processing executed at the start of the post-condition establishment game round, such as executing an effect indicating the processing to be executed at the start of the post-condition establishment game round, and to enhance the interest of the game. be able to.
Further, since the processing at the start of the post-condition establishment game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the first condition establishment game round, for example, the processing determined as the processing at the start of the post-condition establishment game round is the player If it is a process that is advantageous to the game time, a process that does not become excessively advantageous to the player by the process based on the special information corresponding to the condition-fulfilled game time is performed as a corresponding process for the post-condition satisfied game time. Can be run at startup.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to Feature V1, wherein
Firing means for firing a game ball;
A ball entry section into which the launched game balls can enter,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry section (the electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment);
A state of the assisting means is a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entry section, and State transition means for transitioning to a second state (a state in which the electrically-powered accessory 44a is open), which is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high-frequency support mode) and a second control mode are different control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (Low-frequency support mode).
With
The processing determining means,
It is determined whether or not to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round in which the post-condition is satisfied (determination as to whether or not to turn off a high frequency support mode flag). A gaming machine comprising means for executing the game based on the special information corresponding to the game condition in which the preceding condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature V2, the process determining means determines whether or not to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the post-condition satisfying game time, in accordance with the first condition satisfying game time. Since the processing is performed based on the special information, for example, when a process advantageous to the player is performed at the start of the post-condition satisfying game time based on the special information corresponding to the preceding condition satisfying game time, a response to the process is performed. As a process, whether to switch the control mode from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is not too advantageous to the player at the start of the post-condition satisfied game round based on the special information corresponding to the first condition satisfied game round The determination can be performed, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

[Feature V3]
The gaming machine according to Feature V2,
A first ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
With
The information acquisition means,
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry section, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry section With
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. Means for storing the second special information, which is the special information,
The game execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying a result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the first special information, and a notification result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the second special information. Means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The gaming machine further comprises:
When the time of the game executed by the game execution unit is set as the game time, the game execution unit includes a game time setting unit that sets the game time,
A game time corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a first condition satisfied game time, and the first condition satisfied game time executed first among the two first condition satisfied game times is In the case where the first first condition fulfilled game time and the first first condition fulfilled game time executed after the first first condition fulfilled game time are the first post condition fulfilled game time,
The game time determination means,
The method of setting the game time of the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first post-condition game time is executed is based on the special information corresponding to the first first condition satisfied game time. (The setting process of the variable time for the second starting port in the second embodiment / the first starting which subsequently won the jackpot based on the jackpot type of the game time for the first starting port which was previously won the jackpot) At the start of the mouth game round, the ON / OFF of the high frequency support mode flag is determined, and based on the state of the high frequency support mode flag, the period in which the first start port game round later won as a jackpot is executed. (A function of determining a method of setting the variation time of the second start-up game time executed).

  According to the feature V3, the method of setting the game time of the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first post-condition game time is executed is set to the special information corresponding to the first first condition satisfied game time. For example, the second special information game time of the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first post-condition satisfaction game time is executed based on the special information corresponding to the first first condition satisfaction game time The setting method can be determined to be a setting method advantageous to the player. More specifically, a method of setting the game time of the second special information game round can be determined to be a setting method in which the average value of the game time is relatively short. In this case, there is a possibility that the period in which the first post-condition satisfying game round is being executed may be excessively advantageous to the player. For example, as shown in the feature V2, as a process corresponding to the process, Since the control mode can be switched at the start of the first post-condition satisfying game round based on the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition fulfilling game round, for example, the control mode which is advantageous to the player becomes advantageous to the player. By switching to the control mode in which only the first post condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous during the period in which the first post-condition satisfying game cycle is being executed.

<Characteristic W group>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time execution means for executing the game time, when the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times;
A game time setting unit that sets the game time, when the time of the game executed by the game execution unit is a game time,
Firing means for firing a game ball;
A ball entry section into which the launched game balls can enter,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry section (the electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment);
A state of the assisting means is a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entry section, and State transition means for transitioning to a second state (a state in which the electrically-powered accessory 44a is open), which is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high-frequency support mode) and a second control mode are different control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (Low-frequency support mode).
A gaming machine comprising:
In a situation where game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means, a case where the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high-frequency support mode). However, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry section than when the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low-frequency support mode),
The game time setting means,
It is possible to execute at least a first setting method and a second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is shorter than the first setting method as the game time setting method,
The control means,
The game time setting means switches the method of setting the game time from the first setting method to the second setting method based on a specific opportunity (when the specific bonus process is started, the game time for the second starting port is changed). Switching the setting method of the fluctuation time / switching from the high-accuracy high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing to the high-accuracy low-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition processing), the control mode is changed based on the specific trigger. A gaming machine comprising: means for switching from a first control mode to the second control mode (a function of turning off a high-frequency support mode flag).

In a general gaming machine, when the setting method of the game time is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is shorter than the first setting method, The control mode of the transition means is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode in which a game ball is more likely to enter the entry section than in the second control mode. However, in this case, there is a possibility that a state that is excessively advantageous to the player may occur.
According to the gaming machine with the feature W1, the control mode is changed to the second based on the specific opportunity, although the setting method of the game time is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method based on the specific opportunity. Since the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to Feature W1,
A first ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
With
The information acquisition means,
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry section, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry section With
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. Means for storing the second special information, which is the special information,
The game execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying a result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the first special information, and a notification result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the second special information. Means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The specific opportunity is a start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition,
The control means,
The game time of the second special information game time executed during a period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed. Although the setting method is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method,
A gaming machine, wherein the control mode is switched from the first control mode (high-frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low-frequency support mode) based on the specific opportunity.

According to the feature W2, the method of setting the game time of the second special information game round executed during the period in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed Start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition even if the state becomes advantageous to the player by switching from the first setting method to the second setting method. As a result, the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.
Furthermore, since the opportunity for switching the control mode is the start of the first special information game corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the privilege is provided after the first special information game is completed. It is also possible to execute the following processing, it is possible to give a change in the state of various games to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Character X group>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time execution means for executing the game time, when the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times;
A first ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
Effect execution means for executing an effect,
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry section, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry section With
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. Means for storing the second special information, which is the special information,
The game execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying a result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the first special information, and a notification result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the second special information. Means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The effect execution means,
The effect performed in the second special information game round performed during a period from the start of the one first special information game round to the end thereof corresponds to the one first special information game round A gaming machine comprising means for determining based on the first special information (in the second embodiment, a function of executing a setting process for a small hit effect pattern at the time of a special bonus).

  According to the feature X1, the effect to be executed in the second special information game round executed during a period from the start of the first special information game round to the end thereof is the one of the first special information game round. Since the determination is made based on the first special information corresponding to the special information game time, the player can indirectly infer the first special information game time through the effect performed in the second special information game time. By using the effect performed in the second special information game round, an expectation for the first special information game round can be given.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to Feature X1, wherein:
When the determining unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege after the end of the game round for notifying the result of the determination,
A privilege type determining unit that determines the type of the privilege to be provided by the privilege providing unit from a plurality of types of the benefits;
With
The effect execution means,
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the first special information game time is determined based on a type of the privilege given after the end of the first special information game time. Means for deciding the effect to be executed in the second special information game round executed during the period from the start of the special information game round to the end of the special information game round (the jackpot type in the first start-up game round corresponding to the special bonus process) (A function of setting an effect pattern table for a small hit of the second start-up game time executed during the special bonus process on the basis of the special bonus process).

  According to the feature X2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation about the type of the privilege given after the end of the first special information game round, using the effect performed in the second special information game round.

[Feature X3]
The gaming machine according to Feature X1 or Feature X2,
The determination unit determines at least two types of determination modes for determining whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition: a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode). The judgment mode can be executed,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher when the determination unit is executing the second determination mode than when the first determination mode is executed,
The effect execution means,
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the determination mode executed by the determination means in the game time executed after the end of the first special information game time Means for deciding an effect to be executed in the second special information game round executed from the start to the end of the first special information game round based on the type of (A function of setting an effect pattern table for a small jackpot of the second opening game, which is executed during the special bonus process, depending on whether the jackpot type in the first opening game round is the probability change jackpot or the normal jackpot). A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature X3, the effect performed in the second special information game time is used to determine the game time determination mode to be executed after the end of the first special information game time where the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Expectation can be given to the player regarding the type.

<Characteristic Y group>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time execution means for executing the game time, when the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times;
A first ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry section, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry section With
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. Means for storing the second special information, which is the special information,
The game execution means,
A first special information game time (a game time for the first starting port in the second embodiment), which is a game time for notifying a result of the determination made by the determination means with respect to the first special information, and the second special information Means for executing in parallel with a second special information game time (game time for a second start-up port), which is a game time for notifying a result of the judgment by the judgment means for information,
The privilege granting means,
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time satisfies the predetermined condition, after the first special information game time ends, a game time for giving a benefit after the game time is completed. A privilege providing means after completion (a function of executing the open / close execution mode in the second embodiment);
In the case where the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time satisfies the predetermined condition, during the period in which the first special information game time is being executed, a game time execution benefit that is a benefit is provided. A game round executing privilege awarding means to be awarded (a function of executing a special bonus process in the second embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature Y1, since the after-game-time privilege providing means and the during-game-time benefit providing means are provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation about the after-game-time benefit and the during-game-time benefit. Also, for example, by setting a case in which a bonus during game execution is provided and a case in which a bonus is not provided, the first special information corresponding to the first special information that satisfies a predetermined condition is executed during the game execution. Even if it is, it is possible to guess whether or not the bonus during the execution of the game is given, and to give the player a sense of urgency.

[Feature Y2]
The gaming machine according to feature Y1, wherein:
The bonus granting means during the game round execution,
The game time execution is triggered by the second special information game time (game time for the second start port) executed during the period in which the first special information game time to which the game time execution privilege is given is executed. A gaming machine, comprising: means for giving a medium privilege (a bonus by a round game triggered by a small hit in a game round for a second starting port).

  According to the feature Y2, the first special information for giving the bonus during the game round is provided with the bonus during the game round being triggered by the second special information game round executed during the period in which the game round is being executed. Even when the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time satisfies a predetermined condition, the player is given a greater sense of expectation by executing the second special information game time. be able to.

[Feature Y3]
The gaming machine according to feature Y1 or feature Y2,
A game time setting unit that sets a game time that is a time of the game executed by the game execution unit based on the special information,
The upper limit value of the amount of the privilege given as the game time running privilege is the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the first special information game time giving the game time running privilege. A game machine characterized in that the game machine is determined on the basis of the value (the length of the fluctuation time of the first start-up game time executed as a special bonus process).

  According to the feature Y3, the upper limit of the amount of the privilege to be given as the bonus during the game execution is the first special information to which the bonus during the game execution is provided. Since it is determined on the basis of the length, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the first special information game time is desired to continue for a longer time. In addition, it is possible to provide a feeling of expectation that the player wants to acquire as many as possible bonuses during the game time as the end of the first special information game time approaches, and a feeling of frustration regarding the end time of the first special information game time. Inflection can be given to the emotion of the person.

<Characteristic Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time execution means for executing the game time, when the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times;
A first ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
Effect execution means for executing an effect,
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry section, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry section With
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. Means for storing the second special information, which is the special information,
The game execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying a result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the first special information, and a notification result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the second special information. Means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The effect execution means,
The first special information acquires elapsed time information that is information relating to an elapsed time from the start of the game round to a predetermined timing, and the first object that is an acquisition target of the elapsed time information is obtained based on the elapsed time information. Effect setting process executing means for executing an effect setting process for setting an effect corresponding to the second special information game executed during the period in which the special information game is executed (in the second embodiment, the special bonus A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing an effect pattern setting process for a small hit.

  According to the feature Z1, based on the elapsed time information that is information on the elapsed time from the start of the first special information game round to a predetermined timing, the execution is performed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. Since the effect corresponding to the performed second special information game time is set, the first special information game time is executed for the player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the executed second special information game time. To infer the elapsed time of the first special information game round and the remaining time until the end of the first special information game round, and indirectly give a sense of expectation to the first special information game round through an effect corresponding to the second special information game round Can be.

[Feature Z2]
The gaming machine according to feature Z1, wherein
The effect execution means,
Means for determining whether or not to execute the effect setting processing based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game for which the elapsed time information is to be obtained. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature Z2, it is determined whether or not to execute the effect setting process based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game time for which the elapsed time information is to be obtained. Therefore, the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information game time is performed based on the effect corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first special information game time is executed. It is possible to guess whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and it is possible to indirectly give a sense of expectation to the first special information game round through an effect corresponding to the second special information game round. .

[Feature Z3]
The gaming machine according to Feature Z1 or Feature Z2,
When the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition, the game apparatus further includes a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege after the game round is completed,
The effect execution means,
When the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined time after the first special information game time that satisfies the specific condition is started. The elapsed time information, which is information relating to the elapsed time until the timing (the remaining time RT of the fluctuation time of the first start-up game time), is acquired, and the first special information game time, from which the elapsed time information is acquired, is executed. A game machine comprising: means for executing an effect setting process for setting an effect corresponding to the second special information game time to be executed during the period.

  According to the feature Z3, the first special information game time is specified for the player based on the effect corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first special information game time is executed. Of the first special information game time can be indirectly provided through the effect corresponding to the second special information game time.

[Feature Z4]
The gaming machine according to feature Z3,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means,
When the determining unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a bonus granting unit (a function for executing a round game) )When,
When the game time corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies the specific condition, a game time running privilege granting unit (function for executing a special bonus process) that grants a privilege during execution of the game time. ).

  According to the feature Z4, when the game time corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies the specific condition, the privilege is given during the execution of the game time, so that the first special information is given to the player. Based on the effect corresponding to the second special information game time executed during the period in which the game time is being executed, it is possible to infer whether or not the first special information game time satisfies a specific condition. Indirectly through the effect corresponding to the second special information game round, a greater sense of expectation can be given to a privilege that may be provided during the execution of the first special information game round.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A determination result notifying unit that notifies a result of the determination by the determining unit using a symbol,
When the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means using a symbol is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times, a game time execution for executing the game time Means,
A first ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means,
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry section, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry section With
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. Means for storing the second special information, which is the special information,
The game execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying a result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the first special information, and a notification result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the second special information. Means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The privilege granting means,
When the special information corresponding to the game to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when a jackpot is won), a privilege granting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied for granting a privilege;
When the special information corresponding to the executed game times satisfies a specific condition (in the case of a small hit), a special condition-providing privilege providing means for providing a privilege is provided,
The determination result notifying means,
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game round executed during a period in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed is the second special information. When the determination unit determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination is performed using the symbol corresponding to the determination result indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Despite reporting the result, it corresponds to the second special information game time executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is executed. When the determination unit determines that the second special information satisfies the specific condition, the second special information corresponds to a determination result indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition. Using the symbol Gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a means for performing the specified condition satisfaction notifying process of notifying the result of determination.

  According to the feature Z1, the process executed when the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is displayed, Can be avoided at the same time with the processing executed when the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the condition is satisfied is displayed.

[Feature αA2]
The gaming machine according to feature αA1,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of a game ball into the entry section (the electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment);
A state of the assisting means is a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) in which it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball into the entry section, and State transition means for transitioning to a second state (a state in which the electrically-powered accessory 44a is open), which is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of game balls;
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high-frequency support mode) and a second control mode are different control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (Low-frequency support mode).
With
The control means,
At the start of the first special information game corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode ( A gaming machine comprising means for switching to a low-frequency support mode.

  According to the feature αA2, at the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition, there is provided means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode. The processing executed after the start of the first special information game round and the control mode of the state transition means can prevent the player from being excessively disadvantageous or disadvantageous to the player.

<Characteristic αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
Launching means for launching game balls toward the game area;
A first ball entry portion (first starting port 33) into which game balls flowing through the game area can enter, and
A second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) into which game balls flowing through the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section;
The first special information, which is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. Acquisition information storage means for storing the second special information as the special information,
Determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game time execution means for executing the game time, when the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times;
Display means (liquid crystal display device 41 in the second embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying a result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the first special information, and a notification result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the second special information. Means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel,
The display means,
First identification information (a first liquid crystal design in the second embodiment), which is identification information for indicating a result of the determination based on the first special information, and a result of the determination based on the second special information And area identification display means for displaying second identification information (a second liquid crystal design in the second embodiment) as identification information for indicating in different display areas of the display means.
The area-specific display means,
The first special information game in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is executed in the first state (a state in which the first round of the first opening game has not been won in the first round of the opening game). If so, a process of exchanging a display area for displaying the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and a display area for displaying the second identification information corresponding to the second special information is performed. Although the first special information is not executed, the first special information game time that satisfies the predetermined condition is in the second state (in the first start port game time previously won in the specific probability variable jackpot). (A state in which the first special information is displayed), a display area for displaying the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and the second identification information corresponding to the second special information are displayed. Predetermined display area Gaming machine, characterized in that it comprises means for performing processing to replace the timing.

  According to the feature αB1, even when the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the first identification information is changed according to the state in which the first special information game corresponding to the first special information is executed. Since the process of exchanging the display area to be displayed and the display area for displaying the second identification information may or may not be performed, the first special information game in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is performed. When executed, the state in which the first special information game is executed is the first state or the second state by causing the player to recognize whether or not the display area has been exchanged. It can be guessed that it was the state.

[Feature αB2]
The gaming machine according to Feature αB1, wherein the state in which the first special information game time in which the first special information meets the predetermined condition is the first state or the second state. A state determination process executing means for performing a state determination process for determining whether there is
The state determination means includes:
The first special information is based on the special information corresponding to the first execution first special information game time, which is the first special information game time executed before the first special information game time satisfying the predetermined condition. A gaming machine comprising means for executing the state determination process.

  According to the feature αB2, it is determined whether the state in which the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is the first state or the second state is the first execution state. 1 The special information is performed based on the special information corresponding to the game time. For example, in the first special information game time satisfying the predetermined condition, the processing based on the special information corresponding to the first execution first special information game time is performed. In addition, the processing can be performed using whether or not the display area can be replaced. For example, by performing an effect such as whether or not the display area is switched, information on special information corresponding to the first execution of the first special information game can be suggested.

<Characteristic αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time execution means for executing the game time, when the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times;
Game time setting means for setting a game time, which is the time of the game executed by the game execution means based on the special information,
When the special information corresponding to the game times satisfies the predetermined condition, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege (a function of executing a special bonus process in the second embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:
The upper limit of the amount of the privilege given as the privilege is the length of the game time (special bonus processing) set by the game time setting means for the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. The length of time of the first start-up game time executed as (the length of the fluctuation time).

  According to the feature αC1, the upper limit of the amount of the privilege given as the privilege is determined based on the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the game times corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the player wants the game time of the game corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition to continue longer. In addition, it is possible to provide a feeling of expectation that the player wants to obtain as many benefits as possible as the end of the game round approaches, and a feeling of frustration regarding the end time of the game round, thereby giving inflection to the emotions of the player. .

[Feature αC2]
The gaming machine according to feature αC1,
Firing means for firing a game ball;
A ball entry section into which the launched game balls can enter,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of game balls into the entry section,
The first state is a state in which the state of the auxiliary means makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the entry section, and the state allows the game ball to enter the entry section easily or easily. State transition means for transitioning to a second state that is a
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control means is capable of executing at least a first control mode and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. Means,
With
The control means,
When the privilege granting means grants the privilege, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high-frequency support mode) at the start of the game corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. A gaming machine comprising: means for switching to the second control mode (low-frequency support mode).

  According to the feature αC2, when the privilege granting unit grants the privilege, the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round corresponding to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition. Therefore, by the privilege given after the start of the game and the control mode of the state transition means, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantageous or disadvantageous.

[Feature αC3]
The gaming machine according to feature αC2,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode), the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode). A gaming machine characterized in that a game ball is more likely to enter the ball entry section than in the case of controlling the game machine.

  According to the feature αC3, when the state transition means is controlled in the first control mode, a game ball is more likely to enter the entry portion than when controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this feature, at the start of the game round in which the privilege is provided by the privilege providing means, the control mode can be switched from the control mode advantageous to the player to the control mode not too advantageous to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state.

  The inventions of the above-described feature U group to feature αC group solve the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, various types of structures, controls, effects, etc., are used for the purpose of improving the interest of games, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, etc. Technical improvements have been made from a point of view.

  In addition, various technical improvements have been made for the purpose of improving the soundness of the game, such as detection and deterrence of illegal acts by the player and illegal alteration of the gaming machine.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further technical improvements are desired for the purpose of improving the interest in the games, reducing the processing load of the gaming machines, optimizing the processing, simplifying the control, and providing more healthy games. It is rare.

  Note that a configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the above-described feature A group to feature αC group are appropriately combined may be adopted. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and a starting ball provided in the game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter. A game unit comprising: a unit, information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the starting ball entry unit, and acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means. Machine.

  Spindle-type gaming machines such as slot machines: picture display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, start means for starting the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to operation of the start operation means, and operation of stop operation means A gaming machine comprising: a stop means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to a predetermined time or a lapse of a predetermined time; and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player according to the picture after the stop.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and can be implemented with various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in the respective embodiments described in the summary of the invention, the technical features in the modified examples may be used to solve some or all of the above-described problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, replacement and combination can be performed as appropriate. If the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19 ... Glass unit 20 ... Upper plate 21 ... Lower plate 22 ... Discharge port 23 ... Lever 24 ... Direction operation button 25 ... Operation handle 25a ... Touch sensor 25b ... Weight button 25c ... Variable resistor 26 ... Gaming ball firing button 30 ... Game board 31 ... Induction rail 31a ... Inner rail 31b ... Outer rail 32 ... General winning opening 33 ... First starting opening 44 ... First starting opening 34 ... Second starting opening 34a ... Electric accessory 44a ... Electric accessory 34b ... Electric accessory Object drive unit 44b ... Electric accessory drive unit 35 ... Thru gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Big winning opening 36b ... Opening and closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive unit 37 ... Special figure unit 37a ... First symbol display part 37 ... Second symbol display part 37c ... First reservation display part 37d ... Second reservation display part 38 ... Public figure unit 39 ... Round display part 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... .Symbol display device 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out opening 44b ... Electric accessory drive unit 45 ... Main display unit 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 48a ... Opening door 48b. ..Opening / closing door drive unit 60 ... Main control device 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main side MPU
63 ... Main ROM
64 ... Main RAM
70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launching mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Sound emission control device 91 ... Sound emission control board 92 ... Sound light side MPU
93 ... Sound light side ROM
94 ... Sound light RAM
100 display controller 101 display control board 102 display MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
Sync1 ... first synchronous display area Sync2 ... second synchronous display area PA ... game area MA ... main display area Ra ... first reserved area Rb ... second reserved area Ds1 ... .1st hold display area Ds2 ... second hold display area RaN ... first start hold number RbN ... second start hold number

Claims (4)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information when the acquisition condition is satisfied;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
Determining means for determining whether the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A game time execution means for executing the game time, when the game operation for notifying the result of the judgment by the judgment means is started and then the game operation is ended, as one of the game times;
Firing means for firing a game ball;
A ball entry section into which the launched game balls can enter,
Auxiliary means for assisting the entry of game balls into the entry section,
The first state is a state in which the state of the auxiliary means makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the entry section, and the state allows the game ball to enter the entry section easily or easily. State transition means for transitioning to a second state that is a
Control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein the control means is capable of executing at least a first control mode and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. Means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means,
Means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of a game round for notifying the result of the determination based on the result of the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode, the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode. A gaming machine characterized by easy entry of gaming balls. A gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege,
The privilege granting means,
When the determination unit determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, after the end of the game round to provide a bonus after the end of the game round to notify the result of the determination, bonus providing means after the end of the game,
When the game time corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, a game time execution privilege granting unit that gives a privilege during execution of the game time,
The control means,
When the game cycle to be executed satisfies the specific condition, a means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game cycle is provided. Machine. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
A first ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
A second ball entry unit, which is a ball entry unit into which the launched game ball can enter,
With
The auxiliary means,
It is arranged at any one of the first ball entry part or the second ball entry part,
The information acquisition means,
Means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry section, and means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry section With
The acquisition information storage means,
The first special information, which is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the special information acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. Means for storing the second special information, which is the special information,
The game execution means,
A first special information game time, which is a game time for notifying a result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the first special information, and a notification result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the second special information. A gaming machine comprising: means for executing the second special information game time, which is a game time, in parallel.

Images